git-config.html

   1 <?xml version="1.0" encoding="UTF-8"?>
   2 <!DOCTYPE html PUBLIC "-//W3C//DTD XHTML 1.1//EN"
   3     "http://www.w3.org/TR/xhtml11/DTD/xhtml11.dtd">
   4 <html xmlns="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xml:lang="en">
   5 <head>
   6 <meta http-equiv="Content-Type" content="application/xhtml+xml; charset=UTF-8" />
   7 <meta name="generator" content="AsciiDoc 10.2.0" />
   8 <title>git-config(1)</title>
   9 <style type="text/css">
  10 /* Shared CSS for AsciiDoc xhtml11 and html5 backends */
  11
  12 /* Default font. */
  13 body {
  14   font-family: Georgia,serif;
  15 }
  16
  17 /* Title font. */
  18 h1, h2, h3, h4, h5, h6,
  19 div.title, caption.title,
  20 thead, p.table.header,
  21 #toctitle,
  22 #author, #revnumber, #revdate, #revremark,
  23 #footer {
  24   font-family: Arial,Helvetica,sans-serif;
  25 }
  26
  27 body {
  28   margin: 1em 5% 1em 5%;
  29 }
  30
  31 a {
  32   color: blue;
  33   text-decoration: underline;
  34 }
  35 a:visited {
  36   color: fuchsia;
  37 }
  38
  39 em {
  40   font-style: italic;
  41   color: navy;
  42 }
  43
  44 strong {
  45   font-weight: bold;
  46   color: #083194;
  47 }
  48
  49 h1, h2, h3, h4, h5, h6 {
  50   color: #527bbd;
  51   margin-top: 1.2em;
  52   margin-bottom: 0.5em;
  53   line-height: 1.3;
  54 }
  55
  56 h1, h2, h3 {
  57   border-bottom: 2px solid silver;
  58 }
  59 h2 {
  60   padding-top: 0.5em;
  61 }
  62 h3 {
  63   float: left;
  64 }
  65 h3 + * {
  66   clear: left;
  67 }
  68 h5 {
  69   font-size: 1.0em;
  70 }
  71
  72 div.sectionbody {
  73   margin-left: 0;
  74 }
  75
  76 hr {
  77   border: 1px solid silver;
  78 }
  79
  80 p {
  81   margin-top: 0.5em;
  82   margin-bottom: 0.5em;
  83 }
  84
  85 ul, ol, li > p {
  86   margin-top: 0;
  87 }
  88 ul > li     { color: #aaa; }
  89 ul > li > * { color: black; }
  90
  91 .monospaced, code, pre {
  92   font-family: "Courier New", Courier, monospace;
  93   font-size: inherit;
  94   color: navy;
  95   padding: 0;
  96   margin: 0;
  97 }
  98 pre {
  99   white-space: pre-wrap;
 100 }
 101
 102 #author {
 103   color: #527bbd;
 104   font-weight: bold;
 105   font-size: 1.1em;
 106 }
 107 #email {
 108 }
 109 #revnumber, #revdate, #revremark {
 110 }
 111
 112 #footer {
 113   font-size: small;
 114   border-top: 2px solid silver;
 115   padding-top: 0.5em;
 116   margin-top: 4.0em;
 117 }
 118 #footer-text {
 119   float: left;
 120   padding-bottom: 0.5em;
 121 }
 122 #footer-badges {
 123   float: right;
 124   padding-bottom: 0.5em;
 125 }
 126
 127 #preamble {
 128   margin-top: 1.5em;
 129   margin-bottom: 1.5em;
 130 }
 131 div.imageblock, div.exampleblock, div.verseblock,
 132 div.quoteblock, div.literalblock, div.listingblock, div.sidebarblock,
 133 div.admonitionblock {
 134   margin-top: 1.0em;
 135   margin-bottom: 1.5em;
 136 }
 137 div.admonitionblock {
 138   margin-top: 2.0em;
 139   margin-bottom: 2.0em;
 140   margin-right: 10%;
 141   color: #606060;
 142 }
 143
 144 div.content { /* Block element content. */
 145   padding: 0;
 146 }
 147
 148 /* Block element titles. */
 149 div.title, caption.title {
 150   color: #527bbd;
 151   font-weight: bold;
 152   text-align: left;
 153   margin-top: 1.0em;
 154   margin-bottom: 0.5em;
 155 }
 156 div.title + * {
 157   margin-top: 0;
 158 }
 159
 160 td div.title:first-child {
 161   margin-top: 0.0em;
 162 }
 163 div.content div.title:first-child {
 164   margin-top: 0.0em;
 165 }
 166 div.content + div.title {
 167   margin-top: 0.0em;
 168 }
 169
 170 div.sidebarblock > div.content {
 171   background: #ffffee;
 172   border: 1px solid #dddddd;
 173   border-left: 4px solid #f0f0f0;
 174   padding: 0.5em;
 175 }
 176
 177 div.listingblock > div.content {
 178   border: 1px solid #dddddd;
 179   border-left: 5px solid #f0f0f0;
 180   background: #f8f8f8;
 181   padding: 0.5em;
 182 }
 183
 184 div.quoteblock, div.verseblock {
 185   padding-left: 1.0em;
 186   margin-left: 1.0em;
 187   margin-right: 10%;
 188   border-left: 5px solid #f0f0f0;
 189   color: #888;
 190 }
 191
 192 div.quoteblock > div.attribution {
 193   padding-top: 0.5em;
 194   text-align: right;
 195 }
 196
 197 div.verseblock > pre.content {
 198   font-family: inherit;
 199   font-size: inherit;
 200 }
 201 div.verseblock > div.attribution {
 202   padding-top: 0.75em;
 203   text-align: left;
 204 }
 205 /* DEPRECATED: Pre version 8.2.7 verse style literal block. */
 206 div.verseblock + div.attribution {
 207   text-align: left;
 208 }
 209
 210 div.admonitionblock .icon {
 211   vertical-align: top;
 212   font-size: 1.1em;
 213   font-weight: bold;
 214   text-decoration: underline;
 215   color: #527bbd;
 216   padding-right: 0.5em;
 217 }
 218 div.admonitionblock td.content {
 219   padding-left: 0.5em;
 220   border-left: 3px solid #dddddd;
 221 }
 222
 223 div.exampleblock > div.content {
 224   border-left: 3px solid #dddddd;
 225   padding-left: 0.5em;
 226 }
 227
 228 div.imageblock div.content { padding-left: 0; }
 229 span.image img { border-style: none; vertical-align: text-bottom; }
 230 a.image:visited { color: white; }
 231
 232 dl {
 233   margin-top: 0.8em;
 234   margin-bottom: 0.8em;
 235 }
 236 dt {
 237   margin-top: 0.5em;
 238   margin-bottom: 0;
 239   font-style: normal;
 240   color: navy;
 241 }
 242 dd > *:first-child {
 243   margin-top: 0.1em;
 244 }
 245
 246 ul, ol {
 247     list-style-position: outside;
 248 }
 249 ol.arabic {
 250   list-style-type: decimal;
 251 }
 252 ol.loweralpha {
 253   list-style-type: lower-alpha;
 254 }
 255 ol.upperalpha {
 256   list-style-type: upper-alpha;
 257 }
 258 ol.lowerroman {
 259   list-style-type: lower-roman;
 260 }
 261 ol.upperroman {
 262   list-style-type: upper-roman;
 263 }
 264
 265 div.compact ul, div.compact ol,
 266 div.compact p, div.compact p,
 267 div.compact div, div.compact div {
 268   margin-top: 0.1em;
 269   margin-bottom: 0.1em;
 270 }
 271
 272 tfoot {
 273   font-weight: bold;
 274 }
 275 td > div.verse {
 276   white-space: pre;
 277 }
 278
 279 div.hdlist {
 280   margin-top: 0.8em;
 281   margin-bottom: 0.8em;
 282 }
 283 div.hdlist tr {
 284   padding-bottom: 15px;
 285 }
 286 dt.hdlist1.strong, td.hdlist1.strong {
 287   font-weight: bold;
 288 }
 289 td.hdlist1 {
 290   vertical-align: top;
 291   font-style: normal;
 292   padding-right: 0.8em;
 293   color: navy;
 294 }
 295 td.hdlist2 {
 296   vertical-align: top;
 297 }
 298 div.hdlist.compact tr {
 299   margin: 0;
 300   padding-bottom: 0;
 301 }
 302
 303 .comment {
 304   background: yellow;
 305 }
 306
 307 .footnote, .footnoteref {
 308   font-size: 0.8em;
 309 }
 310
 311 span.footnote, span.footnoteref {
 312   vertical-align: super;
 313 }
 314
 315 #footnotes {
 316   margin: 20px 0 20px 0;
 317   padding: 7px 0 0 0;
 318 }
 319
 320 #footnotes div.footnote {
 321   margin: 0 0 5px 0;
 322 }
 323
 324 #footnotes hr {
 325   border: none;
 326   border-top: 1px solid silver;
 327   height: 1px;
 328   text-align: left;
 329   margin-left: 0;
 330   width: 20%;
 331   min-width: 100px;
 332 }
 333
 334 div.colist td {
 335   padding-right: 0.5em;
 336   padding-bottom: 0.3em;
 337   vertical-align: top;
 338 }
 339 div.colist td img {
 340   margin-top: 0.3em;
 341 }
 342
 343 @media print {
 344   #footer-badges { display: none; }
 345 }
 346
 347 #toc {
 348   margin-bottom: 2.5em;
 349 }
 350
 351 #toctitle {
 352   color: #527bbd;
 353   font-size: 1.1em;
 354   font-weight: bold;
 355   margin-top: 1.0em;
 356   margin-bottom: 0.1em;
 357 }
 358
 359 div.toclevel0, div.toclevel1, div.toclevel2, div.toclevel3, div.toclevel4 {
 360   margin-top: 0;
 361   margin-bottom: 0;
 362 }
 363 div.toclevel2 {
 364   margin-left: 2em;
 365   font-size: 0.9em;
 366 }
 367 div.toclevel3 {
 368   margin-left: 4em;
 369   font-size: 0.9em;
 370 }
 371 div.toclevel4 {
 372   margin-left: 6em;
 373   font-size: 0.9em;
 374 }
 375
 376 span.aqua { color: aqua; }
 377 span.black { color: black; }
 378 span.blue { color: blue; }
 379 span.fuchsia { color: fuchsia; }
 380 span.gray { color: gray; }
 381 span.green { color: green; }
 382 span.lime { color: lime; }
 383 span.maroon { color: maroon; }
 384 span.navy { color: navy; }
 385 span.olive { color: olive; }
 386 span.purple { color: purple; }
 387 span.red { color: red; }
 388 span.silver { color: silver; }
 389 span.teal { color: teal; }
 390 span.white { color: white; }
 391 span.yellow { color: yellow; }
 392
 393 span.aqua-background { background: aqua; }
 394 span.black-background { background: black; }
 395 span.blue-background { background: blue; }
 396 span.fuchsia-background { background: fuchsia; }
 397 span.gray-background { background: gray; }
 398 span.green-background { background: green; }
 399 span.lime-background { background: lime; }
 400 span.maroon-background { background: maroon; }
 401 span.navy-background { background: navy; }
 402 span.olive-background { background: olive; }
 403 span.purple-background { background: purple; }
 404 span.red-background { background: red; }
 405 span.silver-background { background: silver; }
 406 span.teal-background { background: teal; }
 407 span.white-background { background: white; }
 408 span.yellow-background { background: yellow; }
 409
 410 span.big { font-size: 2em; }
 411 span.small { font-size: 0.6em; }
 412
 413 span.underline { text-decoration: underline; }
 414 span.overline { text-decoration: overline; }
 415 span.line-through { text-decoration: line-through; }
 416
 417 div.unbreakable { page-break-inside: avoid; }
 418
 419
 420 /*
 421  * xhtml11 specific
 422  *
 423  * */
 424
 425 div.tableblock {
 426   margin-top: 1.0em;
 427   margin-bottom: 1.5em;
 428 }
 429 div.tableblock > table {
 430   border: 3px solid #527bbd;
 431 }
 432 thead, p.table.header {
 433   font-weight: bold;
 434   color: #527bbd;
 435 }
 436 p.table {
 437   margin-top: 0;
 438 }
 439 /* Because the table frame attribute is overridden by CSS in most browsers. */
 440 div.tableblock > table[frame="void"] {
 441   border-style: none;
 442 }
 443 div.tableblock > table[frame="hsides"] {
 444   border-left-style: none;
 445   border-right-style: none;
 446 }
 447 div.tableblock > table[frame="vsides"] {
 448   border-top-style: none;
 449   border-bottom-style: none;
 450 }
 451
 452
 453 /*
 454  * html5 specific
 455  *
 456  * */
 457
 458 table.tableblock {
 459   margin-top: 1.0em;
 460   margin-bottom: 1.5em;
 461 }
 462 thead, p.tableblock.header {
 463   font-weight: bold;
 464   color: #527bbd;
 465 }
 466 p.tableblock {
 467   margin-top: 0;
 468 }
 469 table.tableblock {
 470   border-width: 3px;
 471   border-spacing: 0px;
 472   border-style: solid;
 473   border-color: #527bbd;
 474   border-collapse: collapse;
 475 }
 476 th.tableblock, td.tableblock {
 477   border-width: 1px;
 478   padding: 4px;
 479   border-style: solid;
 480   border-color: #527bbd;
 481 }
 482
 483 table.tableblock.frame-topbot {
 484   border-left-style: hidden;
 485   border-right-style: hidden;
 486 }
 487 table.tableblock.frame-sides {
 488   border-top-style: hidden;
 489   border-bottom-style: hidden;
 490 }
 491 table.tableblock.frame-none {
 492   border-style: hidden;
 493 }
 494
 495 th.tableblock.halign-left, td.tableblock.halign-left {
 496   text-align: left;
 497 }
 498 th.tableblock.halign-center, td.tableblock.halign-center {
 499   text-align: center;
 500 }
 501 th.tableblock.halign-right, td.tableblock.halign-right {
 502   text-align: right;
 503 }
 504
 505 th.tableblock.valign-top, td.tableblock.valign-top {
 506   vertical-align: top;
 507 }
 508 th.tableblock.valign-middle, td.tableblock.valign-middle {
 509   vertical-align: middle;
 510 }
 511 th.tableblock.valign-bottom, td.tableblock.valign-bottom {
 512   vertical-align: bottom;
 513 }
 514
 515
 516 /*
 517  * manpage specific
 518  *
 519  * */
 520
 521 body.manpage h1 {
 522   padding-top: 0.5em;
 523   padding-bottom: 0.5em;
 524   border-top: 2px solid silver;
 525   border-bottom: 2px solid silver;
 526 }
 527 body.manpage h2 {
 528   border-style: none;
 529 }
 530 body.manpage div.sectionbody {
 531   margin-left: 3em;
 532 }
 533
 534 @media print {
 535   body.manpage div#toc { display: none; }
 536 }
 537
 538
 539 </style>
 540 <script type="text/javascript">
 541 /*<![CDATA[*/
 542 var asciidoc = {  // Namespace.
 543
 544 /////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
 545 // Table Of Contents generator
 546 /////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
 547
 548 /* Author: Mihai Bazon, September 2002
 549  * http://students.infoiasi.ro/~mishoo
 550  *
 551  * Table Of Content generator
 552  * Version: 0.4
 553  *
 554  * Feel free to use this script under the terms of the GNU General Public
 555  * License, as long as you do not remove or alter this notice.
 556  */
 557
 558  /* modified by Troy D. Hanson, September 2006. License: GPL */
 559  /* modified by Stuart Rackham, 2006, 2009. License: GPL */
 560
 561 // toclevels = 1..4.
 562 toc: function (toclevels) {
 563
 564   function getText(el) {
 565     var text = "";
 566     for (var i = el.firstChild; i != null; i = i.nextSibling) {
 567       if (i.nodeType == 3 /* Node.TEXT_NODE */) // IE doesn't speak constants.
 568         text += i.data;
 569       else if (i.firstChild != null)
 570         text += getText(i);
 571     }
 572     return text;
 573   }
 574
 575   function TocEntry(el, text, toclevel) {
 576     this.element = el;
 577     this.text = text;
 578     this.toclevel = toclevel;
 579   }
 580
 581   function tocEntries(el, toclevels) {
 582     var result = new Array;
 583     var re = new RegExp('[hH]([1-'+(toclevels+1)+'])');
 584     // Function that scans the DOM tree for header elements (the DOM2
 585     // nodeIterator API would be a better technique but not supported by all
 586     // browsers).
 587     var iterate = function (el) {
 588       for (var i = el.firstChild; i != null; i = i.nextSibling) {
 589         if (i.nodeType == 1 /* Node.ELEMENT_NODE */) {
 590           var mo = re.exec(i.tagName);
 591           if (mo && (i.getAttribute("class") || i.getAttribute("className")) != "float") {
 592             result[result.length] = new TocEntry(i, getText(i), mo[1]-1);
 593           }
 594           iterate(i);
 595         }
 596       }
 597     }
 598     iterate(el);
 599     return result;
 600   }
 601
 602   var toc = document.getElementById("toc");
 603   if (!toc) {
 604     return;
 605   }
 606
 607   // Delete existing TOC entries in case we're reloading the TOC.
 608   var tocEntriesToRemove = [];
 609   var i;
 610   for (i = 0; i < toc.childNodes.length; i++) {
 611     var entry = toc.childNodes[i];
 612     if (entry.nodeName.toLowerCase() == 'div'
 613      && entry.getAttribute("class")
 614      && entry.getAttribute("class").match(/^toclevel/))
 615       tocEntriesToRemove.push(entry);
 616   }
 617   for (i = 0; i < tocEntriesToRemove.length; i++) {
 618     toc.removeChild(tocEntriesToRemove[i]);
 619   }
 620
 621   // Rebuild TOC entries.
 622   var entries = tocEntries(document.getElementById("content"), toclevels);
 623   for (var i = 0; i < entries.length; ++i) {
 624     var entry = entries[i];
 625     if (entry.element.id == "")
 626       entry.element.id = "_toc_" + i;
 627     var a = document.createElement("a");
 628     a.href = "#" + entry.element.id;
 629     a.appendChild(document.createTextNode(entry.text));
 630     var div = document.createElement("div");
 631     div.appendChild(a);
 632     div.className = "toclevel" + entry.toclevel;
 633     toc.appendChild(div);
 634   }
 635   if (entries.length == 0)
 636     toc.parentNode.removeChild(toc);
 637 },
 638
 639
 640 /////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
 641 // Footnotes generator
 642 /////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
 643
 644 /* Based on footnote generation code from:
 645  * http://www.brandspankingnew.net/archive/2005/07/format_footnote.html
 646  */
 647
 648 footnotes: function () {
 649   // Delete existing footnote entries in case we're reloading the footnodes.
 650   var i;
 651   var noteholder = document.getElementById("footnotes");
 652   if (!noteholder) {
 653     return;
 654   }
 655   var entriesToRemove = [];
 656   for (i = 0; i < noteholder.childNodes.length; i++) {
 657     var entry = noteholder.childNodes[i];
 658     if (entry.nodeName.toLowerCase() == 'div' && entry.getAttribute("class") == "footnote")
 659       entriesToRemove.push(entry);
 660   }
 661   for (i = 0; i < entriesToRemove.length; i++) {
 662     noteholder.removeChild(entriesToRemove[i]);
 663   }
 664
 665   // Rebuild footnote entries.
 666   var cont = document.getElementById("content");
 667   var spans = cont.getElementsByTagName("span");
 668   var refs = {};
 669   var n = 0;
 670   for (i=0; i<spans.length; i++) {
 671     if (spans[i].className == "footnote") {
 672       n++;
 673       var note = spans[i].getAttribute("data-note");
 674       if (!note) {
 675         // Use [\s\S] in place of . so multi-line matches work.
 676         // Because JavaScript has no s (dotall) regex flag.
 677         note = spans[i].innerHTML.match(/\s*\[([\s\S]*)]\s*/)[1];
 678         spans[i].innerHTML =
 679           "[<a id='_footnoteref_" + n + "' href='#_footnote_" + n +
 680           "' title='View footnote' class='footnote'>" + n + "</a>]";
 681         spans[i].setAttribute("data-note", note);
 682       }
 683       noteholder.innerHTML +=
 684         "<div class='footnote' id='_footnote_" + n + "'>" +
 685         "<a href='#_footnoteref_" + n + "' title='Return to text'>" +
 686         n + "</a>. " + note + "</div>";
 687       var id =spans[i].getAttribute("id");
 688       if (id != null) refs["#"+id] = n;
 689     }
 690   }
 691   if (n == 0)
 692     noteholder.parentNode.removeChild(noteholder);
 693   else {
 694     // Process footnoterefs.
 695     for (i=0; i<spans.length; i++) {
 696       if (spans[i].className == "footnoteref") {
 697         var href = spans[i].getElementsByTagName("a")[0].getAttribute("href");
 698         href = href.match(/#.*/)[0];  // Because IE return full URL.
 699         n = refs[href];
 700         spans[i].innerHTML =
 701           "[<a href='#_footnote_" + n +
 702           "' title='View footnote' class='footnote'>" + n + "</a>]";
 703       }
 704     }
 705   }
 706 },
 707
 708 install: function(toclevels) {
 709   var timerId;
 710
 711   function reinstall() {
 712     asciidoc.footnotes();
 713     if (toclevels) {
 714       asciidoc.toc(toclevels);
 715     }
 716   }
 717
 718   function reinstallAndRemoveTimer() {
 719     clearInterval(timerId);
 720     reinstall();
 721   }
 722
 723   timerId = setInterval(reinstall, 500);
 724   if (document.addEventListener)
 725     document.addEventListener("DOMContentLoaded", reinstallAndRemoveTimer, false);
 726   else
 727     window.onload = reinstallAndRemoveTimer;
 728 }
 729
 730 }
 731 asciidoc.install();
 732 /*]]>*/
 733 </script>
 734 </head>
 735 <body class="manpage">
 736 <div id="header">
 737 <h1>
 738 git-config(1) Manual Page
 739 </h1>
 740 <h2>NAME</h2>
 741 <div class="sectionbody">
 742 <p>git-config -
 743    Get and set repository or global options
 744 </p>
 745 </div>
 746 </div>
 747 <div id="content">
 748 <div class="sect1">
 749 <h2 id="_synopsis">SYNOPSIS</h2>
 750 <div class="sectionbody">
 751 <div class="verseblock">
 752 <pre class="content"><em>git config</em> [&lt;file-option&gt;] [--type=&lt;type&gt;] [--fixed-value] [--show-origin] [--show-scope] [-z|--null] &lt;name&gt; [&lt;value&gt; [&lt;value-pattern&gt;]]
 753 <em>git config</em> [&lt;file-option&gt;] [--type=&lt;type&gt;] --add &lt;name&gt; &lt;value&gt;
 754 <em>git config</em> [&lt;file-option&gt;] [--type=&lt;type&gt;] [--fixed-value] --replace-all &lt;name&gt; &lt;value&gt; [&lt;value-pattern&gt;]
 755 <em>git config</em> [&lt;file-option&gt;] [--type=&lt;type&gt;] [--show-origin] [--show-scope] [-z|--null] [--fixed-value] --get &lt;name&gt; [&lt;value-pattern&gt;]
 756 <em>git config</em> [&lt;file-option&gt;] [--type=&lt;type&gt;] [--show-origin] [--show-scope] [-z|--null] [--fixed-value] --get-all &lt;name&gt; [&lt;value-pattern&gt;]
 757 <em>git config</em> [&lt;file-option&gt;] [--type=&lt;type&gt;] [--show-origin] [--show-scope] [-z|--null] [--fixed-value] [--name-only] --get-regexp &lt;name-regex&gt; [&lt;value-pattern&gt;]
 758 <em>git config</em> [&lt;file-option&gt;] [--type=&lt;type&gt;] [-z|--null] --get-urlmatch &lt;name&gt; &lt;URL&gt;
 759 <em>git config</em> [&lt;file-option&gt;] [--fixed-value] --unset &lt;name&gt; [&lt;value-pattern&gt;]
 760 <em>git config</em> [&lt;file-option&gt;] [--fixed-value] --unset-all &lt;name&gt; [&lt;value-pattern&gt;]
 761 <em>git config</em> [&lt;file-option&gt;] --rename-section &lt;old-name&gt; &lt;new-name&gt;
 762 <em>git config</em> [&lt;file-option&gt;] --remove-section &lt;name&gt;
 763 <em>git config</em> [&lt;file-option&gt;] [--show-origin] [--show-scope] [-z|--null] [--name-only] -l | --list
 764 <em>git config</em> [&lt;file-option&gt;] --get-color &lt;name&gt; [&lt;default&gt;]
 765 <em>git config</em> [&lt;file-option&gt;] --get-colorbool &lt;name&gt; [&lt;stdout-is-tty&gt;]
 766 <em>git config</em> [&lt;file-option&gt;] -e | --edit</pre>
 767 <div class="attribution">
 768 </div></div>
 769 </div>
 770 </div>
 771 <div class="sect1">
 772 <h2 id="_description">DESCRIPTION</h2>
 773 <div class="sectionbody">
 774 <div class="paragraph"><p>You can query/set/replace/unset options with this command. The name is
 775 actually the section and the key separated by a dot, and the value will be
 776 escaped.</p></div>
 777 <div class="paragraph"><p>Multiple lines can be added to an option by using the <code>--add</code> option.
 778 If you want to update or unset an option which can occur on multiple
 779 lines, a <code>value-pattern</code> (which is an extended regular expression,
 780 unless the <code>--fixed-value</code> option is given) needs to be given.  Only the
 781 existing values that match the pattern are updated or unset.  If
 782 you want to handle the lines that do <strong>not</strong> match the pattern, just
 783 prepend a single exclamation mark in front (see also <a href="#EXAMPLES">[EXAMPLES]</a>),
 784 but note that this only works when the <code>--fixed-value</code> option is not
 785 in use.</p></div>
 786 <div class="paragraph"><p>The <code>--type=&lt;type&gt;</code> option instructs <em>git config</em> to ensure that incoming and
 787 outgoing values are canonicalize-able under the given &lt;type&gt;.  If no
 788 <code>--type=&lt;type&gt;</code> is given, no canonicalization will be performed. Callers may
 789 unset an existing <code>--type</code> specifier with <code>--no-type</code>.</p></div>
 790 <div class="paragraph"><p>When reading, the values are read from the system, global and
 791 repository local configuration files by default, and options
 792 <code>--system</code>, <code>--global</code>, <code>--local</code>, <code>--worktree</code> and
 793 <code>--file &lt;filename&gt;</code> can be used to tell the command to read from only
 794 that location (see <a href="#FILES">[FILES]</a>).</p></div>
 795 <div class="paragraph"><p>When writing, the new value is written to the repository local
 796 configuration file by default, and options <code>--system</code>, <code>--global</code>,
 797 <code>--worktree</code>, <code>--file &lt;filename&gt;</code> can be used to tell the command to
 798 write to that location (you can say <code>--local</code> but that is the
 799 default).</p></div>
 800 <div class="paragraph"><p>This command will fail with non-zero status upon error.  Some exit
 801 codes are:</p></div>
 802 <div class="ulist"><ul>
 803 <li>
 804 <p>
 805 The section or key is invalid (ret=1),
 806 </p>
 807 </li>
 808 <li>
 809 <p>
 810 no section or name was provided (ret=2),
 811 </p>
 812 </li>
 813 <li>
 814 <p>
 815 the config file is invalid (ret=3),
 816 </p>
 817 </li>
 818 <li>
 819 <p>
 820 the config file cannot be written (ret=4),
 821 </p>
 822 </li>
 823 <li>
 824 <p>
 825 you try to unset an option which does not exist (ret=5),
 826 </p>
 827 </li>
 828 <li>
 829 <p>
 830 you try to unset/set an option for which multiple lines match (ret=5), or
 831 </p>
 832 </li>
 833 <li>
 834 <p>
 835 you try to use an invalid regexp (ret=6).
 836 </p>
 837 </li>
 838 </ul></div>
 839 <div class="paragraph"><p>On success, the command returns the exit code 0.</p></div>
 840 <div class="paragraph"><p>A list of all available configuration variables can be obtained using the
 841 <code>git help --config</code> command.</p></div>
 842 </div>
 843 </div>
 844 <div class="sect1">
 845 <h2 id="OPTIONS">OPTIONS</h2>
 846 <div class="sectionbody">
 847 <div class="dlist"><dl>
 848 <dt class="hdlist1">
 849 --replace-all
 850 </dt>
 851 <dd>
 852 <p>
 853         Default behavior is to replace at most one line. This replaces
 854         all lines matching the key (and optionally the <code>value-pattern</code>).
 855 </p>
 856 </dd>
 857 <dt class="hdlist1">
 858 --add
 859 </dt>
 860 <dd>
 861 <p>
 862         Adds a new line to the option without altering any existing
 863         values.  This is the same as providing <em>^$</em> as the <code>value-pattern</code>
 864         in <code>--replace-all</code>.
 865 </p>
 866 </dd>
 867 <dt class="hdlist1">
 868 --get
 869 </dt>
 870 <dd>
 871 <p>
 872         Get the value for a given key (optionally filtered by a regex
 873         matching the value). Returns error code 1 if the key was not
 874         found and the last value if multiple key values were found.
 875 </p>
 876 </dd>
 877 <dt class="hdlist1">
 878 --get-all
 879 </dt>
 880 <dd>
 881 <p>
 882         Like get, but returns all values for a multi-valued key.
 883 </p>
 884 </dd>
 885 <dt class="hdlist1">
 886 --get-regexp
 887 </dt>
 888 <dd>
 889 <p>
 890         Like --get-all, but interprets the name as a regular expression and
 891         writes out the key names.  Regular expression matching is currently
 892         case-sensitive and done against a canonicalized version of the key
 893         in which section and variable names are lowercased, but subsection
 894         names are not.
 895 </p>
 896 </dd>
 897 <dt class="hdlist1">
 898 --get-urlmatch &lt;name&gt; &lt;URL&gt;
 899 </dt>
 900 <dd>
 901 <p>
 902         When given a two-part name section.key, the value for
 903         section.&lt;URL&gt;.key whose &lt;URL&gt; part matches the best to the
 904         given URL is returned (if no such key exists, the value for
 905         section.key is used as a fallback).  When given just the
 906         section as name, do so for all the keys in the section and
 907         list them.  Returns error code 1 if no value is found.
 908 </p>
 909 </dd>
 910 <dt class="hdlist1">
 911 --global
 912 </dt>
 913 <dd>
 914 <p>
 915         For writing options: write to global <code>~/.gitconfig</code> file
 916         rather than the repository <code>.git/config</code>, write to
 917         <code>$XDG_CONFIG_HOME/git/config</code> file if this file exists and the
 918         <code>~/.gitconfig</code> file doesn&#8217;t.
 919 </p>
 920 <div class="paragraph"><p>For reading options: read only from global <code>~/.gitconfig</code> and from
 921 <code>$XDG_CONFIG_HOME/git/config</code> rather than from all available files.</p></div>
 922 <div class="paragraph"><p>See also <a href="#FILES">[FILES]</a>.</p></div>
 923 </dd>
 924 <dt class="hdlist1">
 925 --system
 926 </dt>
 927 <dd>
 928 <p>
 929         For writing options: write to system-wide
 930         <code>$(prefix)/etc/gitconfig</code> rather than the repository
 931         <code>.git/config</code>.
 932 </p>
 933 <div class="paragraph"><p>For reading options: read only from system-wide <code>$(prefix)/etc/gitconfig</code>
 934 rather than from all available files.</p></div>
 935 <div class="paragraph"><p>See also <a href="#FILES">[FILES]</a>.</p></div>
 936 </dd>
 937 <dt class="hdlist1">
 938 --local
 939 </dt>
 940 <dd>
 941 <p>
 942         For writing options: write to the repository <code>.git/config</code> file.
 943         This is the default behavior.
 944 </p>
 945 <div class="paragraph"><p>For reading options: read only from the repository <code>.git/config</code> rather than
 946 from all available files.</p></div>
 947 <div class="paragraph"><p>See also <a href="#FILES">[FILES]</a>.</p></div>
 948 </dd>
 949 <dt class="hdlist1">
 950 --worktree
 951 </dt>
 952 <dd>
 953 <p>
 954         Similar to <code>--local</code> except that <code>$GIT_DIR/config.worktree</code> is
 955         read from or written to if <code>extensions.worktreeConfig</code> is
 956         enabled. If not it&#8217;s the same as <code>--local</code>. Note that <code>$GIT_DIR</code>
 957         is equal to <code>$GIT_COMMON_DIR</code> for the main working tree, but is of
 958         the form <code>$GIT_DIR/worktrees/&lt;id&gt;/</code> for other working trees. See
 959         <a href="git-worktree.html">git-worktree(1)</a> to learn how to enable
 960         <code>extensions.worktreeConfig</code>.
 961 </p>
 962 </dd>
 963 <dt class="hdlist1">
 964 -f &lt;config-file&gt;
 965 </dt>
 966 <dt class="hdlist1">
 967 --file &lt;config-file&gt;
 968 </dt>
 969 <dd>
 970 <p>
 971         For writing options: write to the specified file rather than the
 972         repository <code>.git/config</code>.
 973 </p>
 974 <div class="paragraph"><p>For reading options: read only from the specified file rather than from all
 975 available files.</p></div>
 976 <div class="paragraph"><p>See also <a href="#FILES">[FILES]</a>.</p></div>
 977 </dd>
 978 <dt class="hdlist1">
 979 --blob &lt;blob&gt;
 980 </dt>
 981 <dd>
 982 <p>
 983         Similar to <code>--file</code> but use the given blob instead of a file. E.g.
 984         you can use <em>master:.gitmodules</em> to read values from the file
 985         <em>.gitmodules</em> in the master branch. See "SPECIFYING REVISIONS"
 986         section in <a href="gitrevisions.html">gitrevisions(7)</a> for a more complete list of
 987         ways to spell blob names.
 988 </p>
 989 </dd>
 990 <dt class="hdlist1">
 991 --remove-section
 992 </dt>
 993 <dd>
 994 <p>
 995         Remove the given section from the configuration file.
 996 </p>
 997 </dd>
 998 <dt class="hdlist1">
 999 --rename-section
1000 </dt>
1001 <dd>
1002 <p>
1003         Rename the given section to a new name.
1004 </p>
1005 </dd>
1006 <dt class="hdlist1">
1007 --unset
1008 </dt>
1009 <dd>
1010 <p>
1011         Remove the line matching the key from config file.
1012 </p>
1013 </dd>
1014 <dt class="hdlist1">
1015 --unset-all
1016 </dt>
1017 <dd>
1018 <p>
1019         Remove all lines matching the key from config file.
1020 </p>
1021 </dd>
1022 <dt class="hdlist1">
1023 -l
1024 </dt>
1025 <dt class="hdlist1">
1026 --list
1027 </dt>
1028 <dd>
1029 <p>
1030         List all variables set in config file, along with their values.
1031 </p>
1032 </dd>
1033 <dt class="hdlist1">
1034 --fixed-value
1035 </dt>
1036 <dd>
1037 <p>
1038         When used with the <code>value-pattern</code> argument, treat <code>value-pattern</code> as
1039         an exact string instead of a regular expression. This will restrict
1040         the name/value pairs that are matched to only those where the value
1041         is exactly equal to the <code>value-pattern</code>.
1042 </p>
1043 </dd>
1044 <dt class="hdlist1">
1045 --type &lt;type&gt;
1046 </dt>
1047 <dd>
1048 <p>
1049   <em>git config</em> will ensure that any input or output is valid under the given
1050   type constraint(s), and will canonicalize outgoing values in <code>&lt;type&gt;</code>'s
1051   canonical form.
1052 </p>
1053 <div class="paragraph"><p>Valid <code>&lt;type&gt;</code>'s include:</p></div>
1054 <div class="ulist"><ul>
1055 <li>
1056 <p>
1057 <em>bool</em>: canonicalize values as either "true" or "false".
1058 </p>
1059 </li>
1060 <li>
1061 <p>
1062 <em>int</em>: canonicalize values as simple decimal numbers. An optional suffix of
1063   <em>k</em>, <em>m</em>, or <em>g</em> will cause the value to be multiplied by 1024, 1048576, or
1064   1073741824 upon input.
1065 </p>
1066 </li>
1067 <li>
1068 <p>
1069 <em>bool-or-int</em>: canonicalize according to either <em>bool</em> or <em>int</em>, as described
1070   above.
1071 </p>
1072 </li>
1073 <li>
1074 <p>
1075 <em>path</em>: canonicalize by expanding a leading <code>~</code> to the value of <code>$HOME</code> and
1076   <code>~user</code> to the home directory for the specified user. This specifier has no
1077   effect when setting the value (but you can use <code>git config section.variable
1078   ~/</code> from the command line to let your shell do the expansion.)
1079 </p>
1080 </li>
1081 <li>
1082 <p>
1083 <em>expiry-date</em>: canonicalize by converting from a fixed or relative date-string
1084   to a timestamp. This specifier has no effect when setting the value.
1085 </p>
1086 </li>
1087 <li>
1088 <p>
1089 <em>color</em>: When getting a value, canonicalize by converting to an ANSI color
1090   escape sequence. When setting a value, a sanity-check is performed to ensure
1091   that the given value is canonicalize-able as an ANSI color, but it is written
1092   as-is.
1093 </p>
1094 </li>
1095 </ul></div>
1096 </dd>
1097 <dt class="hdlist1">
1098 --bool
1099 </dt>
1100 <dt class="hdlist1">
1101 --int
1102 </dt>
1103 <dt class="hdlist1">
1104 --bool-or-int
1105 </dt>
1106 <dt class="hdlist1">
1107 --path
1108 </dt>
1109 <dt class="hdlist1">
1110 --expiry-date
1111 </dt>
1112 <dd>
1113 <p>
1114   Historical options for selecting a type specifier. Prefer instead <code>--type</code>
1115   (see above).
1116 </p>
1117 </dd>
1118 <dt class="hdlist1">
1119 --no-type
1120 </dt>
1121 <dd>
1122 <p>
1123   Un-sets the previously set type specifier (if one was previously set). This
1124   option requests that <em>git config</em> not canonicalize the retrieved variable.
1125   <code>--no-type</code> has no effect without <code>--type=&lt;type&gt;</code> or <code>--&lt;type&gt;</code>.
1126 </p>
1127 </dd>
1128 <dt class="hdlist1">
1129 -z
1130 </dt>
1131 <dt class="hdlist1">
1132 --null
1133 </dt>
1134 <dd>
1135 <p>
1136         For all options that output values and/or keys, always
1137         end values with the null character (instead of a
1138         newline). Use newline instead as a delimiter between
1139         key and value. This allows for secure parsing of the
1140         output without getting confused e.g. by values that
1141         contain line breaks.
1142 </p>
1143 </dd>
1144 <dt class="hdlist1">
1145 --name-only
1146 </dt>
1147 <dd>
1148 <p>
1149         Output only the names of config variables for <code>--list</code> or
1150         <code>--get-regexp</code>.
1151 </p>
1152 </dd>
1153 <dt class="hdlist1">
1154 --show-origin
1155 </dt>
1156 <dd>
1157 <p>
1158         Augment the output of all queried config options with the
1159         origin type (file, standard input, blob, command line) and
1160         the actual origin (config file path, ref, or blob id if
1161         applicable).
1162 </p>
1163 </dd>
1164 <dt class="hdlist1">
1165 --show-scope
1166 </dt>
1167 <dd>
1168 <p>
1169         Similar to <code>--show-origin</code> in that it augments the output of
1170         all queried config options with the scope of that value
1171         (worktree, local, global, system, command).
1172 </p>
1173 </dd>
1174 <dt class="hdlist1">
1175 --get-colorbool &lt;name&gt; [&lt;stdout-is-tty&gt;]
1176 </dt>
1177 <dd>
1178 <p>
1179         Find the color setting for <code>&lt;name&gt;</code> (e.g. <code>color.diff</code>) and output
1180         "true" or "false".  <code>&lt;stdout-is-tty&gt;</code> should be either "true" or
1181         "false", and is taken into account when configuration says
1182         "auto".  If <code>&lt;stdout-is-tty&gt;</code> is missing, then checks the standard
1183         output of the command itself, and exits with status 0 if color
1184         is to be used, or exits with status 1 otherwise.
1185         When the color setting for <code>name</code> is undefined, the command uses
1186         <code>color.ui</code> as fallback.
1187 </p>
1188 </dd>
1189 <dt class="hdlist1">
1190 --get-color &lt;name&gt; [&lt;default&gt;]
1191 </dt>
1192 <dd>
1193 <p>
1194         Find the color configured for <code>name</code> (e.g. <code>color.diff.new</code>) and
1195         output it as the ANSI color escape sequence to the standard
1196         output.  The optional <code>default</code> parameter is used instead, if
1197         there is no color configured for <code>name</code>.
1198 </p>
1199 <div class="paragraph"><p><code>--type=color [--default=&lt;default&gt;]</code> is preferred over <code>--get-color</code>
1200 (but note that <code>--get-color</code> will omit the trailing newline printed by
1201 <code>--type=color</code>).</p></div>
1202 </dd>
1203 <dt class="hdlist1">
1204 -e
1205 </dt>
1206 <dt class="hdlist1">
1207 --edit
1208 </dt>
1209 <dd>
1210 <p>
1211         Opens an editor to modify the specified config file; either
1212         <code>--system</code>, <code>--global</code>, or repository (default).
1213 </p>
1214 </dd>
1215 <dt class="hdlist1">
1216 --[no-]includes
1217 </dt>
1218 <dd>
1219 <p>
1220         Respect <code>include.*</code> directives in config files when looking up
1221         values. Defaults to <code>off</code> when a specific file is given (e.g.,
1222         using <code>--file</code>, <code>--global</code>, etc) and <code>on</code> when searching all
1223         config files.
1224 </p>
1225 </dd>
1226 <dt class="hdlist1">
1227 --default &lt;value&gt;
1228 </dt>
1229 <dd>
1230 <p>
1231   When using <code>--get</code>, and the requested variable is not found, behave as if
1232   &lt;value&gt; were the value assigned to the that variable.
1233 </p>
1234 </dd>
1235 </dl></div>
1236 </div>
1237 </div>
1238 <div class="sect1">
1239 <h2 id="_configuration">CONFIGURATION</h2>
1240 <div class="sectionbody">
1241 <div class="paragraph"><p><code>pager.config</code> is only respected when listing configuration, i.e., when
1242 using <code>--list</code> or any of the <code>--get-*</code> which may return multiple results.
1243 The default is to use a pager.</p></div>
1244 </div>
1245 </div>
1246 <div class="sect1">
1247 <h2 id="FILES">FILES</h2>
1248 <div class="sectionbody">
1249 <div class="paragraph"><p>By default, <em>git config</em> will read configuration options from multiple
1250 files:</p></div>
1251 <div class="dlist"><dl>
1252 <dt class="hdlist1">
1253 $(prefix)/etc/gitconfig
1254 </dt>
1255 <dd>
1256 <p>
1257         System-wide configuration file.
1258 </p>
1259 </dd>
1260 <dt class="hdlist1">
1261 $XDG_CONFIG_HOME/git/config
1262 </dt>
1263 <dt class="hdlist1">
1264 ~/.gitconfig
1265 </dt>
1266 <dd>
1267 <p>
1268         User-specific configuration files. When the XDG_CONFIG_HOME environment
1269         variable is not set or empty, $HOME/.config/ is used as
1270         $XDG_CONFIG_HOME.
1271 </p>
1272 <div class="paragraph"><p>These are also called "global" configuration files. If both files exist, both
1273 files are read in the order given above.</p></div>
1274 </dd>
1275 <dt class="hdlist1">
1276 $GIT_DIR/config
1277 </dt>
1278 <dd>
1279 <p>
1280         Repository specific configuration file.
1281 </p>
1282 </dd>
1283 <dt class="hdlist1">
1284 $GIT_DIR/config.worktree
1285 </dt>
1286 <dd>
1287 <p>
1288         This is optional and is only searched when
1289         <code>extensions.worktreeConfig</code> is present in $GIT_DIR/config.
1290 </p>
1291 </dd>
1292 </dl></div>
1293 <div class="paragraph"><p>You may also provide additional configuration parameters when running any
1294 git command by using the <code>-c</code> option. See <a href="git.html">git(1)</a> for details.</p></div>
1295 <div class="paragraph"><p>Options will be read from all of these files that are available. If the
1296 global or the system-wide configuration files are missing or unreadable they
1297 will be ignored. If the repository configuration file is missing or unreadable,
1298 <em>git config</em> will exit with a non-zero error code. An error message is produced
1299 if the file is unreadable, but not if it is missing.</p></div>
1300 <div class="paragraph"><p>The files are read in the order given above, with last value found taking
1301 precedence over values read earlier.  When multiple values are taken then all
1302 values of a key from all files will be used.</p></div>
1303 <div class="paragraph"><p>By default, options are only written to the repository specific
1304 configuration file. Note that this also affects options like <code>--replace-all</code>
1305 and <code>--unset</code>. <strong><em>git config</em> will only ever change one file at a time</strong>.</p></div>
1306 <div class="paragraph"><p>You can limit which configuration sources are read from or written to by
1307 specifying the path of a file with the <code>--file</code> option, or by specifying a
1308 configuration scope with <code>--system</code>, <code>--global</code>, <code>--local</code>, or <code>--worktree</code>.
1309 For more, see <a href="#OPTIONS">[OPTIONS]</a> above.</p></div>
1310 </div>
1311 </div>
1312 <div class="sect1">
1313 <h2 id="SCOPES">SCOPES</h2>
1314 <div class="sectionbody">
1315 <div class="paragraph"><p>Each configuration source falls within a configuration scope. The scopes
1316 are:</p></div>
1317 <div class="dlist"><dl>
1318 <dt class="hdlist1">
1319 system
1320 </dt>
1321 <dd>
1322 <p>
1323         $(prefix)/etc/gitconfig
1324 </p>
1325 </dd>
1326 <dt class="hdlist1">
1327 global
1328 </dt>
1329 <dd>
1330 <p>
1331         $XDG_CONFIG_HOME/git/config
1332 </p>
1333 <div class="paragraph"><p>~/.gitconfig</p></div>
1334 </dd>
1335 <dt class="hdlist1">
1336 local
1337 </dt>
1338 <dd>
1339 <p>
1340         $GIT_DIR/config
1341 </p>
1342 </dd>
1343 <dt class="hdlist1">
1344 worktree
1345 </dt>
1346 <dd>
1347 <p>
1348         $GIT_DIR/config.worktree
1349 </p>
1350 </dd>
1351 <dt class="hdlist1">
1352 command
1353 </dt>
1354 <dd>
1355 <p>
1356         GIT_CONFIG_{COUNT,KEY,VALUE} environment variables (see <a href="#ENVIRONMENT">[ENVIRONMENT]</a>
1357         below)
1358 </p>
1359 <div class="paragraph"><p>the <code>-c</code> option</p></div>
1360 </dd>
1361 </dl></div>
1362 <div class="paragraph"><p>With the exception of <em>command</em>, each scope corresponds to a command line
1363 option: <code>--system</code>, <code>--global</code>, <code>--local</code>, <code>--worktree</code>.</p></div>
1364 <div class="paragraph"><p>When reading options, specifying a scope will only read options from the
1365 files within that scope. When writing options, specifying a scope will write
1366 to the files within that scope (instead of the repository specific
1367 configuration file). See <a href="#OPTIONS">[OPTIONS]</a> above for a complete description.</p></div>
1368 <div class="paragraph"><p>Most configuration options are respected regardless of the scope it is
1369 defined in, but some options are only respected in certain scopes. See the
1370 respective option&#8217;s documentation for the full details.</p></div>
1371 <div class="sect2">
1372 <h3 id="_protected_configuration">Protected configuration</h3>
1373 <div class="paragraph"><p>Protected configuration refers to the <em>system</em>, <em>global</em>, and <em>command</em> scopes.
1374 For security reasons, certain options are only respected when they are
1375 specified in protected configuration, and ignored otherwise.</p></div>
1376 <div class="paragraph"><p>Git treats these scopes as if they are controlled by the user or a trusted
1377 administrator. This is because an attacker who controls these scopes can do
1378 substantial harm without using Git, so it is assumed that the user&#8217;s environment
1379 protects these scopes against attackers.</p></div>
1380 </div>
1381 </div>
1382 </div>
1383 <div class="sect1">
1384 <h2 id="ENVIRONMENT">ENVIRONMENT</h2>
1385 <div class="sectionbody">
1386 <div class="dlist"><dl>
1387 <dt class="hdlist1">
1388 GIT_CONFIG_GLOBAL
1389 </dt>
1390 <dt class="hdlist1">
1391 GIT_CONFIG_SYSTEM
1392 </dt>
1393 <dd>
1394 <p>
1395         Take the configuration from the given files instead from global or
1396         system-level configuration. See <a href="git.html">git(1)</a> for details.
1397 </p>
1398 </dd>
1399 <dt class="hdlist1">
1400 GIT_CONFIG_NOSYSTEM
1401 </dt>
1402 <dd>
1403 <p>
1404         Whether to skip reading settings from the system-wide
1405         $(prefix)/etc/gitconfig file. See <a href="git.html">git(1)</a> for details.
1406 </p>
1407 </dd>
1408 </dl></div>
1409 <div class="paragraph"><p>See also <a href="#FILES">[FILES]</a>.</p></div>
1410 <div class="dlist"><dl>
1411 <dt class="hdlist1">
1412 GIT_CONFIG_COUNT
1413 </dt>
1414 <dt class="hdlist1">
1415 GIT_CONFIG_KEY_&lt;n&gt;
1416 </dt>
1417 <dt class="hdlist1">
1418 GIT_CONFIG_VALUE_&lt;n&gt;
1419 </dt>
1420 <dd>
1421 <p>
1422         If GIT_CONFIG_COUNT is set to a positive number, all environment pairs
1423         GIT_CONFIG_KEY_&lt;n&gt; and GIT_CONFIG_VALUE_&lt;n&gt; up to that number will be
1424         added to the process&#8217;s runtime configuration. The config pairs are
1425         zero-indexed. Any missing key or value is treated as an error. An empty
1426         GIT_CONFIG_COUNT is treated the same as GIT_CONFIG_COUNT=0, namely no
1427         pairs are processed. These environment variables will override values
1428         in configuration files, but will be overridden by any explicit options
1429         passed via <code>git -c</code>.
1430 </p>
1431 <div class="paragraph"><p>This is useful for cases where you want to spawn multiple git commands
1432 with a common configuration but cannot depend on a configuration file,
1433 for example when writing scripts.</p></div>
1434 </dd>
1435 <dt class="hdlist1">
1436 GIT_CONFIG
1437 </dt>
1438 <dd>
1439 <p>
1440         If no <code>--file</code> option is provided to <code>git config</code>, use the file
1441         given by <code>GIT_CONFIG</code> as if it were provided via <code>--file</code>. This
1442         variable has no effect on other Git commands, and is mostly for
1443         historical compatibility; there is generally no reason to use it
1444         instead of the <code>--file</code> option.
1445 </p>
1446 </dd>
1447 </dl></div>
1448 </div>
1449 </div>
1450 <div class="sect1">
1451 <h2 id="EXAMPLES">EXAMPLES</h2>
1452 <div class="sectionbody">
1453 <div class="paragraph"><p>Given a .git/config like this:</p></div>
1454 <div class="listingblock">
1455 <div class="content">
1456 <pre><code>#
1457 # This is the config file, and
1458 # a '#' or ';' character indicates
1459 # a comment
1460 #
1461
1462 ; core variables
1463 [core]
1464         ; Don't trust file modes
1465         filemode = false
1466
1467 ; Our diff algorithm
1468 [diff]
1469         external = /usr/local/bin/diff-wrapper
1470         renames = true
1471
1472 ; Proxy settings
1473 [core]
1474         gitproxy=proxy-command for kernel.org
1475         gitproxy=default-proxy ; for all the rest
1476
1477 ; HTTP
1478 [http]
1479         sslVerify
1480 [http "https://weak.example.com"]
1481         sslVerify = false
1482         cookieFile = /tmp/cookie.txt</code></pre>
1483 </div></div>
1484 <div class="paragraph"><p>you can set the filemode to true with</p></div>
1485 <div class="listingblock">
1486 <div class="content">
1487 <pre><code>% git config core.filemode true</code></pre>
1488 </div></div>
1489 <div class="paragraph"><p>The hypothetical proxy command entries actually have a postfix to discern
1490 what URL they apply to. Here is how to change the entry for kernel.org
1491 to "ssh".</p></div>
1492 <div class="listingblock">
1493 <div class="content">
1494 <pre><code>% git config core.gitproxy '"ssh" for kernel.org' 'for kernel.org$'</code></pre>
1495 </div></div>
1496 <div class="paragraph"><p>This makes sure that only the key/value pair for kernel.org is replaced.</p></div>
1497 <div class="paragraph"><p>To delete the entry for renames, do</p></div>
1498 <div class="listingblock">
1499 <div class="content">
1500 <pre><code>% git config --unset diff.renames</code></pre>
1501 </div></div>
1502 <div class="paragraph"><p>If you want to delete an entry for a multivar (like core.gitproxy above),
1503 you have to provide a regex matching the value of exactly one line.</p></div>
1504 <div class="paragraph"><p>To query the value for a given key, do</p></div>
1505 <div class="listingblock">
1506 <div class="content">
1507 <pre><code>% git config --get core.filemode</code></pre>
1508 </div></div>
1509 <div class="paragraph"><p>or</p></div>
1510 <div class="listingblock">
1511 <div class="content">
1512 <pre><code>% git config core.filemode</code></pre>
1513 </div></div>
1514 <div class="paragraph"><p>or, to query a multivar:</p></div>
1515 <div class="listingblock">
1516 <div class="content">
1517 <pre><code>% git config --get core.gitproxy "for kernel.org$"</code></pre>
1518 </div></div>
1519 <div class="paragraph"><p>If you want to know all the values for a multivar, do:</p></div>
1520 <div class="listingblock">
1521 <div class="content">
1522 <pre><code>% git config --get-all core.gitproxy</code></pre>
1523 </div></div>
1524 <div class="paragraph"><p>If you like to live dangerously, you can replace <strong>all</strong> core.gitproxy by a
1525 new one with</p></div>
1526 <div class="listingblock">
1527 <div class="content">
1528 <pre><code>% git config --replace-all core.gitproxy ssh</code></pre>
1529 </div></div>
1530 <div class="paragraph"><p>However, if you really only want to replace the line for the default proxy,
1531 i.e. the one without a "for &#8230;" postfix, do something like this:</p></div>
1532 <div class="listingblock">
1533 <div class="content">
1534 <pre><code>% git config core.gitproxy ssh '! for '</code></pre>
1535 </div></div>
1536 <div class="paragraph"><p>To actually match only values with an exclamation mark, you have to</p></div>
1537 <div class="listingblock">
1538 <div class="content">
1539 <pre><code>% git config section.key value '[!]'</code></pre>
1540 </div></div>
1541 <div class="paragraph"><p>To add a new proxy, without altering any of the existing ones, use</p></div>
1542 <div class="listingblock">
1543 <div class="content">
1544 <pre><code>% git config --add core.gitproxy '"proxy-command" for example.com'</code></pre>
1545 </div></div>
1546 <div class="paragraph"><p>An example to use customized color from the configuration in your
1547 script:</p></div>
1548 <div class="listingblock">
1549 <div class="content">
1550 <pre><code>#!/bin/sh
1551 WS=$(git config --get-color color.diff.whitespace "blue reverse")
1552 RESET=$(git config --get-color "" "reset")
1553 echo "${WS}your whitespace color or blue reverse${RESET}"</code></pre>
1554 </div></div>
1555 <div class="paragraph"><p>For URLs in <code>https://weak.example.com</code>, <code>http.sslVerify</code> is set to
1556 false, while it is set to <code>true</code> for all others:</p></div>
1557 <div class="listingblock">
1558 <div class="content">
1559 <pre><code>% git config --type=bool --get-urlmatch http.sslverify https://good.example.com
1560 true
1561 % git config --type=bool --get-urlmatch http.sslverify https://weak.example.com
1562 false
1563 % git config --get-urlmatch http https://weak.example.com
1564 http.cookieFile /tmp/cookie.txt
1565 http.sslverify false</code></pre>
1566 </div></div>
1567 </div>
1568 </div>
1569 <div class="sect1">
1570 <h2 id="_configuration_file">CONFIGURATION FILE</h2>
1571 <div class="sectionbody">
1572 <div class="paragraph"><p>The Git configuration file contains a number of variables that affect
1573 the Git commands' behavior. The files <code>.git/config</code> and optionally
1574 <code>config.worktree</code> (see the "CONFIGURATION FILE" section of
1575 <a href="git-worktree.html">git-worktree(1)</a>) in each repository are used to store the
1576 configuration for that repository, and <code>$HOME/.gitconfig</code> is used to
1577 store a per-user configuration as fallback values for the <code>.git/config</code>
1578 file. The file <code>/etc/gitconfig</code> can be used to store a system-wide
1579 default configuration.</p></div>
1580 <div class="paragraph"><p>The configuration variables are used by both the Git plumbing
1581 and the porcelain commands. The variables are divided into sections, wherein
1582 the fully qualified variable name of the variable itself is the last
1583 dot-separated segment and the section name is everything before the last
1584 dot. The variable names are case-insensitive, allow only alphanumeric
1585 characters and <code>-</code>, and must start with an alphabetic character.  Some
1586 variables may appear multiple times; we say then that the variable is
1587 multivalued.</p></div>
1588 <div class="sect2">
1589 <h3 id="_syntax">Syntax</h3>
1590 <div class="paragraph"><p>The syntax is fairly flexible and permissive; whitespaces are mostly
1591 ignored.  The <em>#</em> and <em>;</em> characters begin comments to the end of line,
1592 blank lines are ignored.</p></div>
1593 <div class="paragraph"><p>The file consists of sections and variables.  A section begins with
1594 the name of the section in square brackets and continues until the next
1595 section begins.  Section names are case-insensitive.  Only alphanumeric
1596 characters, <code>-</code> and <code>.</code> are allowed in section names.  Each variable
1597 must belong to some section, which means that there must be a section
1598 header before the first setting of a variable.</p></div>
1599 <div class="paragraph"><p>Sections can be further divided into subsections.  To begin a subsection
1600 put its name in double quotes, separated by space from the section name,
1601 in the section header, like in the example below:</p></div>
1602 <div class="listingblock">
1603 <div class="content">
1604 <pre><code>        [section "subsection"]</code></pre>
1605 </div></div>
1606 <div class="paragraph"><p>Subsection names are case sensitive and can contain any characters except
1607 newline and the null byte. Doublequote <code>"</code> and backslash can be included
1608 by escaping them as <code>\"</code> and <code>\\</code>, respectively. Backslashes preceding
1609 other characters are dropped when reading; for example, <code>\t</code> is read as
1610 <code>t</code> and <code>\0</code> is read as <code>0</code>. Section headers cannot span multiple lines.
1611 Variables may belong directly to a section or to a given subsection. You
1612 can have <code>[section]</code> if you have <code>[section "subsection"]</code>, but you don&#8217;t
1613 need to.</p></div>
1614 <div class="paragraph"><p>There is also a deprecated <code>[section.subsection]</code> syntax. With this
1615 syntax, the subsection name is converted to lower-case and is also
1616 compared case sensitively. These subsection names follow the same
1617 restrictions as section names.</p></div>
1618 <div class="paragraph"><p>All the other lines (and the remainder of the line after the section
1619 header) are recognized as setting variables, in the form
1620 <em>name = value</em> (or just <em>name</em>, which is a short-hand to say that
1621 the variable is the boolean "true").
1622 The variable names are case-insensitive, allow only alphanumeric characters
1623 and <code>-</code>, and must start with an alphabetic character.</p></div>
1624 <div class="paragraph"><p>A line that defines a value can be continued to the next line by
1625 ending it with a <code>\</code>; the backslash and the end-of-line are
1626 stripped.  Leading whitespaces after <em>name =</em>, the remainder of the
1627 line after the first comment character <em>#</em> or <em>;</em>, and trailing
1628 whitespaces of the line are discarded unless they are enclosed in
1629 double quotes.  Internal whitespaces within the value are retained
1630 verbatim.</p></div>
1631 <div class="paragraph"><p>Inside double quotes, double quote <code>"</code> and backslash <code>\</code> characters
1632 must be escaped: use <code>\"</code> for <code>"</code> and <code>\\</code> for <code>\</code>.</p></div>
1633 <div class="paragraph"><p>The following escape sequences (beside <code>\"</code> and <code>\\</code>) are recognized:
1634 <code>\n</code> for newline character (NL), <code>\t</code> for horizontal tabulation (HT, TAB)
1635 and <code>\b</code> for backspace (BS).  Other char escape sequences (including octal
1636 escape sequences) are invalid.</p></div>
1637 </div>
1638 <div class="sect2">
1639 <h3 id="_includes">Includes</h3>
1640 <div class="paragraph"><p>The <code>include</code> and <code>includeIf</code> sections allow you to include config
1641 directives from another source. These sections behave identically to
1642 each other with the exception that <code>includeIf</code> sections may be ignored
1643 if their condition does not evaluate to true; see "Conditional includes"
1644 below.</p></div>
1645 <div class="paragraph"><p>You can include a config file from another by setting the special
1646 <code>include.path</code> (or <code>includeIf.*.path</code>) variable to the name of the file
1647 to be included. The variable takes a pathname as its value, and is
1648 subject to tilde expansion. These variables can be given multiple times.</p></div>
1649 <div class="paragraph"><p>The contents of the included file are inserted immediately, as if they
1650 had been found at the location of the include directive. If the value of the
1651 variable is a relative path, the path is considered to
1652 be relative to the configuration file in which the include directive
1653 was found.  See below for examples.</p></div>
1654 </div>
1655 <div class="sect2">
1656 <h3 id="_conditional_includes">Conditional includes</h3>
1657 <div class="paragraph"><p>You can conditionally include a config file from another by setting an
1658 <code>includeIf.&lt;condition&gt;.path</code> variable to the name of the file to be
1659 included.</p></div>
1660 <div class="paragraph"><p>The condition starts with a keyword followed by a colon and some data
1661 whose format and meaning depends on the keyword. Supported keywords
1662 are:</p></div>
1663 <div class="dlist"><dl>
1664 <dt class="hdlist1">
1665 <code>gitdir</code>
1666 </dt>
1667 <dd>
1668 <p>
1669         The data that follows the keyword <code>gitdir:</code> is used as a glob
1670         pattern. If the location of the .git directory matches the
1671         pattern, the include condition is met.
1672 </p>
1673 <div class="paragraph"><p>The .git location may be auto-discovered, or come from <code>$GIT_DIR</code>
1674 environment variable. If the repository is auto-discovered via a .git
1675 file (e.g. from submodules, or a linked worktree), the .git location
1676 would be the final location where the .git directory is, not where the
1677 .git file is.</p></div>
1678 <div class="paragraph"><p>The pattern can contain standard globbing wildcards and two additional
1679 ones, <code>**/</code> and <code>/**</code>, that can match multiple path components. Please
1680 refer to <a href="gitignore.html">gitignore(5)</a> for details. For convenience:</p></div>
1681 <div class="ulist"><ul>
1682 <li>
1683 <p>
1684 If the pattern starts with <code>~/</code>, <code>~</code> will be substituted with the
1685    content of the environment variable <code>HOME</code>.
1686 </p>
1687 </li>
1688 <li>
1689 <p>
1690 If the pattern starts with <code>./</code>, it is replaced with the directory
1691    containing the current config file.
1692 </p>
1693 </li>
1694 <li>
1695 <p>
1696 If the pattern does not start with either <code>~/</code>, <code>./</code> or <code>/</code>, <code>**/</code>
1697    will be automatically prepended. For example, the pattern <code>foo/bar</code>
1698    becomes <code>**/foo/bar</code> and would match <code>/any/path/to/foo/bar</code>.
1699 </p>
1700 </li>
1701 <li>
1702 <p>
1703 If the pattern ends with <code>/</code>, <code>**</code> will be automatically added. For
1704    example, the pattern <code>foo/</code> becomes <code>foo/**</code>. In other words, it
1705    matches "foo" and everything inside, recursively.
1706 </p>
1707 </li>
1708 </ul></div>
1709 </dd>
1710 <dt class="hdlist1">
1711 <code>gitdir/i</code>
1712 </dt>
1713 <dd>
1714 <p>
1715         This is the same as <code>gitdir</code> except that matching is done
1716         case-insensitively (e.g. on case-insensitive file systems)
1717 </p>
1718 </dd>
1719 <dt class="hdlist1">
1720 <code>onbranch</code>
1721 </dt>
1722 <dd>
1723 <p>
1724         The data that follows the keyword <code>onbranch:</code> is taken to be a
1725         pattern with standard globbing wildcards and two additional
1726         ones, <code>**/</code> and <code>/**</code>, that can match multiple path components.
1727         If we are in a worktree where the name of the branch that is
1728         currently checked out matches the pattern, the include condition
1729         is met.
1730 </p>
1731 <div class="paragraph"><p>If the pattern ends with <code>/</code>, <code>**</code> will be automatically added. For
1732 example, the pattern <code>foo/</code> becomes <code>foo/**</code>. In other words, it matches
1733 all branches that begin with <code>foo/</code>. This is useful if your branches are
1734 organized hierarchically and you would like to apply a configuration to
1735 all the branches in that hierarchy.</p></div>
1736 </dd>
1737 <dt class="hdlist1">
1738 <code>hasconfig:remote.*.url:</code>
1739 </dt>
1740 <dd>
1741 <p>
1742         The data that follows this keyword is taken to
1743         be a pattern with standard globbing wildcards and two
1744         additional ones, <code>**/</code> and <code>/**</code>, that can match multiple
1745         components. The first time this keyword is seen, the rest of
1746         the config files will be scanned for remote URLs (without
1747         applying any values). If there exists at least one remote URL
1748         that matches this pattern, the include condition is met.
1749 </p>
1750 <div class="paragraph"><p>Files included by this option (directly or indirectly) are not allowed
1751 to contain remote URLs.</p></div>
1752 <div class="paragraph"><p>Note that unlike other includeIf conditions, resolving this condition
1753 relies on information that is not yet known at the point of reading the
1754 condition. A typical use case is this option being present as a
1755 system-level or global-level config, and the remote URL being in a
1756 local-level config; hence the need to scan ahead when resolving this
1757 condition. In order to avoid the chicken-and-egg problem in which
1758 potentially-included files can affect whether such files are potentially
1759 included, Git breaks the cycle by prohibiting these files from affecting
1760 the resolution of these conditions (thus, prohibiting them from
1761 declaring remote URLs).</p></div>
1762 <div class="paragraph"><p>As for the naming of this keyword, it is for forwards compatibility with
1763 a naming scheme that supports more variable-based include conditions,
1764 but currently Git only supports the exact keyword described above.</p></div>
1765 </dd>
1766 </dl></div>
1767 <div class="paragraph"><p>A few more notes on matching via <code>gitdir</code> and <code>gitdir/i</code>:</p></div>
1768 <div class="ulist"><ul>
1769 <li>
1770 <p>
1771 Symlinks in <code>$GIT_DIR</code> are not resolved before matching.
1772 </p>
1773 </li>
1774 <li>
1775 <p>
1776 Both the symlink &amp; realpath versions of paths will be matched
1777    outside of <code>$GIT_DIR</code>. E.g. if ~/git is a symlink to
1778    /mnt/storage/git, both <code>gitdir:~/git</code> and <code>gitdir:/mnt/storage/git</code>
1779    will match.
1780 </p>
1781 <div class="paragraph"><p>This was not the case in the initial release of this feature in
1782 v2.13.0, which only matched the realpath version. Configuration that
1783 wants to be compatible with the initial release of this feature needs
1784 to either specify only the realpath version, or both versions.</p></div>
1785 </li>
1786 <li>
1787 <p>
1788 Note that "../" is not special and will match literally, which is
1789    unlikely what you want.
1790 </p>
1791 </li>
1792 </ul></div>
1793 </div>
1794 <div class="sect2">
1795 <h3 id="_example">Example</h3>
1796 <div class="listingblock">
1797 <div class="content">
1798 <pre><code># Core variables
1799 [core]
1800         ; Don't trust file modes
1801         filemode = false
1802
1803 # Our diff algorithm
1804 [diff]
1805         external = /usr/local/bin/diff-wrapper
1806         renames = true
1807
1808 [branch "devel"]
1809         remote = origin
1810         merge = refs/heads/devel
1811
1812 # Proxy settings
1813 [core]
1814         gitProxy="ssh" for "kernel.org"
1815         gitProxy=default-proxy ; for the rest
1816
1817 [include]
1818         path = /path/to/foo.inc ; include by absolute path
1819         path = foo.inc ; find "foo.inc" relative to the current file
1820         path = ~/foo.inc ; find "foo.inc" in your `$HOME` directory
1821
1822 ; include if $GIT_DIR is /path/to/foo/.git
1823 [includeIf "gitdir:/path/to/foo/.git"]
1824         path = /path/to/foo.inc
1825
1826 ; include for all repositories inside /path/to/group
1827 [includeIf "gitdir:/path/to/group/"]
1828         path = /path/to/foo.inc
1829
1830 ; include for all repositories inside $HOME/to/group
1831 [includeIf "gitdir:~/to/group/"]
1832         path = /path/to/foo.inc
1833
1834 ; relative paths are always relative to the including
1835 ; file (if the condition is true); their location is not
1836 ; affected by the condition
1837 [includeIf "gitdir:/path/to/group/"]
1838         path = foo.inc
1839
1840 ; include only if we are in a worktree where foo-branch is
1841 ; currently checked out
1842 [includeIf "onbranch:foo-branch"]
1843         path = foo.inc
1844
1845 ; include only if a remote with the given URL exists (note
1846 ; that such a URL may be provided later in a file or in a
1847 ; file read after this file is read, as seen in this example)
1848 [includeIf "hasconfig:remote.*.url:https://example.com/**"]
1849         path = foo.inc
1850 [remote "origin"]
1851         url = https://example.com/git</code></pre>
1852 </div></div>
1853 </div>
1854 <div class="sect2">
1855 <h3 id="_values">Values</h3>
1856 <div class="paragraph"><p>Values of many variables are treated as a simple string, but there
1857 are variables that take values of specific types and there are rules
1858 as to how to spell them.</p></div>
1859 <div class="dlist"><dl>
1860 <dt class="hdlist1">
1861 boolean
1862 </dt>
1863 <dd>
1864 <p>
1865        When a variable is said to take a boolean value, many
1866        synonyms are accepted for <em>true</em> and <em>false</em>; these are all
1867        case-insensitive.
1868 </p>
1869 <div class="dlist"><dl>
1870 <dt class="hdlist1">
1871 true
1872 </dt>
1873 <dd>
1874 <p>
1875 Boolean true literals are <code>yes</code>, <code>on</code>, <code>true</code>,
1876                 and <code>1</code>.  Also, a variable defined without <code>= &lt;value&gt;</code>
1877                 is taken as true.
1878 </p>
1879 </dd>
1880 <dt class="hdlist1">
1881 false
1882 </dt>
1883 <dd>
1884 <p>
1885 Boolean false literals are <code>no</code>, <code>off</code>, <code>false</code>,
1886                 <code>0</code> and the empty string.
1887 </p>
1888 <div class="paragraph"><p>When converting a value to its canonical form using the <code>--type=bool</code> type
1889 specifier, <em>git config</em> will ensure that the output is "true" or
1890 "false" (spelled in lowercase).</p></div>
1891 </dd>
1892 </dl></div>
1893 </dd>
1894 <dt class="hdlist1">
1895 integer
1896 </dt>
1897 <dd>
1898 <p>
1899        The value for many variables that specify various sizes can
1900        be suffixed with <code>k</code>, <code>M</code>,&#8230; to mean "scale the number by
1901        1024", "by 1024x1024", etc.
1902 </p>
1903 </dd>
1904 <dt class="hdlist1">
1905 color
1906 </dt>
1907 <dd>
1908 <p>
1909        The value for a variable that takes a color is a list of
1910        colors (at most two, one for foreground and one for background)
1911        and attributes (as many as you want), separated by spaces.
1912 </p>
1913 <div class="paragraph"><p>The basic colors accepted are <code>normal</code>, <code>black</code>, <code>red</code>, <code>green</code>,
1914 <code>yellow</code>, <code>blue</code>, <code>magenta</code>, <code>cyan</code>, <code>white</code> and <code>default</code>.  The first
1915 color given is the foreground; the second is the background.  All the
1916 basic colors except <code>normal</code> and <code>default</code> have a bright variant that can
1917 be specified by prefixing the color with <code>bright</code>, like <code>brightred</code>.</p></div>
1918 <div class="paragraph"><p>The color <code>normal</code> makes no change to the color. It is the same as an
1919 empty string, but can be used as the foreground color when specifying a
1920 background color alone (for example, "normal red").</p></div>
1921 <div class="paragraph"><p>The color <code>default</code> explicitly resets the color to the terminal default,
1922 for example to specify a cleared background. Although it varies between
1923 terminals, this is usually not the same as setting to "white black".</p></div>
1924 <div class="paragraph"><p>Colors may also be given as numbers between 0 and 255; these use ANSI
1925 256-color mode (but note that not all terminals may support this).  If
1926 your terminal supports it, you may also specify 24-bit RGB values as
1927 hex, like <code>#ff0ab3</code>.</p></div>
1928 <div class="paragraph"><p>The accepted attributes are <code>bold</code>, <code>dim</code>, <code>ul</code>, <code>blink</code>, <code>reverse</code>,
1929 <code>italic</code>, and <code>strike</code> (for crossed-out or "strikethrough" letters).
1930 The position of any attributes with respect to the colors
1931 (before, after, or in between), doesn&#8217;t matter. Specific attributes may
1932 be turned off by prefixing them with <code>no</code> or <code>no-</code> (e.g., <code>noreverse</code>,
1933 <code>no-ul</code>, etc).</p></div>
1934 <div class="paragraph"><p>The pseudo-attribute <code>reset</code> resets all colors and attributes before
1935 applying the specified coloring. For example, <code>reset green</code> will result
1936 in a green foreground and default background without any active
1937 attributes.</p></div>
1938 <div class="paragraph"><p>An empty color string produces no color effect at all. This can be used
1939 to avoid coloring specific elements without disabling color entirely.</p></div>
1940 <div class="paragraph"><p>For git&#8217;s pre-defined color slots, the attributes are meant to be reset
1941 at the beginning of each item in the colored output. So setting
1942 <code>color.decorate.branch</code> to <code>black</code> will paint that branch name in a
1943 plain <code>black</code>, even if the previous thing on the same output line (e.g.
1944 opening parenthesis before the list of branch names in <code>log --decorate</code>
1945 output) is set to be painted with <code>bold</code> or some other attribute.
1946 However, custom log formats may do more complicated and layered
1947 coloring, and the negated forms may be useful there.</p></div>
1948 </dd>
1949 <dt class="hdlist1">
1950 pathname
1951 </dt>
1952 <dd>
1953 <p>
1954         A variable that takes a pathname value can be given a
1955         string that begins with "<code>~/</code>" or "<code>~user/</code>", and the usual
1956         tilde expansion happens to such a string: <code>~/</code>
1957         is expanded to the value of <code>$HOME</code>, and <code>~user/</code> to the
1958         specified user&#8217;s home directory.
1959 </p>
1960 <div class="paragraph"><p>If a path starts with <code>%(prefix)/</code>, the remainder is interpreted as a
1961 path relative to Git&#8217;s "runtime prefix", i.e. relative to the location
1962 where Git itself was installed. For example, <code>%(prefix)/bin/</code> refers to
1963 the directory in which the Git executable itself lives. If Git was
1964 compiled without runtime prefix support, the compiled-in prefix will be
1965 substituted instead. In the unlikely event that a literal path needs to
1966 be specified that should <em>not</em> be expanded, it needs to be prefixed by
1967 <code>./</code>, like so: <code>./%(prefix)/bin</code>.</p></div>
1968 </dd>
1969 </dl></div>
1970 </div>
1971 <div class="sect2">
1972 <h3 id="_variables">Variables</h3>
1973 <div class="paragraph"><p>Note that this list is non-comprehensive and not necessarily complete.
1974 For command-specific variables, you will find a more detailed description
1975 in the appropriate manual page.</p></div>
1976 <div class="paragraph"><p>Other git-related tools may and do use their own variables.  When
1977 inventing new variables for use in your own tool, make sure their
1978 names do not conflict with those that are used by Git itself and
1979 other popular tools, and describe them in your documentation.</p></div>
1980 <div class="dlist"><dl>
1981 <dt class="hdlist1">
1982 advice.*
1983 </dt>
1984 <dd>
1985 <p>
1986         These variables control various optional help messages designed to
1987         aid new users.  When left unconfigured, Git will give the message
1988         alongside instructions on how to squelch it.  You can tell Git
1989         that you do not need the help message by setting these to <em>false</em>:
1990 </p>
1991 <div class="openblock">
1992 <div class="content">
1993 <div class="dlist"><dl>
1994 <dt class="hdlist1">
1995 addEmbeddedRepo
1996 </dt>
1997 <dd>
1998 <p>
1999                 Advice on what to do when you&#8217;ve accidentally added one
2000                 git repo inside of another.
2001 </p>
2002 </dd>
2003 <dt class="hdlist1">
2004 addEmptyPathspec
2005 </dt>
2006 <dd>
2007 <p>
2008                 Advice shown if a user runs the add command without providing
2009                 the pathspec parameter.
2010 </p>
2011 </dd>
2012 <dt class="hdlist1">
2013 addIgnoredFile
2014 </dt>
2015 <dd>
2016 <p>
2017                 Advice shown if a user attempts to add an ignored file to
2018                 the index.
2019 </p>
2020 </dd>
2021 <dt class="hdlist1">
2022 amWorkDir
2023 </dt>
2024 <dd>
2025 <p>
2026                 Advice that shows the location of the patch file when
2027                 <a href="git-am.html">git-am(1)</a> fails to apply it.
2028 </p>
2029 </dd>
2030 <dt class="hdlist1">
2031 ambiguousFetchRefspec
2032 </dt>
2033 <dd>
2034 <p>
2035                 Advice shown when a fetch refspec for multiple remotes maps to
2036                 the same remote-tracking branch namespace and causes branch
2037                 tracking set-up to fail.
2038 </p>
2039 </dd>
2040 <dt class="hdlist1">
2041 checkoutAmbiguousRemoteBranchName
2042 </dt>
2043 <dd>
2044 <p>
2045                 Advice shown when the argument to
2046                 <a href="git-checkout.html">git-checkout(1)</a> and <a href="git-switch.html">git-switch(1)</a>
2047                 ambiguously resolves to a
2048                 remote tracking branch on more than one remote in
2049                 situations where an unambiguous argument would have
2050                 otherwise caused a remote-tracking branch to be
2051                 checked out. See the <code>checkout.defaultRemote</code>
2052                 configuration variable for how to set a given remote
2053                 to be used by default in some situations where this
2054                 advice would be printed.
2055 </p>
2056 </dd>
2057 <dt class="hdlist1">
2058 commitBeforeMerge
2059 </dt>
2060 <dd>
2061 <p>
2062                 Advice shown when <a href="git-merge.html">git-merge(1)</a> refuses to
2063                 merge to avoid overwriting local changes.
2064 </p>
2065 </dd>
2066 <dt class="hdlist1">
2067 detachedHead
2068 </dt>
2069 <dd>
2070 <p>
2071                 Advice shown when you used
2072                 <a href="git-switch.html">git-switch(1)</a> or <a href="git-checkout.html">git-checkout(1)</a>
2073                 to move to the detached HEAD state, to instruct how to
2074                 create a local branch after the fact.
2075 </p>
2076 </dd>
2077 <dt class="hdlist1">
2078 diverging
2079 </dt>
2080 <dd>
2081 <p>
2082                 Advice shown when a fast-forward is not possible.
2083 </p>
2084 </dd>
2085 <dt class="hdlist1">
2086 fetchShowForcedUpdates
2087 </dt>
2088 <dd>
2089 <p>
2090                 Advice shown when <a href="git-fetch.html">git-fetch(1)</a> takes a long time
2091                 to calculate forced updates after ref updates, or to warn
2092                 that the check is disabled.
2093 </p>
2094 </dd>
2095 <dt class="hdlist1">
2096 forceDeleteBranch
2097 </dt>
2098 <dd>
2099 <p>
2100                 Advice shown when a user tries to delete a not fully merged
2101                 branch without the force option set.
2102 </p>
2103 </dd>
2104 <dt class="hdlist1">
2105 ignoredHook
2106 </dt>
2107 <dd>
2108 <p>
2109                 Advice shown if a hook is ignored because the hook is not
2110                 set as executable.
2111 </p>
2112 </dd>
2113 <dt class="hdlist1">
2114 implicitIdentity
2115 </dt>
2116 <dd>
2117 <p>
2118                 Advice on how to set your identity configuration when
2119                 your information is guessed from the system username and
2120                 domain name.
2121 </p>
2122 </dd>
2123 <dt class="hdlist1">
2124 nestedTag
2125 </dt>
2126 <dd>
2127 <p>
2128                 Advice shown if a user attempts to recursively tag a tag object.
2129 </p>
2130 </dd>
2131 <dt class="hdlist1">
2132 pushAlreadyExists
2133 </dt>
2134 <dd>
2135 <p>
2136                 Shown when <a href="git-push.html">git-push(1)</a> rejects an update that
2137                 does not qualify for fast-forwarding (e.g., a tag.)
2138 </p>
2139 </dd>
2140 <dt class="hdlist1">
2141 pushFetchFirst
2142 </dt>
2143 <dd>
2144 <p>
2145                 Shown when <a href="git-push.html">git-push(1)</a> rejects an update that
2146                 tries to overwrite a remote ref that points at an
2147                 object we do not have.
2148 </p>
2149 </dd>
2150 <dt class="hdlist1">
2151 pushNeedsForce
2152 </dt>
2153 <dd>
2154 <p>
2155                 Shown when <a href="git-push.html">git-push(1)</a> rejects an update that
2156                 tries to overwrite a remote ref that points at an
2157                 object that is not a commit-ish, or make the remote
2158                 ref point at an object that is not a commit-ish.
2159 </p>
2160 </dd>
2161 <dt class="hdlist1">
2162 pushNonFFCurrent
2163 </dt>
2164 <dd>
2165 <p>
2166                 Advice shown when <a href="git-push.html">git-push(1)</a> fails due to a
2167                 non-fast-forward update to the current branch.
2168 </p>
2169 </dd>
2170 <dt class="hdlist1">
2171 pushNonFFMatching
2172 </dt>
2173 <dd>
2174 <p>
2175                 Advice shown when you ran <a href="git-push.html">git-push(1)</a> and pushed
2176                 <em>matching refs</em> explicitly (i.e. you used <em>:</em>, or
2177                 specified a refspec that isn&#8217;t your current branch) and
2178                 it resulted in a non-fast-forward error.
2179 </p>
2180 </dd>
2181 <dt class="hdlist1">
2182 pushRefNeedsUpdate
2183 </dt>
2184 <dd>
2185 <p>
2186                 Shown when <a href="git-push.html">git-push(1)</a> rejects a forced update of
2187                 a branch when its remote-tracking ref has updates that we
2188                 do not have locally.
2189 </p>
2190 </dd>
2191 <dt class="hdlist1">
2192 pushUnqualifiedRefname
2193 </dt>
2194 <dd>
2195 <p>
2196                 Shown when <a href="git-push.html">git-push(1)</a> gives up trying to
2197                 guess based on the source and destination refs what
2198                 remote ref namespace the source belongs in, but where
2199                 we can still suggest that the user push to either
2200                 refs/heads/* or refs/tags/* based on the type of the
2201                 source object.
2202 </p>
2203 </dd>
2204 <dt class="hdlist1">
2205 pushUpdateRejected
2206 </dt>
2207 <dd>
2208 <p>
2209                 Set this variable to <em>false</em> if you want to disable
2210                 <em>pushNonFFCurrent</em>, <em>pushNonFFMatching</em>, <em>pushAlreadyExists</em>,
2211                 <em>pushFetchFirst</em>, <em>pushNeedsForce</em>, and <em>pushRefNeedsUpdate</em>
2212                 simultaneously.
2213 </p>
2214 </dd>
2215 <dt class="hdlist1">
2216 resetNoRefresh
2217 </dt>
2218 <dd>
2219 <p>
2220                 Advice to consider using the <code>--no-refresh</code> option to
2221                 <a href="git-reset.html">git-reset(1)</a> when the command takes more than 2 seconds
2222                 to refresh the index after reset.
2223 </p>
2224 </dd>
2225 <dt class="hdlist1">
2226 resolveConflict
2227 </dt>
2228 <dd>
2229 <p>
2230                 Advice shown by various commands when conflicts
2231                 prevent the operation from being performed.
2232 </p>
2233 </dd>
2234 <dt class="hdlist1">
2235 rmHints
2236 </dt>
2237 <dd>
2238 <p>
2239                 In case of failure in the output of <a href="git-rm.html">git-rm(1)</a>,
2240                 show directions on how to proceed from the current state.
2241 </p>
2242 </dd>
2243 <dt class="hdlist1">
2244 sequencerInUse
2245 </dt>
2246 <dd>
2247 <p>
2248                 Advice shown when a sequencer command is already in progress.
2249 </p>
2250 </dd>
2251 <dt class="hdlist1">
2252 skippedCherryPicks
2253 </dt>
2254 <dd>
2255 <p>
2256                 Shown when <a href="git-rebase.html">git-rebase(1)</a> skips a commit that has already
2257                 been cherry-picked onto the upstream branch.
2258 </p>
2259 </dd>
2260 <dt class="hdlist1">
2261 statusAheadBehind
2262 </dt>
2263 <dd>
2264 <p>
2265                 Shown when <a href="git-status.html">git-status(1)</a> computes the ahead/behind
2266                 counts for a local ref compared to its remote tracking ref,
2267                 and that calculation takes longer than expected. Will not
2268                 appear if <code>status.aheadBehind</code> is false or the option
2269                 <code>--no-ahead-behind</code> is given.
2270 </p>
2271 </dd>
2272 <dt class="hdlist1">
2273 statusHints
2274 </dt>
2275 <dd>
2276 <p>
2277                 Show directions on how to proceed from the current
2278                 state in the output of <a href="git-status.html">git-status(1)</a>, in
2279                 the template shown when writing commit messages in
2280                 <a href="git-commit.html">git-commit(1)</a>, and in the help message shown
2281                 by <a href="git-switch.html">git-switch(1)</a> or
2282                 <a href="git-checkout.html">git-checkout(1)</a> when switching branches.
2283 </p>
2284 </dd>
2285 <dt class="hdlist1">
2286 statusUoption
2287 </dt>
2288 <dd>
2289 <p>
2290                 Advise to consider using the <code>-u</code> option to <a href="git-status.html">git-status(1)</a>
2291                 when the command takes more than 2 seconds to enumerate untracked
2292                 files.
2293 </p>
2294 </dd>
2295 <dt class="hdlist1">
2296 submoduleAlternateErrorStrategyDie
2297 </dt>
2298 <dd>
2299 <p>
2300                 Advice shown when a submodule.alternateErrorStrategy option
2301                 configured to "die" causes a fatal error.
2302 </p>
2303 </dd>
2304 <dt class="hdlist1">
2305 submodulesNotUpdated
2306 </dt>
2307 <dd>
2308 <p>
2309                 Advice shown when a user runs a submodule command that fails
2310                 because <code>git submodule update --init</code> was not run.
2311 </p>
2312 </dd>
2313 <dt class="hdlist1">
2314 suggestDetachingHead
2315 </dt>
2316 <dd>
2317 <p>
2318                 Advice shown when <a href="git-switch.html">git-switch(1)</a> refuses to detach HEAD
2319                 without the explicit <code>--detach</code> option.
2320 </p>
2321 </dd>
2322 <dt class="hdlist1">
2323 updateSparsePath
2324 </dt>
2325 <dd>
2326 <p>
2327                 Advice shown when either <a href="git-add.html">git-add(1)</a> or <a href="git-rm.html">git-rm(1)</a>
2328                 is asked to update index entries outside the current sparse
2329                 checkout.
2330 </p>
2331 </dd>
2332 <dt class="hdlist1">
2333 waitingForEditor
2334 </dt>
2335 <dd>
2336 <p>
2337                 Print a message to the terminal whenever Git is waiting for
2338                 editor input from the user.
2339 </p>
2340 </dd>
2341 <dt class="hdlist1">
2342 worktreeAddOrphan
2343 </dt>
2344 <dd>
2345 <p>
2346                 Advice shown when a user tries to create a worktree from an
2347                 invalid reference, to instruct how to create a new unborn
2348                 branch instead.
2349 </p>
2350 </dd>
2351 </dl></div>
2352 </div></div>
2353 </dd>
2354 <dt class="hdlist1">
2355 attr.tree
2356 </dt>
2357 <dd>
2358 <p>
2359         A reference to a tree in the repository from which to read attributes,
2360         instead of the <code>.gitattributes</code> file in the working tree. In a bare
2361         repository, this defaults to <code>HEAD:.gitattributes</code>. If the value does
2362         not resolve to a valid tree object, an empty tree is used instead.
2363         When the <code>GIT_ATTR_SOURCE</code> environment variable or <code>--attr-source</code>
2364         command line option are used, this configuration variable has no effect.
2365 </p>
2366 </dd>
2367 <dt class="hdlist1">
2368 core.fileMode
2369 </dt>
2370 <dd>
2371 <p>
2372         Tells Git if the executable bit of files in the working tree
2373         is to be honored.
2374 </p>
2375 <div class="paragraph"><p>Some filesystems lose the executable bit when a file that is
2376 marked as executable is checked out, or checks out a
2377 non-executable file with executable bit on.
2378 <a href="git-clone.html">git-clone(1)</a> or <a href="git-init.html">git-init(1)</a> probe the filesystem
2379 to see if it handles the executable bit correctly
2380 and this variable is automatically set as necessary.</p></div>
2381 <div class="paragraph"><p>A repository, however, may be on a filesystem that handles
2382 the filemode correctly, and this variable is set to <em>true</em>
2383 when created, but later may be made accessible from another
2384 environment that loses the filemode (e.g. exporting ext4 via
2385 CIFS mount, visiting a Cygwin created repository with
2386 Git for Windows or Eclipse).
2387 In such a case it may be necessary to set this variable to <em>false</em>.
2388 See <a href="git-update-index.html">git-update-index(1)</a>.</p></div>
2389 <div class="paragraph"><p>The default is true (when core.filemode is not specified in the config file).</p></div>
2390 </dd>
2391 <dt class="hdlist1">
2392 core.hideDotFiles
2393 </dt>
2394 <dd>
2395 <p>
2396         (Windows-only) If true, mark newly-created directories and files whose
2397         name starts with a dot as hidden.  If <em>dotGitOnly</em>, only the <code>.git/</code>
2398         directory is hidden, but no other files starting with a dot.  The
2399         default mode is <em>dotGitOnly</em>.
2400 </p>
2401 </dd>
2402 <dt class="hdlist1">
2403 core.ignoreCase
2404 </dt>
2405 <dd>
2406 <p>
2407         Internal variable which enables various workarounds to enable
2408         Git to work better on filesystems that are not case sensitive,
2409         like APFS, HFS+, FAT, NTFS, etc. For example, if a directory listing
2410         finds "makefile" when Git expects "Makefile", Git will assume
2411         it is really the same file, and continue to remember it as
2412         "Makefile".
2413 </p>
2414 <div class="paragraph"><p>The default is false, except <a href="git-clone.html">git-clone(1)</a> or <a href="git-init.html">git-init(1)</a>
2415 will probe and set core.ignoreCase true if appropriate when the repository
2416 is created.</p></div>
2417 <div class="paragraph"><p>Git relies on the proper configuration of this variable for your operating
2418 and file system. Modifying this value may result in unexpected behavior.</p></div>
2419 </dd>
2420 <dt class="hdlist1">
2421 core.precomposeUnicode
2422 </dt>
2423 <dd>
2424 <p>
2425         This option is only used by Mac OS implementation of Git.
2426         When core.precomposeUnicode=true, Git reverts the unicode decomposition
2427         of filenames done by Mac OS. This is useful when sharing a repository
2428         between Mac OS and Linux or Windows.
2429         (Git for Windows 1.7.10 or higher is needed, or Git under cygwin 1.7).
2430         When false, file names are handled fully transparent by Git,
2431         which is backward compatible with older versions of Git.
2432 </p>
2433 </dd>
2434 <dt class="hdlist1">
2435 core.protectHFS
2436 </dt>
2437 <dd>
2438 <p>
2439         If set to true, do not allow checkout of paths that would
2440         be considered equivalent to <code>.git</code> on an HFS+ filesystem.
2441         Defaults to <code>true</code> on Mac OS, and <code>false</code> elsewhere.
2442 </p>
2443 </dd>
2444 <dt class="hdlist1">
2445 core.protectNTFS
2446 </dt>
2447 <dd>
2448 <p>
2449         If set to true, do not allow checkout of paths that would
2450         cause problems with the NTFS filesystem, e.g. conflict with
2451         8.3 "short" names.
2452         Defaults to <code>true</code> on Windows, and <code>false</code> elsewhere.
2453 </p>
2454 </dd>
2455 <dt class="hdlist1">
2456 core.fsmonitor
2457 </dt>
2458 <dd>
2459 <p>
2460         If set to true, enable the built-in file system monitor
2461         daemon for this working directory (<a href="git-fsmonitor&#45;&#45;daemon.html">git-fsmonitor&#45;&#45;daemon(1)</a>).
2462 </p>
2463 <div class="paragraph"><p>Like hook-based file system monitors, the built-in file system monitor
2464 can speed up Git commands that need to refresh the Git index
2465 (e.g. <code>git status</code>) in a working directory with many files.  The
2466 built-in monitor eliminates the need to install and maintain an
2467 external third-party tool.</p></div>
2468 <div class="paragraph"><p>The built-in file system monitor is currently available only on a
2469 limited set of supported platforms.  Currently, this includes Windows
2470 and MacOS.</p></div>
2471 <div class="literalblock">
2472 <div class="content">
2473 <pre><code>Otherwise, this variable contains the pathname of the "fsmonitor"
2474 hook command.</code></pre>
2475 </div></div>
2476 <div class="paragraph"><p>This hook command is used to identify all files that may have changed
2477 since the requested date/time. This information is used to speed up
2478 git by avoiding unnecessary scanning of files that have not changed.</p></div>
2479 <div class="paragraph"><p>See the "fsmonitor-watchman" section of <a href="githooks.html">githooks(5)</a>.</p></div>
2480 <div class="paragraph"><p>Note that if you concurrently use multiple versions of Git, such
2481 as one version on the command line and another version in an IDE
2482 tool, that the definition of <code>core.fsmonitor</code> was extended to
2483 allow boolean values in addition to hook pathnames.  Git versions
2484 2.35.1 and prior will not understand the boolean values and will
2485 consider the "true" or "false" values as hook pathnames to be
2486 invoked.  Git versions 2.26 thru 2.35.1 default to hook protocol
2487 V2 and will fall back to no fsmonitor (full scan).  Git versions
2488 prior to 2.26 default to hook protocol V1 and will silently
2489 assume there were no changes to report (no scan), so status
2490 commands may report incomplete results.  For this reason, it is
2491 best to upgrade all of your Git versions before using the built-in
2492 file system monitor.</p></div>
2493 </dd>
2494 <dt class="hdlist1">
2495 core.fsmonitorHookVersion
2496 </dt>
2497 <dd>
2498 <p>
2499         Sets the protocol version to be used when invoking the
2500         "fsmonitor" hook.
2501 </p>
2502 <div class="paragraph"><p>There are currently versions 1 and 2. When this is not set,
2503 version 2 will be tried first and if it fails then version 1
2504 will be tried. Version 1 uses a timestamp as input to determine
2505 which files have changes since that time but some monitors
2506 like Watchman have race conditions when used with a timestamp.
2507 Version 2 uses an opaque string so that the monitor can return
2508 something that can be used to determine what files have changed
2509 without race conditions.</p></div>
2510 </dd>
2511 <dt class="hdlist1">
2512 core.trustctime
2513 </dt>
2514 <dd>
2515 <p>
2516         If false, the ctime differences between the index and the
2517         working tree are ignored; useful when the inode change time
2518         is regularly modified by something outside Git (file system
2519         crawlers and some backup systems).
2520         See <a href="git-update-index.html">git-update-index(1)</a>. True by default.
2521 </p>
2522 </dd>
2523 <dt class="hdlist1">
2524 core.splitIndex
2525 </dt>
2526 <dd>
2527 <p>
2528         If true, the split-index feature of the index will be used.
2529         See <a href="git-update-index.html">git-update-index(1)</a>. False by default.
2530 </p>
2531 </dd>
2532 <dt class="hdlist1">
2533 core.untrackedCache
2534 </dt>
2535 <dd>
2536 <p>
2537         Determines what to do about the untracked cache feature of the
2538         index. It will be kept, if this variable is unset or set to
2539         <code>keep</code>. It will automatically be added if set to <code>true</code>. And
2540         it will automatically be removed, if set to <code>false</code>. Before
2541         setting it to <code>true</code>, you should check that mtime is working
2542         properly on your system.
2543         See <a href="git-update-index.html">git-update-index(1)</a>. <code>keep</code> by default, unless
2544         <code>feature.manyFiles</code> is enabled which sets this setting to
2545         <code>true</code> by default.
2546 </p>
2547 </dd>
2548 <dt class="hdlist1">
2549 core.checkStat
2550 </dt>
2551 <dd>
2552 <p>
2553         When missing or is set to <code>default</code>, many fields in the stat
2554         structure are checked to detect if a file has been modified
2555         since Git looked at it.  When this configuration variable is
2556         set to <code>minimal</code>, sub-second part of mtime and ctime, the
2557         uid and gid of the owner of the file, the inode number (and
2558         the device number, if Git was compiled to use it), are
2559         excluded from the check among these fields, leaving only the
2560         whole-second part of mtime (and ctime, if <code>core.trustCtime</code>
2561         is set) and the filesize to be checked.
2562 </p>
2563 <div class="paragraph"><p>There are implementations of Git that do not leave usable values in
2564 some fields (e.g. JGit); by excluding these fields from the
2565 comparison, the <code>minimal</code> mode may help interoperability when the
2566 same repository is used by these other systems at the same time.</p></div>
2567 </dd>
2568 <dt class="hdlist1">
2569 core.quotePath
2570 </dt>
2571 <dd>
2572 <p>
2573         Commands that output paths (e.g. <em>ls-files</em>, <em>diff</em>), will
2574         quote "unusual" characters in the pathname by enclosing the
2575         pathname in double-quotes and escaping those characters with
2576         backslashes in the same way C escapes control characters (e.g.
2577         <code>\t</code> for TAB, <code>\n</code> for LF, <code>\\</code> for backslash) or bytes with
2578         values larger than 0x80 (e.g. octal <code>\302\265</code> for "micro" in
2579         UTF-8).  If this variable is set to false, bytes higher than
2580         0x80 are not considered "unusual" any more. Double-quotes,
2581         backslash and control characters are always escaped regardless
2582         of the setting of this variable.  A simple space character is
2583         not considered "unusual".  Many commands can output pathnames
2584         completely verbatim using the <code>-z</code> option. The default value
2585         is true.
2586 </p>
2587 </dd>
2588 <dt class="hdlist1">
2589 core.eol
2590 </dt>
2591 <dd>
2592 <p>
2593         Sets the line ending type to use in the working directory for
2594         files that are marked as text (either by having the <code>text</code>
2595         attribute set, or by having <code>text=auto</code> and Git auto-detecting
2596         the contents as text).
2597         Alternatives are <em>lf</em>, <em>crlf</em> and <em>native</em>, which uses the platform&#8217;s
2598         native line ending.  The default value is <code>native</code>.  See
2599         <a href="gitattributes.html">gitattributes(5)</a> for more information on end-of-line
2600         conversion. Note that this value is ignored if <code>core.autocrlf</code>
2601         is set to <code>true</code> or <code>input</code>.
2602 </p>
2603 </dd>
2604 <dt class="hdlist1">
2605 core.safecrlf
2606 </dt>
2607 <dd>
2608 <p>
2609         If true, makes Git check if converting <code>CRLF</code> is reversible when
2610         end-of-line conversion is active.  Git will verify if a command
2611         modifies a file in the work tree either directly or indirectly.
2612         For example, committing a file followed by checking out the
2613         same file should yield the original file in the work tree.  If
2614         this is not the case for the current setting of
2615         <code>core.autocrlf</code>, Git will reject the file.  The variable can
2616         be set to "warn", in which case Git will only warn about an
2617         irreversible conversion but continue the operation.
2618 </p>
2619 <div class="paragraph"><p>CRLF conversion bears a slight chance of corrupting data.
2620 When it is enabled, Git will convert CRLF to LF during commit and LF to
2621 CRLF during checkout.  A file that contains a mixture of LF and
2622 CRLF before the commit cannot be recreated by Git.  For text
2623 files this is the right thing to do: it corrects line endings
2624 such that we have only LF line endings in the repository.
2625 But for binary files that are accidentally classified as text the
2626 conversion can corrupt data.</p></div>
2627 <div class="paragraph"><p>If you recognize such corruption early you can easily fix it by
2628 setting the conversion type explicitly in .gitattributes.  Right
2629 after committing you still have the original file in your work
2630 tree and this file is not yet corrupted.  You can explicitly tell
2631 Git that this file is binary and Git will handle the file
2632 appropriately.</p></div>
2633 <div class="paragraph"><p>Unfortunately, the desired effect of cleaning up text files with
2634 mixed line endings and the undesired effect of corrupting binary
2635 files cannot be distinguished.  In both cases CRLFs are removed
2636 in an irreversible way.  For text files this is the right thing
2637 to do because CRLFs are line endings, while for binary files
2638 converting CRLFs corrupts data.</p></div>
2639 <div class="paragraph"><p>Note, this safety check does not mean that a checkout will generate a
2640 file identical to the original file for a different setting of
2641 <code>core.eol</code> and <code>core.autocrlf</code>, but only for the current one.  For
2642 example, a text file with <code>LF</code> would be accepted with <code>core.eol=lf</code>
2643 and could later be checked out with <code>core.eol=crlf</code>, in which case the
2644 resulting file would contain <code>CRLF</code>, although the original file
2645 contained <code>LF</code>.  However, in both work trees the line endings would be
2646 consistent, that is either all <code>LF</code> or all <code>CRLF</code>, but never mixed.  A
2647 file with mixed line endings would be reported by the <code>core.safecrlf</code>
2648 mechanism.</p></div>
2649 </dd>
2650 <dt class="hdlist1">
2651 core.autocrlf
2652 </dt>
2653 <dd>
2654 <p>
2655         Setting this variable to "true" is the same as setting
2656         the <code>text</code> attribute to "auto" on all files and core.eol to "crlf".
2657         Set to true if you want to have <code>CRLF</code> line endings in your
2658         working directory and the repository has LF line endings.
2659         This variable can be set to <em>input</em>,
2660         in which case no output conversion is performed.
2661 </p>
2662 </dd>
2663 <dt class="hdlist1">
2664 core.checkRoundtripEncoding
2665 </dt>
2666 <dd>
2667 <p>
2668         A comma and/or whitespace separated list of encodings that Git
2669         performs UTF-8 round trip checks on if they are used in an
2670         <code>working-tree-encoding</code> attribute (see <a href="gitattributes.html">gitattributes(5)</a>).
2671         The default value is <code>SHIFT-JIS</code>.
2672 </p>
2673 </dd>
2674 <dt class="hdlist1">
2675 core.symlinks
2676 </dt>
2677 <dd>
2678 <p>
2679         If false, symbolic links are checked out as small plain files that
2680         contain the link text. <a href="git-update-index.html">git-update-index(1)</a> and
2681         <a href="git-add.html">git-add(1)</a> will not change the recorded type to regular
2682         file. Useful on filesystems like FAT that do not support
2683         symbolic links.
2684 </p>
2685 <div class="paragraph"><p>The default is true, except <a href="git-clone.html">git-clone(1)</a> or <a href="git-init.html">git-init(1)</a>
2686 will probe and set core.symlinks false if appropriate when the repository
2687 is created.</p></div>
2688 </dd>
2689 <dt class="hdlist1">
2690 core.gitProxy
2691 </dt>
2692 <dd>
2693 <p>
2694         A "proxy command" to execute (as <em>command host port</em>) instead
2695         of establishing direct connection to the remote server when
2696         using the Git protocol for fetching. If the variable value is
2697         in the "COMMAND for DOMAIN" format, the command is applied only
2698         on hostnames ending with the specified domain string. This variable
2699         may be set multiple times and is matched in the given order;
2700         the first match wins.
2701 </p>
2702 <div class="paragraph"><p>Can be overridden by the <code>GIT_PROXY_COMMAND</code> environment variable
2703 (which always applies universally, without the special "for"
2704 handling).</p></div>
2705 <div class="paragraph"><p>The special string <code>none</code> can be used as the proxy command to
2706 specify that no proxy be used for a given domain pattern.
2707 This is useful for excluding servers inside a firewall from
2708 proxy use, while defaulting to a common proxy for external domains.</p></div>
2709 </dd>
2710 <dt class="hdlist1">
2711 core.sshCommand
2712 </dt>
2713 <dd>
2714 <p>
2715         If this variable is set, <code>git fetch</code> and <code>git push</code> will
2716         use the specified command instead of <code>ssh</code> when they need to
2717         connect to a remote system. The command is in the same form as
2718         the <code>GIT_SSH_COMMAND</code> environment variable and is overridden
2719         when the environment variable is set.
2720 </p>
2721 </dd>
2722 <dt class="hdlist1">
2723 core.ignoreStat
2724 </dt>
2725 <dd>
2726 <p>
2727         If true, Git will avoid using lstat() calls to detect if files have
2728         changed by setting the "assume-unchanged" bit for those tracked files
2729         which it has updated identically in both the index and working tree.
2730 </p>
2731 <div class="paragraph"><p>When files are modified outside of Git, the user will need to stage
2732 the modified files explicitly (e.g. see <em>Examples</em> section in
2733 <a href="git-update-index.html">git-update-index(1)</a>).
2734 Git will not normally detect changes to those files.</p></div>
2735 <div class="paragraph"><p>This is useful on systems where lstat() calls are very slow, such as
2736 CIFS/Microsoft Windows.</p></div>
2737 <div class="paragraph"><p>False by default.</p></div>
2738 </dd>
2739 <dt class="hdlist1">
2740 core.preferSymlinkRefs
2741 </dt>
2742 <dd>
2743 <p>
2744         Instead of the default "symref" format for HEAD
2745         and other symbolic reference files, use symbolic links.
2746         This is sometimes needed to work with old scripts that
2747         expect HEAD to be a symbolic link.
2748 </p>
2749 </dd>
2750 <dt class="hdlist1">
2751 core.alternateRefsCommand
2752 </dt>
2753 <dd>
2754 <p>
2755         When advertising tips of available history from an alternate, use the shell to
2756         execute the specified command instead of <a href="git-for-each-ref.html">git-for-each-ref(1)</a>. The
2757         first argument is the absolute path of the alternate. Output must contain one
2758         hex object id per line (i.e., the same as produced by <code>git for-each-ref
2759         --format='%(objectname)'</code>).
2760 </p>
2761 <div class="paragraph"><p>Note that you cannot generally put <code>git for-each-ref</code> directly into the config
2762 value, as it does not take a repository path as an argument (but you can wrap
2763 the command above in a shell script).</p></div>
2764 </dd>
2765 <dt class="hdlist1">
2766 core.alternateRefsPrefixes
2767 </dt>
2768 <dd>
2769 <p>
2770         When listing references from an alternate, list only references that begin
2771         with the given prefix. Prefixes match as if they were given as arguments to
2772         <a href="git-for-each-ref.html">git-for-each-ref(1)</a>. To list multiple prefixes, separate them with
2773         whitespace. If <code>core.alternateRefsCommand</code> is set, setting
2774         <code>core.alternateRefsPrefixes</code> has no effect.
2775 </p>
2776 </dd>
2777 <dt class="hdlist1">
2778 core.bare
2779 </dt>
2780 <dd>
2781 <p>
2782         If true this repository is assumed to be <em>bare</em> and has no
2783         working directory associated with it.  If this is the case a
2784         number of commands that require a working directory will be
2785         disabled, such as <a href="git-add.html">git-add(1)</a> or <a href="git-merge.html">git-merge(1)</a>.
2786 </p>
2787 <div class="paragraph"><p>This setting is automatically guessed by <a href="git-clone.html">git-clone(1)</a> or
2788 <a href="git-init.html">git-init(1)</a> when the repository was created.  By default a
2789 repository that ends in "/.git" is assumed to be not bare (bare =
2790 false), while all other repositories are assumed to be bare (bare
2791 = true).</p></div>
2792 </dd>
2793 <dt class="hdlist1">
2794 core.worktree
2795 </dt>
2796 <dd>
2797 <p>
2798         Set the path to the root of the working tree.
2799         If <code>GIT_COMMON_DIR</code> environment variable is set, core.worktree
2800         is ignored and not used for determining the root of working tree.
2801         This can be overridden by the <code>GIT_WORK_TREE</code> environment
2802         variable and the <code>--work-tree</code> command-line option.
2803         The value can be an absolute path or relative to the path to
2804         the .git directory, which is either specified by --git-dir
2805         or GIT_DIR, or automatically discovered.
2806         If --git-dir or GIT_DIR is specified but none of
2807         --work-tree, GIT_WORK_TREE and core.worktree is specified,
2808         the current working directory is regarded as the top level
2809         of your working tree.
2810 </p>
2811 <div class="paragraph"><p>Note that this variable is honored even when set in a configuration
2812 file in a ".git" subdirectory of a directory and its value differs
2813 from the latter directory (e.g. "/path/to/.git/config" has
2814 core.worktree set to "/different/path"), which is most likely a
2815 misconfiguration.  Running Git commands in the "/path/to" directory will
2816 still use "/different/path" as the root of the work tree and can cause
2817 confusion unless you know what you are doing (e.g. you are creating a
2818 read-only snapshot of the same index to a location different from the
2819 repository&#8217;s usual working tree).</p></div>
2820 </dd>
2821 <dt class="hdlist1">
2822 core.logAllRefUpdates
2823 </dt>
2824 <dd>
2825 <p>
2826         Enable the reflog. Updates to a ref &lt;ref&gt; is logged to the file
2827         "<code>$GIT_DIR/logs/&lt;ref&gt;</code>", by appending the new and old
2828         SHA-1, the date/time and the reason of the update, but
2829         only when the file exists.  If this configuration
2830         variable is set to <code>true</code>, missing "<code>$GIT_DIR/logs/&lt;ref&gt;</code>"
2831         file is automatically created for branch heads (i.e. under
2832         <code>refs/heads/</code>), remote refs (i.e. under <code>refs/remotes/</code>),
2833         note refs (i.e. under <code>refs/notes/</code>), and the symbolic ref <code>HEAD</code>.
2834         If it is set to <code>always</code>, then a missing reflog is automatically
2835         created for any ref under <code>refs/</code>.
2836 </p>
2837 <div class="paragraph"><p>This information can be used to determine what commit
2838 was the tip of a branch "2 days ago".</p></div>
2839 <div class="paragraph"><p>This value is true by default in a repository that has
2840 a working directory associated with it, and false by
2841 default in a bare repository.</p></div>
2842 </dd>
2843 <dt class="hdlist1">
2844 core.repositoryFormatVersion
2845 </dt>
2846 <dd>
2847 <p>
2848         Internal variable identifying the repository format and layout
2849         version.
2850 </p>
2851 </dd>
2852 <dt class="hdlist1">
2853 core.sharedRepository
2854 </dt>
2855 <dd>
2856 <p>
2857         When <em>group</em> (or <em>true</em>), the repository is made shareable between
2858         several users in a group (making sure all the files and objects are
2859         group-writable). When <em>all</em> (or <em>world</em> or <em>everybody</em>), the
2860         repository will be readable by all users, additionally to being
2861         group-shareable. When <em>umask</em> (or <em>false</em>), Git will use permissions
2862         reported by umask(2). When <em>0xxx</em>, where <em>0xxx</em> is an octal number,
2863         files in the repository will have this mode value. <em>0xxx</em> will override
2864         user&#8217;s umask value (whereas the other options will only override
2865         requested parts of the user&#8217;s umask value). Examples: <em>0660</em> will make
2866         the repo read/write-able for the owner and group, but inaccessible to
2867         others (equivalent to <em>group</em> unless umask is e.g. <em>0022</em>). <em>0640</em> is a
2868         repository that is group-readable but not group-writable.
2869         See <a href="git-init.html">git-init(1)</a>. False by default.
2870 </p>
2871 </dd>
2872 <dt class="hdlist1">
2873 core.warnAmbiguousRefs
2874 </dt>
2875 <dd>
2876 <p>
2877         If true, Git will warn you if the ref name you passed it is ambiguous
2878         and might match multiple refs in the repository. True by default.
2879 </p>
2880 </dd>
2881 <dt class="hdlist1">
2882 core.compression
2883 </dt>
2884 <dd>
2885 <p>
2886         An integer -1..9, indicating a default compression level.
2887         -1 is the zlib default. 0 means no compression,
2888         and 1..9 are various speed/size tradeoffs, 9 being slowest.
2889         If set, this provides a default to other compression variables,
2890         such as <code>core.looseCompression</code> and <code>pack.compression</code>.
2891 </p>
2892 </dd>
2893 <dt class="hdlist1">
2894 core.looseCompression
2895 </dt>
2896 <dd>
2897 <p>
2898         An integer -1..9, indicating the compression level for objects that
2899         are not in a pack file. -1 is the zlib default. 0 means no
2900         compression, and 1..9 are various speed/size tradeoffs, 9 being
2901         slowest.  If not set,  defaults to core.compression.  If that is
2902         not set,  defaults to 1 (best speed).
2903 </p>
2904 </dd>
2905 <dt class="hdlist1">
2906 core.packedGitWindowSize
2907 </dt>
2908 <dd>
2909 <p>
2910         Number of bytes of a pack file to map into memory in a
2911         single mapping operation.  Larger window sizes may allow
2912         your system to process a smaller number of large pack files
2913         more quickly.  Smaller window sizes will negatively affect
2914         performance due to increased calls to the operating system&#8217;s
2915         memory manager, but may improve performance when accessing
2916         a large number of large pack files.
2917 </p>
2918 <div class="paragraph"><p>Default is 1 MiB if NO_MMAP was set at compile time, otherwise 32
2919 MiB on 32 bit platforms and 1 GiB on 64 bit platforms.  This should
2920 be reasonable for all users/operating systems.  You probably do
2921 not need to adjust this value.</p></div>
2922 <div class="paragraph"><p>Common unit suffixes of <em>k</em>, <em>m</em>, or <em>g</em> are supported.</p></div>
2923 </dd>
2924 <dt class="hdlist1">
2925 core.packedGitLimit
2926 </dt>
2927 <dd>
2928 <p>
2929         Maximum number of bytes to map simultaneously into memory
2930         from pack files.  If Git needs to access more than this many
2931         bytes at once to complete an operation it will unmap existing
2932         regions to reclaim virtual address space within the process.
2933 </p>
2934 <div class="paragraph"><p>Default is 256 MiB on 32 bit platforms and 32 TiB (effectively
2935 unlimited) on 64 bit platforms.
2936 This should be reasonable for all users/operating systems, except on
2937 the largest projects.  You probably do not need to adjust this value.</p></div>
2938 <div class="paragraph"><p>Common unit suffixes of <em>k</em>, <em>m</em>, or <em>g</em> are supported.</p></div>
2939 </dd>
2940 <dt class="hdlist1">
2941 core.deltaBaseCacheLimit
2942 </dt>
2943 <dd>
2944 <p>
2945         Maximum number of bytes per thread to reserve for caching base objects
2946         that may be referenced by multiple deltified objects.  By storing the
2947         entire decompressed base objects in a cache Git is able
2948         to avoid unpacking and decompressing frequently used base
2949         objects multiple times.
2950 </p>
2951 <div class="paragraph"><p>Default is 96 MiB on all platforms.  This should be reasonable
2952 for all users/operating systems, except on the largest projects.
2953 You probably do not need to adjust this value.</p></div>
2954 <div class="paragraph"><p>Common unit suffixes of <em>k</em>, <em>m</em>, or <em>g</em> are supported.</p></div>
2955 </dd>
2956 <dt class="hdlist1">
2957 core.bigFileThreshold
2958 </dt>
2959 <dd>
2960 <p>
2961         The size of files considered "big", which as discussed below
2962         changes the behavior of numerous git commands, as well as how
2963         such files are stored within the repository. The default is
2964         512 MiB. Common unit suffixes of <em>k</em>, <em>m</em>, or <em>g</em> are
2965         supported.
2966 </p>
2967 <div class="paragraph"><p>Files above the configured limit will be:</p></div>
2968 <div class="ulist"><ul>
2969 <li>
2970 <p>
2971 Stored deflated in packfiles, without attempting delta compression.
2972 </p>
2973 <div class="paragraph"><p>The default limit is primarily set with this use-case in mind. With it,
2974 most projects will have their source code and other text files delta
2975 compressed, but not larger binary media files.</p></div>
2976 <div class="paragraph"><p>Storing large files without delta compression avoids excessive memory
2977 usage, at the slight expense of increased disk usage.</p></div>
2978 </li>
2979 <li>
2980 <p>
2981 Will be treated as if they were labeled "binary" (see
2982   <a href="gitattributes.html">gitattributes(5)</a>). e.g. <a href="git-log.html">git-log(1)</a> and
2983   <a href="git-diff.html">git-diff(1)</a> will not compute diffs for files above this limit.
2984 </p>
2985 </li>
2986 <li>
2987 <p>
2988 Will generally be streamed when written, which avoids excessive
2989 memory usage, at the cost of some fixed overhead. Commands that make
2990 use of this include <a href="git-archive.html">git-archive(1)</a>,
2991 <a href="git-fast-import.html">git-fast-import(1)</a>, <a href="git-index-pack.html">git-index-pack(1)</a>,
2992 <a href="git-unpack-objects.html">git-unpack-objects(1)</a> and <a href="git-fsck.html">git-fsck(1)</a>.
2993 </p>
2994 </li>
2995 </ul></div>
2996 </dd>
2997 <dt class="hdlist1">
2998 core.excludesFile
2999 </dt>
3000 <dd>
3001 <p>
3002         Specifies the pathname to the file that contains patterns to
3003         describe paths that are not meant to be tracked, in addition
3004         to <code>.gitignore</code> (per-directory) and <code>.git/info/exclude</code>.
3005         Defaults to <code>$XDG_CONFIG_HOME/git/ignore</code>.
3006         If <code>$XDG_CONFIG_HOME</code> is either not set or empty, <code>$HOME/.config/git/ignore</code>
3007         is used instead. See <a href="gitignore.html">gitignore(5)</a>.
3008 </p>
3009 </dd>
3010 <dt class="hdlist1">
3011 core.askPass
3012 </dt>
3013 <dd>
3014 <p>
3015         Some commands (e.g. svn and http interfaces) that interactively
3016         ask for a password can be told to use an external program given
3017         via the value of this variable. Can be overridden by the <code>GIT_ASKPASS</code>
3018         environment variable. If not set, fall back to the value of the
3019         <code>SSH_ASKPASS</code> environment variable or, failing that, a simple password
3020         prompt. The external program shall be given a suitable prompt as
3021         command-line argument and write the password on its STDOUT.
3022 </p>
3023 </dd>
3024 <dt class="hdlist1">
3025 core.attributesFile
3026 </dt>
3027 <dd>
3028 <p>
3029         In addition to <code>.gitattributes</code> (per-directory) and
3030         <code>.git/info/attributes</code>, Git looks into this file for attributes
3031         (see <a href="gitattributes.html">gitattributes(5)</a>). Path expansions are made the same
3032         way as for <code>core.excludesFile</code>. Its default value is
3033         <code>$XDG_CONFIG_HOME/git/attributes</code>. If <code>$XDG_CONFIG_HOME</code> is either not
3034         set or empty, <code>$HOME/.config/git/attributes</code> is used instead.
3035 </p>
3036 </dd>
3037 <dt class="hdlist1">
3038 core.hooksPath
3039 </dt>
3040 <dd>
3041 <p>
3042         By default Git will look for your hooks in the
3043         <code>$GIT_DIR/hooks</code> directory. Set this to different path,
3044         e.g. <code>/etc/git/hooks</code>, and Git will try to find your hooks in
3045         that directory, e.g. <code>/etc/git/hooks/pre-receive</code> instead of
3046         in <code>$GIT_DIR/hooks/pre-receive</code>.
3047 </p>
3048 <div class="paragraph"><p>The path can be either absolute or relative. A relative path is
3049 taken as relative to the directory where the hooks are run (see
3050 the "DESCRIPTION" section of <a href="githooks.html">githooks(5)</a>).</p></div>
3051 <div class="paragraph"><p>This configuration variable is useful in cases where you&#8217;d like to
3052 centrally configure your Git hooks instead of configuring them on a
3053 per-repository basis, or as a more flexible and centralized
3054 alternative to having an <code>init.templateDir</code> where you&#8217;ve changed
3055 default hooks.</p></div>
3056 </dd>
3057 <dt class="hdlist1">
3058 core.editor
3059 </dt>
3060 <dd>
3061 <p>
3062         Commands such as <code>commit</code> and <code>tag</code> that let you edit
3063         messages by launching an editor use the value of this
3064         variable when it is set, and the environment variable
3065         <code>GIT_EDITOR</code> is not set.  See <a href="git-var.html">git-var(1)</a>.
3066 </p>
3067 </dd>
3068 <dt class="hdlist1">
3069 core.commentChar
3070 </dt>
3071 <dd>
3072 <p>
3073         Commands such as <code>commit</code> and <code>tag</code> that let you edit
3074         messages consider a line that begins with this character
3075         commented, and removes them after the editor returns
3076         (default <em>#</em>).
3077 </p>
3078 <div class="paragraph"><p>If set to "auto", <code>git-commit</code> would select a character that is not
3079 the beginning character of any line in existing commit messages.</p></div>
3080 </dd>
3081 <dt class="hdlist1">
3082 core.filesRefLockTimeout
3083 </dt>
3084 <dd>
3085 <p>
3086         The length of time, in milliseconds, to retry when trying to
3087         lock an individual reference. Value 0 means not to retry at
3088         all; -1 means to try indefinitely. Default is 100 (i.e.,
3089         retry for 100ms).
3090 </p>
3091 </dd>
3092 <dt class="hdlist1">
3093 core.packedRefsTimeout
3094 </dt>
3095 <dd>
3096 <p>
3097         The length of time, in milliseconds, to retry when trying to
3098         lock the <code>packed-refs</code> file. Value 0 means not to retry at
3099         all; -1 means to try indefinitely. Default is 1000 (i.e.,
3100         retry for 1 second).
3101 </p>
3102 </dd>
3103 <dt class="hdlist1">
3104 core.pager
3105 </dt>
3106 <dd>
3107 <p>
3108         Text viewer for use by Git commands (e.g., <em>less</em>).  The value
3109         is meant to be interpreted by the shell.  The order of preference
3110         is the <code>$GIT_PAGER</code> environment variable, then <code>core.pager</code>
3111         configuration, then <code>$PAGER</code>, and then the default chosen at
3112         compile time (usually <em>less</em>).
3113 </p>
3114 <div class="paragraph"><p>When the <code>LESS</code> environment variable is unset, Git sets it to <code>FRX</code>
3115 (if <code>LESS</code> environment variable is set, Git does not change it at
3116 all).  If you want to selectively override Git&#8217;s default setting
3117 for <code>LESS</code>, you can set <code>core.pager</code> to e.g. <code>less -S</code>.  This will
3118 be passed to the shell by Git, which will translate the final
3119 command to <code>LESS=FRX less -S</code>. The environment does not set the
3120 <code>S</code> option but the command line does, instructing less to truncate
3121 long lines. Similarly, setting <code>core.pager</code> to <code>less -+F</code> will
3122 deactivate the <code>F</code> option specified by the environment from the
3123 command-line, deactivating the "quit if one screen" behavior of
3124 <code>less</code>.  One can specifically activate some flags for particular
3125 commands: for example, setting <code>pager.blame</code> to <code>less -S</code> enables
3126 line truncation only for <code>git blame</code>.</p></div>
3127 <div class="paragraph"><p>Likewise, when the <code>LV</code> environment variable is unset, Git sets it
3128 to <code>-c</code>.  You can override this setting by exporting <code>LV</code> with
3129 another value or setting <code>core.pager</code> to <code>lv +c</code>.</p></div>
3130 </dd>
3131 <dt class="hdlist1">
3132 core.whitespace
3133 </dt>
3134 <dd>
3135 <p>
3136         A comma separated list of common whitespace problems to
3137         notice.  <em>git diff</em> will use <code>color.diff.whitespace</code> to
3138         highlight them, and <em>git apply --whitespace=error</em> will
3139         consider them as errors.  You can prefix <code>-</code> to disable
3140         any of them (e.g. <code>-trailing-space</code>):
3141 </p>
3142 <div class="ulist"><ul>
3143 <li>
3144 <p>
3145 <code>blank-at-eol</code> treats trailing whitespaces at the end of the line
3146   as an error (enabled by default).
3147 </p>
3148 </li>
3149 <li>
3150 <p>
3151 <code>space-before-tab</code> treats a space character that appears immediately
3152   before a tab character in the initial indent part of the line as an
3153   error (enabled by default).
3154 </p>
3155 </li>
3156 <li>
3157 <p>
3158 <code>indent-with-non-tab</code> treats a line that is indented with space
3159   characters instead of the equivalent tabs as an error (not enabled by
3160   default).
3161 </p>
3162 </li>
3163 <li>
3164 <p>
3165 <code>tab-in-indent</code> treats a tab character in the initial indent part of
3166   the line as an error (not enabled by default).
3167 </p>
3168 </li>
3169 <li>
3170 <p>
3171 <code>blank-at-eof</code> treats blank lines added at the end of file as an error
3172   (enabled by default).
3173 </p>
3174 </li>
3175 <li>
3176 <p>
3177 <code>trailing-space</code> is a short-hand to cover both <code>blank-at-eol</code> and
3178   <code>blank-at-eof</code>.
3179 </p>
3180 </li>
3181 <li>
3182 <p>
3183 <code>cr-at-eol</code> treats a carriage-return at the end of line as
3184   part of the line terminator, i.e. with it, <code>trailing-space</code>
3185   does not trigger if the character before such a carriage-return
3186   is not a whitespace (not enabled by default).
3187 </p>
3188 </li>
3189 <li>
3190 <p>
3191 <code>tabwidth=&lt;n&gt;</code> tells how many character positions a tab occupies; this
3192   is relevant for <code>indent-with-non-tab</code> and when Git fixes <code>tab-in-indent</code>
3193   errors. The default tab width is 8. Allowed values are 1 to 63.
3194 </p>
3195 </li>
3196 </ul></div>
3197 </dd>
3198 <dt class="hdlist1">
3199 core.fsync
3200 </dt>
3201 <dd>
3202 <p>
3203         A comma-separated list of components of the repository that
3204         should be hardened via the core.fsyncMethod when created or
3205         modified.  You can disable hardening of any component by
3206         prefixing it with a <em>-</em>.  Items that are not hardened may be
3207         lost in the event of an unclean system shutdown. Unless you
3208         have special requirements, it is recommended that you leave
3209         this option empty or pick one of <code>committed</code>, <code>added</code>,
3210         or <code>all</code>.
3211 </p>
3212 <div class="paragraph"><p>When this configuration is encountered, the set of components starts with
3213 the platform default value, disabled components are removed, and additional
3214 components are added. <code>none</code> resets the state so that the platform default
3215 is ignored.</p></div>
3216 <div class="paragraph"><p>The empty string resets the fsync configuration to the platform
3217 default. The default on most platforms is equivalent to
3218 <code>core.fsync=committed,-loose-object</code>, which has good performance,
3219 but risks losing recent work in the event of an unclean system shutdown.</p></div>
3220 <div class="ulist"><ul>
3221 <li>
3222 <p>
3223 <code>none</code> clears the set of fsynced components.
3224 </p>
3225 </li>
3226 <li>
3227 <p>
3228 <code>loose-object</code> hardens objects added to the repo in loose-object form.
3229 </p>
3230 </li>
3231 <li>
3232 <p>
3233 <code>pack</code> hardens objects added to the repo in packfile form.
3234 </p>
3235 </li>
3236 <li>
3237 <p>
3238 <code>pack-metadata</code> hardens packfile bitmaps and indexes.
3239 </p>
3240 </li>
3241 <li>
3242 <p>
3243 <code>commit-graph</code> hardens the commit-graph file.
3244 </p>
3245 </li>
3246 <li>
3247 <p>
3248 <code>index</code> hardens the index when it is modified.
3249 </p>
3250 </li>
3251 <li>
3252 <p>
3253 <code>objects</code> is an aggregate option that is equivalent to
3254   <code>loose-object,pack</code>.
3255 </p>
3256 </li>
3257 <li>
3258 <p>
3259 <code>reference</code> hardens references modified in the repo.
3260 </p>
3261 </li>
3262 <li>
3263 <p>
3264 <code>derived-metadata</code> is an aggregate option that is equivalent to
3265   <code>pack-metadata,commit-graph</code>.
3266 </p>
3267 </li>
3268 <li>
3269 <p>
3270 <code>committed</code> is an aggregate option that is currently equivalent to
3271   <code>objects</code>. This mode sacrifices some performance to ensure that work
3272   that is committed to the repository with <code>git commit</code> or similar commands
3273   is hardened.
3274 </p>
3275 </li>
3276 <li>
3277 <p>
3278 <code>added</code> is an aggregate option that is currently equivalent to
3279   <code>committed,index</code>. This mode sacrifices additional performance to
3280   ensure that the results of commands like <code>git add</code> and similar operations
3281   are hardened.
3282 </p>
3283 </li>
3284 <li>
3285 <p>
3286 <code>all</code> is an aggregate option that syncs all individual components above.
3287 </p>
3288 </li>
3289 </ul></div>
3290 </dd>
3291 <dt class="hdlist1">
3292 core.fsyncMethod
3293 </dt>
3294 <dd>
3295 <p>
3296         A value indicating the strategy Git will use to harden repository data
3297         using fsync and related primitives.
3298 </p>
3299 <div class="ulist"><ul>
3300 <li>
3301 <p>
3302 <code>fsync</code> uses the fsync() system call or platform equivalents.
3303 </p>
3304 </li>
3305 <li>
3306 <p>
3307 <code>writeout-only</code> issues pagecache writeback requests, but depending on the
3308   filesystem and storage hardware, data added to the repository may not be
3309   durable in the event of a system crash. This is the default mode on macOS.
3310 </p>
3311 </li>
3312 <li>
3313 <p>
3314 <code>batch</code> enables a mode that uses writeout-only flushes to stage multiple
3315   updates in the disk writeback cache and then does a single full fsync of
3316   a dummy file to trigger the disk cache flush at the end of the operation.
3317 </p>
3318 <div class="paragraph"><p>Currently <code>batch</code> mode only applies to loose-object files. Other repository
3319 data is made durable as if <code>fsync</code> was specified. This mode is expected to
3320 be as safe as <code>fsync</code> on macOS for repos stored on HFS+ or APFS filesystems
3321 and on Windows for repos stored on NTFS or ReFS filesystems.</p></div>
3322 </li>
3323 </ul></div>
3324 </dd>
3325 <dt class="hdlist1">
3326 core.fsyncObjectFiles
3327 </dt>
3328 <dd>
3329 <p>
3330         This boolean will enable <em>fsync()</em> when writing object files.
3331         This setting is deprecated. Use core.fsync instead.
3332 </p>
3333 <div class="paragraph"><p>This setting affects data added to the Git repository in loose-object
3334 form. When set to true, Git will issue an fsync or similar system call
3335 to flush caches so that loose-objects remain consistent in the face
3336 of a unclean system shutdown.</p></div>
3337 </dd>
3338 <dt class="hdlist1">
3339 core.preloadIndex
3340 </dt>
3341 <dd>
3342 <p>
3343         Enable parallel index preload for operations like <em>git diff</em>
3344 </p>
3345 <div class="paragraph"><p>This can speed up operations like <em>git diff</em> and <em>git status</em> especially
3346 on filesystems like NFS that have weak caching semantics and thus
3347 relatively high IO latencies.  When enabled, Git will do the
3348 index comparison to the filesystem data in parallel, allowing
3349 overlapping IO&#8217;s.  Defaults to true.</p></div>
3350 </dd>
3351 <dt class="hdlist1">
3352 core.unsetenvvars
3353 </dt>
3354 <dd>
3355 <p>
3356         Windows-only: comma-separated list of environment variables'
3357         names that need to be unset before spawning any other process.
3358         Defaults to <code>PERL5LIB</code> to account for the fact that Git for
3359         Windows insists on using its own Perl interpreter.
3360 </p>
3361 </dd>
3362 <dt class="hdlist1">
3363 core.restrictinheritedhandles
3364 </dt>
3365 <dd>
3366 <p>
3367         Windows-only: override whether spawned processes inherit only standard
3368         file handles (<code>stdin</code>, <code>stdout</code> and <code>stderr</code>) or all handles. Can be
3369         <code>auto</code>, <code>true</code> or <code>false</code>. Defaults to <code>auto</code>, which means <code>true</code> on
3370         Windows 7 and later, and <code>false</code> on older Windows versions.
3371 </p>
3372 </dd>
3373 <dt class="hdlist1">
3374 core.createObject
3375 </dt>
3376 <dd>
3377 <p>
3378         You can set this to <em>link</em>, in which case a hardlink followed by
3379         a delete of the source are used to make sure that object creation
3380         will not overwrite existing objects.
3381 </p>
3382 <div class="paragraph"><p>On some file system/operating system combinations, this is unreliable.
3383 Set this config setting to <em>rename</em> there; However, This will remove the
3384 check that makes sure that existing object files will not get overwritten.</p></div>
3385 </dd>
3386 <dt class="hdlist1">
3387 core.notesRef
3388 </dt>
3389 <dd>
3390 <p>
3391         When showing commit messages, also show notes which are stored in
3392         the given ref.  The ref must be fully qualified.  If the given
3393         ref does not exist, it is not an error but means that no
3394         notes should be printed.
3395 </p>
3396 <div class="paragraph"><p>This setting defaults to "refs/notes/commits", and it can be overridden by
3397 the <code>GIT_NOTES_REF</code> environment variable.  See <a href="git-notes.html">git-notes(1)</a>.</p></div>
3398 </dd>
3399 <dt class="hdlist1">
3400 core.commitGraph
3401 </dt>
3402 <dd>
3403 <p>
3404         If true, then git will read the commit-graph file (if it exists)
3405         to parse the graph structure of commits. Defaults to true. See
3406         <a href="git-commit-graph.html">git-commit-graph(1)</a> for more information.
3407 </p>
3408 </dd>
3409 <dt class="hdlist1">
3410 core.useReplaceRefs
3411 </dt>
3412 <dd>
3413 <p>
3414         If set to <code>false</code>, behave as if the <code>--no-replace-objects</code>
3415         option was given on the command line. See <a href="git.html">git(1)</a> and
3416         <a href="git-replace.html">git-replace(1)</a> for more information.
3417 </p>
3418 </dd>
3419 <dt class="hdlist1">
3420 core.multiPackIndex
3421 </dt>
3422 <dd>
3423 <p>
3424         Use the multi-pack-index file to track multiple packfiles using a
3425         single index. See <a href="git-multi-pack-index.html">git-multi-pack-index(1)</a> for more
3426         information. Defaults to true.
3427 </p>
3428 </dd>
3429 <dt class="hdlist1">
3430 core.sparseCheckout
3431 </dt>
3432 <dd>
3433 <p>
3434         Enable "sparse checkout" feature. See <a href="git-sparse-checkout.html">git-sparse-checkout(1)</a>
3435         for more information.
3436 </p>
3437 </dd>
3438 <dt class="hdlist1">
3439 core.sparseCheckoutCone
3440 </dt>
3441 <dd>
3442 <p>
3443         Enables the "cone mode" of the sparse checkout feature. When the
3444         sparse-checkout file contains a limited set of patterns, this
3445         mode provides significant performance advantages. The "non-cone
3446         mode" can be requested to allow specifying more flexible
3447         patterns by setting this variable to <em>false</em>. See
3448         <a href="git-sparse-checkout.html">git-sparse-checkout(1)</a> for more information.
3449 </p>
3450 </dd>
3451 <dt class="hdlist1">
3452 core.abbrev
3453 </dt>
3454 <dd>
3455 <p>
3456         Set the length object names are abbreviated to.  If
3457         unspecified or set to "auto", an appropriate value is
3458         computed based on the approximate number of packed objects
3459         in your repository, which hopefully is enough for
3460         abbreviated object names to stay unique for some time.
3461         If set to "no", no abbreviation is made and the object names
3462         are shown in their full length.
3463         The minimum length is 4.
3464 </p>
3465 </dd>
3466 <dt class="hdlist1">
3467 core.maxTreeDepth
3468 </dt>
3469 <dd>
3470 <p>
3471         The maximum depth Git is willing to recurse while traversing a
3472         tree (e.g., "a/b/cde/f" has a depth of 4). This is a fail-safe
3473         to allow Git to abort cleanly, and should not generally need to
3474         be adjusted. The default is 4096.
3475 </p>
3476 </dd>
3477 <dt class="hdlist1">
3478 add.ignoreErrors
3479 </dt>
3480 <dt class="hdlist1">
3481 add.ignore-errors (deprecated)
3482 </dt>
3483 <dd>
3484 <p>
3485         Tells <em>git add</em> to continue adding files when some files cannot be
3486         added due to indexing errors. Equivalent to the <code>--ignore-errors</code>
3487         option of <a href="git-add.html">git-add(1)</a>.  <code>add.ignore-errors</code> is deprecated,
3488         as it does not follow the usual naming convention for configuration
3489         variables.
3490 </p>
3491 </dd>
3492 <dt class="hdlist1">
3493 add.interactive.useBuiltin
3494 </dt>
3495 <dd>
3496 <p>
3497         Unused configuration variable. Used in Git versions v2.25.0 to
3498         v2.36.0 to enable the built-in version of <a href="git-add.html">git-add(1)</a>'s
3499         interactive mode, which then became the default in Git
3500         versions v2.37.0 to v2.39.0.
3501 </p>
3502 </dd>
3503 <dt class="hdlist1">
3504 alias.*
3505 </dt>
3506 <dd>
3507 <p>
3508         Command aliases for the <a href="git.html">git(1)</a> command wrapper - e.g.
3509         after defining <code>alias.last = cat-file commit HEAD</code>, the invocation
3510         <code>git last</code> is equivalent to <code>git cat-file commit HEAD</code>. To avoid
3511         confusion and troubles with script usage, aliases that
3512         hide existing Git commands are ignored. Arguments are split by
3513         spaces, the usual shell quoting and escaping are supported.
3514         A quote pair or a backslash can be used to quote them.
3515 </p>
3516 <div class="paragraph"><p>Note that the first word of an alias does not necessarily have to be a
3517 command. It can be a command-line option that will be passed into the
3518 invocation of <code>git</code>. In particular, this is useful when used with <code>-c</code>
3519 to pass in one-time configurations or <code>-p</code> to force pagination. For example,
3520 <code>loud-rebase = -c commit.verbose=true rebase</code> can be defined such that
3521 running <code>git loud-rebase</code> would be equivalent to
3522 <code>git -c commit.verbose=true rebase</code>. Also, <code>ps = -p status</code> would be a
3523 helpful alias since <code>git ps</code> would paginate the output of <code>git status</code>
3524 where the original command does not.</p></div>
3525 <div class="paragraph"><p>If the alias expansion is prefixed with an exclamation point,
3526 it will be treated as a shell command.  For example, defining
3527 <code>alias.new = !gitk --all --not ORIG_HEAD</code>, the invocation
3528 <code>git new</code> is equivalent to running the shell command
3529 <code>gitk --all --not ORIG_HEAD</code>.  Note that shell commands will be
3530 executed from the top-level directory of a repository, which may
3531 not necessarily be the current directory.
3532 <code>GIT_PREFIX</code> is set as returned by running <code>git rev-parse --show-prefix</code>
3533 from the original current directory. See <a href="git-rev-parse.html">git-rev-parse(1)</a>.</p></div>
3534 </dd>
3535 <dt class="hdlist1">
3536 am.keepcr
3537 </dt>
3538 <dd>
3539 <p>
3540         If true, git-am will call git-mailsplit for patches in mbox format
3541         with parameter <code>--keep-cr</code>. In this case git-mailsplit will
3542         not remove <code>\r</code> from lines ending with <code>\r\n</code>. Can be overridden
3543         by giving <code>--no-keep-cr</code> from the command line.
3544         See <a href="git-am.html">git-am(1)</a>, <a href="git-mailsplit.html">git-mailsplit(1)</a>.
3545 </p>
3546 </dd>
3547 <dt class="hdlist1">
3548 am.threeWay
3549 </dt>
3550 <dd>
3551 <p>
3552         By default, <code>git am</code> will fail if the patch does not apply cleanly. When
3553         set to true, this setting tells <code>git am</code> to fall back on 3-way merge if
3554         the patch records the identity of blobs it is supposed to apply to and
3555         we have those blobs available locally (equivalent to giving the <code>--3way</code>
3556         option from the command line). Defaults to <code>false</code>.
3557         See <a href="git-am.html">git-am(1)</a>.
3558 </p>
3559 </dd>
3560 <dt class="hdlist1">
3561 apply.ignoreWhitespace
3562 </dt>
3563 <dd>
3564 <p>
3565         When set to <em>change</em>, tells <em>git apply</em> to ignore changes in
3566         whitespace, in the same way as the <code>--ignore-space-change</code>
3567         option.
3568         When set to one of: no, none, never, false, it tells <em>git apply</em> to
3569         respect all whitespace differences.
3570         See <a href="git-apply.html">git-apply(1)</a>.
3571 </p>
3572 </dd>
3573 <dt class="hdlist1">
3574 apply.whitespace
3575 </dt>
3576 <dd>
3577 <p>
3578         Tells <em>git apply</em> how to handle whitespace, in the same way
3579         as the <code>--whitespace</code> option. See <a href="git-apply.html">git-apply(1)</a>.
3580 </p>
3581 </dd>
3582 <dt class="hdlist1">
3583 blame.blankBoundary
3584 </dt>
3585 <dd>
3586 <p>
3587         Show blank commit object name for boundary commits in
3588         <a href="git-blame.html">git-blame(1)</a>. This option defaults to false.
3589 </p>
3590 </dd>
3591 <dt class="hdlist1">
3592 blame.coloring
3593 </dt>
3594 <dd>
3595 <p>
3596         This determines the coloring scheme to be applied to blame
3597         output. It can be <em>repeatedLines</em>, <em>highlightRecent</em>,
3598         or <em>none</em> which is the default.
3599 </p>
3600 </dd>
3601 <dt class="hdlist1">
3602 blame.date
3603 </dt>
3604 <dd>
3605 <p>
3606         Specifies the format used to output dates in <a href="git-blame.html">git-blame(1)</a>.
3607         If unset the iso format is used. For supported values,
3608         see the discussion of the <code>--date</code> option at <a href="git-log.html">git-log(1)</a>.
3609 </p>
3610 </dd>
3611 <dt class="hdlist1">
3612 blame.showEmail
3613 </dt>
3614 <dd>
3615 <p>
3616         Show the author email instead of author name in <a href="git-blame.html">git-blame(1)</a>.
3617         This option defaults to false.
3618 </p>
3619 </dd>
3620 <dt class="hdlist1">
3621 blame.showRoot
3622 </dt>
3623 <dd>
3624 <p>
3625         Do not treat root commits as boundaries in <a href="git-blame.html">git-blame(1)</a>.
3626         This option defaults to false.
3627 </p>
3628 </dd>
3629 <dt class="hdlist1">
3630 blame.ignoreRevsFile
3631 </dt>
3632 <dd>
3633 <p>
3634         Ignore revisions listed in the file, one unabbreviated object name per
3635         line, in <a href="git-blame.html">git-blame(1)</a>.  Whitespace and comments beginning with
3636         <code>#</code> are ignored.  This option may be repeated multiple times.  Empty
3637         file names will reset the list of ignored revisions.  This option will
3638         be handled before the command line option <code>--ignore-revs-file</code>.
3639 </p>
3640 </dd>
3641 <dt class="hdlist1">
3642 blame.markUnblamableLines
3643 </dt>
3644 <dd>
3645 <p>
3646         Mark lines that were changed by an ignored revision that we could not
3647         attribute to another commit with a <em>*</em> in the output of
3648         <a href="git-blame.html">git-blame(1)</a>.
3649 </p>
3650 </dd>
3651 <dt class="hdlist1">
3652 blame.markIgnoredLines
3653 </dt>
3654 <dd>
3655 <p>
3656         Mark lines that were changed by an ignored revision that we attributed to
3657         another commit with a <em>?</em> in the output of <a href="git-blame.html">git-blame(1)</a>.
3658 </p>
3659 </dd>
3660 <dt class="hdlist1">
3661 branch.autoSetupMerge
3662 </dt>
3663 <dd>
3664 <p>
3665         Tells <em>git branch</em>, <em>git switch</em> and <em>git checkout</em> to set up new branches
3666         so that <a href="git-pull.html">git-pull(1)</a> will appropriately merge from the
3667         starting point branch. Note that even if this option is not set,
3668         this behavior can be chosen per-branch using the <code>--track</code>
3669         and <code>--no-track</code> options. The valid settings are: <code>false</code>&#8201;&#8212;&#8201;no
3670         automatic setup is done; <code>true</code>&#8201;&#8212;&#8201;automatic setup is done when the
3671         starting point is a remote-tracking branch; <code>always</code>&#8201;&#8212;&#8201;        automatic setup is done when the starting point is either a
3672         local branch or remote-tracking branch; <code>inherit</code>&#8201;&#8212;&#8201;if the starting point
3673         has a tracking configuration, it is copied to the new
3674         branch; <code>simple</code>&#8201;&#8212;&#8201;automatic setup is done only when the starting point
3675         is a remote-tracking branch and the new branch has the same name as the
3676         remote branch. This option defaults to true.
3677 </p>
3678 </dd>
3679 <dt class="hdlist1">
3680 branch.autoSetupRebase
3681 </dt>
3682 <dd>
3683 <p>
3684         When a new branch is created with <em>git branch</em>, <em>git switch</em> or <em>git checkout</em>
3685         that tracks another branch, this variable tells Git to set
3686         up pull to rebase instead of merge (see "branch.&lt;name&gt;.rebase").
3687         When <code>never</code>, rebase is never automatically set to true.
3688         When <code>local</code>, rebase is set to true for tracked branches of
3689         other local branches.
3690         When <code>remote</code>, rebase is set to true for tracked branches of
3691         remote-tracking branches.
3692         When <code>always</code>, rebase will be set to true for all tracking
3693         branches.
3694         See "branch.autoSetupMerge" for details on how to set up a
3695         branch to track another branch.
3696         This option defaults to never.
3697 </p>
3698 </dd>
3699 <dt class="hdlist1">
3700 branch.sort
3701 </dt>
3702 <dd>
3703 <p>
3704         This variable controls the sort ordering of branches when displayed by
3705         <a href="git-branch.html">git-branch(1)</a>. Without the "--sort=&lt;value&gt;" option provided, the
3706         value of this variable will be used as the default.
3707         See <a href="git-for-each-ref.html">git-for-each-ref(1)</a> field names for valid values.
3708 </p>
3709 </dd>
3710 <dt class="hdlist1">
3711 branch.&lt;name&gt;.remote
3712 </dt>
3713 <dd>
3714 <p>
3715         When on branch &lt;name&gt;, it tells <em>git fetch</em> and <em>git push</em>
3716         which remote to fetch from or push to.  The remote to push to
3717         may be overridden with <code>remote.pushDefault</code> (for all branches).
3718         The remote to push to, for the current branch, may be further
3719         overridden by <code>branch.&lt;name&gt;.pushRemote</code>.  If no remote is
3720         configured, or if you are not on any branch and there is more than
3721         one remote defined in the repository, it defaults to <code>origin</code> for
3722         fetching and <code>remote.pushDefault</code> for pushing.
3723         Additionally, <code>.</code> (a period) is the current local repository
3724         (a dot-repository), see <code>branch.&lt;name&gt;.merge</code>'s final note below.
3725 </p>
3726 </dd>
3727 <dt class="hdlist1">
3728 branch.&lt;name&gt;.pushRemote
3729 </dt>
3730 <dd>
3731 <p>
3732         When on branch &lt;name&gt;, it overrides <code>branch.&lt;name&gt;.remote</code> for
3733         pushing.  It also overrides <code>remote.pushDefault</code> for pushing
3734         from branch &lt;name&gt;.  When you pull from one place (e.g. your
3735         upstream) and push to another place (e.g. your own publishing
3736         repository), you would want to set <code>remote.pushDefault</code> to
3737         specify the remote to push to for all branches, and use this
3738         option to override it for a specific branch.
3739 </p>
3740 </dd>
3741 <dt class="hdlist1">
3742 branch.&lt;name&gt;.merge
3743 </dt>
3744 <dd>
3745 <p>
3746         Defines, together with branch.&lt;name&gt;.remote, the upstream branch
3747         for the given branch. It tells <em>git fetch</em>/<em>git pull</em>/<em>git rebase</em> which
3748         branch to merge and can also affect <em>git push</em> (see push.default).
3749         When in branch &lt;name&gt;, it tells <em>git fetch</em> the default
3750         refspec to be marked for merging in FETCH_HEAD. The value is
3751         handled like the remote part of a refspec, and must match a
3752         ref which is fetched from the remote given by
3753         "branch.&lt;name&gt;.remote".
3754         The merge information is used by <em>git pull</em> (which first calls
3755         <em>git fetch</em>) to lookup the default branch for merging. Without
3756         this option, <em>git pull</em> defaults to merge the first refspec fetched.
3757         Specify multiple values to get an octopus merge.
3758         If you wish to setup <em>git pull</em> so that it merges into &lt;name&gt; from
3759         another branch in the local repository, you can point
3760         branch.&lt;name&gt;.merge to the desired branch, and use the relative path
3761         setting <code>.</code> (a period) for branch.&lt;name&gt;.remote.
3762 </p>
3763 </dd>
3764 <dt class="hdlist1">
3765 branch.&lt;name&gt;.mergeOptions
3766 </dt>
3767 <dd>
3768 <p>
3769         Sets default options for merging into branch &lt;name&gt;. The syntax and
3770         supported options are the same as those of <a href="git-merge.html">git-merge(1)</a>, but
3771         option values containing whitespace characters are currently not
3772         supported.
3773 </p>
3774 </dd>
3775 <dt class="hdlist1">
3776 branch.&lt;name&gt;.rebase
3777 </dt>
3778 <dd>
3779 <p>
3780         When true, rebase the branch &lt;name&gt; on top of the fetched branch,
3781         instead of merging the default branch from the default remote when
3782         "git pull" is run. See "pull.rebase" for doing this in a non
3783         branch-specific manner.
3784 </p>
3785 <div class="paragraph"><p>When <code>merges</code> (or just <em>m</em>), pass the <code>--rebase-merges</code> option to <em>git rebase</em>
3786 so that the local merge commits are included in the rebase (see
3787 <a href="git-rebase.html">git-rebase(1)</a> for details).</p></div>
3788 <div class="paragraph"><p>When the value is <code>interactive</code> (or just <em>i</em>), the rebase is run in interactive
3789 mode.</p></div>
3790 <div class="paragraph"><p><strong>NOTE</strong>: this is a possibly dangerous operation; do <strong>not</strong> use
3791 it unless you understand the implications (see <a href="git-rebase.html">git-rebase(1)</a>
3792 for details).</p></div>
3793 </dd>
3794 <dt class="hdlist1">
3795 branch.&lt;name&gt;.description
3796 </dt>
3797 <dd>
3798 <p>
3799         Branch description, can be edited with
3800         <code>git branch --edit-description</code>. Branch description is
3801         automatically added to the format-patch cover letter or
3802         request-pull summary.
3803 </p>
3804 </dd>
3805 <dt class="hdlist1">
3806 browser.&lt;tool&gt;.cmd
3807 </dt>
3808 <dd>
3809 <p>
3810         Specify the command to invoke the specified browser. The
3811         specified command is evaluated in shell with the URLs passed
3812         as arguments. (See <a href="git-web&#45;&#45;browse.html">git-web&#45;&#45;browse(1)</a>.)
3813 </p>
3814 </dd>
3815 <dt class="hdlist1">
3816 browser.&lt;tool&gt;.path
3817 </dt>
3818 <dd>
3819 <p>
3820         Override the path for the given tool that may be used to
3821         browse HTML help (see <code>-w</code> option in <a href="git-help.html">git-help(1)</a>) or a
3822         working repository in gitweb (see <a href="git-instaweb.html">git-instaweb(1)</a>).
3823 </p>
3824 </dd>
3825 <dt class="hdlist1">
3826 bundle.*
3827 </dt>
3828 <dd>
3829 <p>
3830         The <code>bundle.*</code> keys may appear in a bundle list file found via the
3831         <code>git clone --bundle-uri</code> option. These keys currently have no effect
3832         if placed in a repository config file, though this will change in the
3833         future. See <a href="technical/bundle-uri.html">the bundle URI design
3834         document</a> for more details.
3835 </p>
3836 </dd>
3837 <dt class="hdlist1">
3838 bundle.version
3839 </dt>
3840 <dd>
3841 <p>
3842         This integer value advertises the version of the bundle list format
3843         used by the bundle list. Currently, the only accepted value is <code>1</code>.
3844 </p>
3845 </dd>
3846 <dt class="hdlist1">
3847 bundle.mode
3848 </dt>
3849 <dd>
3850 <p>
3851         This string value should be either <code>all</code> or <code>any</code>. This value describes
3852         whether all of the advertised bundles are required to unbundle a
3853         complete understanding of the bundled information (<code>all</code>) or if any one
3854         of the listed bundle URIs is sufficient (<code>any</code>).
3855 </p>
3856 </dd>
3857 <dt class="hdlist1">
3858 bundle.heuristic
3859 </dt>
3860 <dd>
3861 <p>
3862         If this string-valued key exists, then the bundle list is designed to
3863         work well with incremental <code>git fetch</code> commands. The heuristic signals
3864         that there are additional keys available for each bundle that help
3865         determine which subset of bundles the client should download. The
3866         only value currently understood is <code>creationToken</code>.
3867 </p>
3868 </dd>
3869 <dt class="hdlist1">
3870 bundle.&lt;id&gt;.*
3871 </dt>
3872 <dd>
3873 <p>
3874         The <code>bundle.&lt;id&gt;.*</code> keys are used to describe a single item in the
3875         bundle list, grouped under <code>&lt;id&gt;</code> for identification purposes.
3876 </p>
3877 </dd>
3878 <dt class="hdlist1">
3879 bundle.&lt;id&gt;.uri
3880 </dt>
3881 <dd>
3882 <p>
3883         This string value defines the URI by which Git can reach the contents
3884         of this <code>&lt;id&gt;</code>. This URI may be a bundle file or another bundle list.
3885 </p>
3886 </dd>
3887 <dt class="hdlist1">
3888 checkout.defaultRemote
3889 </dt>
3890 <dd>
3891 <p>
3892         When you run <code>git checkout &lt;something&gt;</code>
3893         or <code>git switch &lt;something&gt;</code> and only have one
3894         remote, it may implicitly fall back on checking out and
3895         tracking e.g. <code>origin/&lt;something&gt;</code>. This stops working as soon
3896         as you have more than one remote with a <code>&lt;something&gt;</code>
3897         reference. This setting allows for setting the name of a
3898         preferred remote that should always win when it comes to
3899         disambiguation. The typical use-case is to set this to
3900         <code>origin</code>.
3901 </p>
3902 <div class="paragraph"><p>Currently this is used by <a href="git-switch.html">git-switch(1)</a> and
3903 <a href="git-checkout.html">git-checkout(1)</a> when <code>git checkout &lt;something&gt;</code>
3904 or <code>git switch &lt;something&gt;</code>
3905 will checkout the <code>&lt;something&gt;</code> branch on another remote,
3906 and by <a href="git-worktree.html">git-worktree(1)</a> when <code>git worktree add</code> refers to a
3907 remote branch. This setting might be used for other checkout-like
3908 commands or functionality in the future.</p></div>
3909 </dd>
3910 <dt class="hdlist1">
3911 checkout.guess
3912 </dt>
3913 <dd>
3914 <p>
3915         Provides the default value for the <code>--guess</code> or <code>--no-guess</code>
3916         option in <code>git checkout</code> and <code>git switch</code>. See
3917         <a href="git-switch.html">git-switch(1)</a> and <a href="git-checkout.html">git-checkout(1)</a>.
3918 </p>
3919 </dd>
3920 <dt class="hdlist1">
3921 checkout.workers
3922 </dt>
3923 <dd>
3924 <p>
3925         The number of parallel workers to use when updating the working tree.
3926         The default is one, i.e. sequential execution. If set to a value less
3927         than one, Git will use as many workers as the number of logical cores
3928         available. This setting and <code>checkout.thresholdForParallelism</code> affect
3929         all commands that perform checkout. E.g. checkout, clone, reset,
3930         sparse-checkout, etc.
3931 </p>
3932 <div class="paragraph"><p>Note: Parallel checkout usually delivers better performance for repositories
3933 located on SSDs or over NFS. For repositories on spinning disks and/or machines
3934 with a small number of cores, the default sequential checkout often performs
3935 better. The size and compression level of a repository might also influence how
3936 well the parallel version performs.</p></div>
3937 </dd>
3938 <dt class="hdlist1">
3939 checkout.thresholdForParallelism
3940 </dt>
3941 <dd>
3942 <p>
3943         When running parallel checkout with a small number of files, the cost
3944         of subprocess spawning and inter-process communication might outweigh
3945         the parallelization gains. This setting allows you to define the minimum
3946         number of files for which parallel checkout should be attempted. The
3947         default is 100.
3948 </p>
3949 </dd>
3950 <dt class="hdlist1">
3951 clean.requireForce
3952 </dt>
3953 <dd>
3954 <p>
3955         A boolean to make git-clean do nothing unless given -f,
3956         -i, or -n.  Defaults to true.
3957 </p>
3958 </dd>
3959 <dt class="hdlist1">
3960 clone.defaultRemoteName
3961 </dt>
3962 <dd>
3963 <p>
3964         The name of the remote to create when cloning a repository.  Defaults to
3965         <code>origin</code>, and can be overridden by passing the <code>--origin</code> command-line
3966         option to <a href="git-clone.html">git-clone(1)</a>.
3967 </p>
3968 </dd>
3969 <dt class="hdlist1">
3970 clone.rejectShallow
3971 </dt>
3972 <dd>
3973 <p>
3974         Reject cloning a repository if it is a shallow one; this can be overridden by
3975         passing the <code>--reject-shallow</code> option on the command line. See <a href="git-clone.html">git-clone(1)</a>
3976 </p>
3977 </dd>
3978 <dt class="hdlist1">
3979 clone.filterSubmodules
3980 </dt>
3981 <dd>
3982 <p>
3983         If a partial clone filter is provided (see <code>--filter</code> in
3984         <a href="git-rev-list.html">git-rev-list(1)</a>) and <code>--recurse-submodules</code> is used, also apply
3985         the filter to submodules.
3986 </p>
3987 </dd>
3988 <dt class="hdlist1">
3989 color.advice
3990 </dt>
3991 <dd>
3992 <p>
3993         A boolean to enable/disable color in hints (e.g. when a push
3994         failed, see <code>advice.*</code> for a list).  May be set to <code>always</code>,
3995         <code>false</code> (or <code>never</code>) or <code>auto</code> (or <code>true</code>), in which case colors
3996         are used only when the error output goes to a terminal. If
3997         unset, then the value of <code>color.ui</code> is used (<code>auto</code> by default).
3998 </p>
3999 </dd>
4000 <dt class="hdlist1">
4001 color.advice.hint
4002 </dt>
4003 <dd>
4004 <p>
4005         Use customized color for hints.
4006 </p>
4007 </dd>
4008 <dt class="hdlist1">
4009 color.blame.highlightRecent
4010 </dt>
4011 <dd>
4012 <p>
4013         Specify the line annotation color for <code>git blame --color-by-age</code>
4014         depending upon the age of the line.
4015 </p>
4016 <div class="paragraph"><p>This setting should be set to a comma-separated list of color and
4017 date settings, starting and ending with a color, the dates should be
4018 set from oldest to newest. The metadata will be colored with the
4019 specified colors if the line was introduced before the given
4020 timestamp, overwriting older timestamped colors.</p></div>
4021 <div class="paragraph"><p>Instead of an absolute timestamp relative timestamps work as well,
4022 e.g. <code>2.weeks.ago</code> is valid to address anything older than 2 weeks.</p></div>
4023 <div class="paragraph"><p>It defaults to <code>blue,12 month ago,white,1 month ago,red</code>, which
4024 colors everything older than one year blue, recent changes between
4025 one month and one year old are kept white, and lines introduced
4026 within the last month are colored red.</p></div>
4027 </dd>
4028 <dt class="hdlist1">
4029 color.blame.repeatedLines
4030 </dt>
4031 <dd>
4032 <p>
4033         Use the specified color to colorize line annotations for
4034         <code>git blame --color-lines</code>, if they come from the same commit as the
4035         preceding line. Defaults to cyan.
4036 </p>
4037 </dd>
4038 <dt class="hdlist1">
4039 color.branch
4040 </dt>
4041 <dd>
4042 <p>
4043         A boolean to enable/disable color in the output of
4044         <a href="git-branch.html">git-branch(1)</a>. May be set to <code>always</code>,
4045         <code>false</code> (or <code>never</code>) or <code>auto</code> (or <code>true</code>), in which case colors are used
4046         only when the output is to a terminal. If unset, then the
4047         value of <code>color.ui</code> is used (<code>auto</code> by default).
4048 </p>
4049 </dd>
4050 <dt class="hdlist1">
4051 color.branch.&lt;slot&gt;
4052 </dt>
4053 <dd>
4054 <p>
4055         Use customized color for branch coloration. <code>&lt;slot&gt;</code> is one of
4056         <code>current</code> (the current branch), <code>local</code> (a local branch),
4057         <code>remote</code> (a remote-tracking branch in refs/remotes/),
4058         <code>upstream</code> (upstream tracking branch), <code>plain</code> (other
4059         refs).
4060 </p>
4061 </dd>
4062 <dt class="hdlist1">
4063 color.diff
4064 </dt>
4065 <dd>
4066 <p>
4067         Whether to use ANSI escape sequences to add color to patches.
4068         If this is set to <code>always</code>, <a href="git-diff.html">git-diff(1)</a>,
4069         <a href="git-log.html">git-log(1)</a>, and <a href="git-show.html">git-show(1)</a> will use color
4070         for all patches.  If it is set to <code>true</code> or <code>auto</code>, those
4071         commands will only use color when output is to the terminal.
4072         If unset, then the value of <code>color.ui</code> is used (<code>auto</code> by
4073         default).
4074 </p>
4075 <div class="paragraph"><p>This does not affect <a href="git-format-patch.html">git-format-patch(1)</a> or the
4076 <em>git-diff-&#42;</em> plumbing commands.  Can be overridden on the
4077 command line with the <code>--color[=&lt;when&gt;]</code> option.</p></div>
4078 </dd>
4079 <dt class="hdlist1">
4080 color.diff.&lt;slot&gt;
4081 </dt>
4082 <dd>
4083 <p>
4084         Use customized color for diff colorization.  <code>&lt;slot&gt;</code> specifies
4085         which part of the patch to use the specified color, and is one
4086         of <code>context</code> (context text - <code>plain</code> is a historical synonym),
4087         <code>meta</code> (metainformation), <code>frag</code>
4088         (hunk header), <em>func</em> (function in hunk header), <code>old</code> (removed lines),
4089         <code>new</code> (added lines), <code>commit</code> (commit headers), <code>whitespace</code>
4090         (highlighting whitespace errors), <code>oldMoved</code> (deleted lines),
4091         <code>newMoved</code> (added lines), <code>oldMovedDimmed</code>, <code>oldMovedAlternative</code>,
4092         <code>oldMovedAlternativeDimmed</code>, <code>newMovedDimmed</code>, <code>newMovedAlternative</code>
4093         <code>newMovedAlternativeDimmed</code> (See the <em>&lt;mode&gt;</em>
4094         setting of <em>--color-moved</em> in <a href="git-diff.html">git-diff(1)</a> for details),
4095         <code>contextDimmed</code>, <code>oldDimmed</code>, <code>newDimmed</code>, <code>contextBold</code>,
4096         <code>oldBold</code>, and <code>newBold</code> (see <a href="git-range-diff.html">git-range-diff(1)</a> for details).
4097 </p>
4098 </dd>
4099 <dt class="hdlist1">
4100 color.decorate.&lt;slot&gt;
4101 </dt>
4102 <dd>
4103 <p>
4104         Use customized color for <em>git log --decorate</em> output.  <code>&lt;slot&gt;</code> is one
4105         of <code>branch</code>, <code>remoteBranch</code>, <code>tag</code>, <code>stash</code> or <code>HEAD</code> for local
4106         branches, remote-tracking branches, tags, stash and HEAD, respectively
4107         and <code>grafted</code> for grafted commits.
4108 </p>
4109 </dd>
4110 <dt class="hdlist1">
4111 color.grep
4112 </dt>
4113 <dd>
4114 <p>
4115         When set to <code>always</code>, always highlight matches.  When <code>false</code> (or
4116         <code>never</code>), never.  When set to <code>true</code> or <code>auto</code>, use color only
4117         when the output is written to the terminal.  If unset, then the
4118         value of <code>color.ui</code> is used (<code>auto</code> by default).
4119 </p>
4120 </dd>
4121 <dt class="hdlist1">
4122 color.grep.&lt;slot&gt;
4123 </dt>
4124 <dd>
4125 <p>
4126         Use customized color for grep colorization.  <code>&lt;slot&gt;</code> specifies which
4127         part of the line to use the specified color, and is one of
4128 </p>
4129 <div class="openblock">
4130 <div class="content">
4131 <div class="dlist"><dl>
4132 <dt class="hdlist1">
4133 <code>context</code>
4134 </dt>
4135 <dd>
4136 <p>
4137         non-matching text in context lines (when using <code>-A</code>, <code>-B</code>, or <code>-C</code>)
4138 </p>
4139 </dd>
4140 <dt class="hdlist1">
4141 <code>filename</code>
4142 </dt>
4143 <dd>
4144 <p>
4145         filename prefix (when not using <code>-h</code>)
4146 </p>
4147 </dd>
4148 <dt class="hdlist1">
4149 <code>function</code>
4150 </dt>
4151 <dd>
4152 <p>
4153         function name lines (when using <code>-p</code>)
4154 </p>
4155 </dd>
4156 <dt class="hdlist1">
4157 <code>lineNumber</code>
4158 </dt>
4159 <dd>
4160 <p>
4161         line number prefix (when using <code>-n</code>)
4162 </p>
4163 </dd>
4164 <dt class="hdlist1">
4165 <code>column</code>
4166 </dt>
4167 <dd>
4168 <p>
4169         column number prefix (when using <code>--column</code>)
4170 </p>
4171 </dd>
4172 <dt class="hdlist1">
4173 <code>match</code>
4174 </dt>
4175 <dd>
4176 <p>
4177         matching text (same as setting <code>matchContext</code> and <code>matchSelected</code>)
4178 </p>
4179 </dd>
4180 <dt class="hdlist1">
4181 <code>matchContext</code>
4182 </dt>
4183 <dd>
4184 <p>
4185         matching text in context lines
4186 </p>
4187 </dd>
4188 <dt class="hdlist1">
4189 <code>matchSelected</code>
4190 </dt>
4191 <dd>
4192 <p>
4193         matching text in selected lines. Also, used to customize the following
4194         <a href="git-log.html">git-log(1)</a> subcommands: <code>--grep</code>, <code>--author</code>, and <code>--committer</code>.
4195 </p>
4196 </dd>
4197 <dt class="hdlist1">
4198 <code>selected</code>
4199 </dt>
4200 <dd>
4201 <p>
4202         non-matching text in selected lines. Also, used to customize the
4203         following <a href="git-log.html">git-log(1)</a> subcommands: <code>--grep</code>, <code>--author</code> and
4204         <code>--committer</code>.
4205 </p>
4206 </dd>
4207 <dt class="hdlist1">
4208 <code>separator</code>
4209 </dt>
4210 <dd>
4211 <p>
4212         separators between fields on a line (<code>:</code>, <code>-</code>, and <code>=</code>)
4213         and between hunks (<code>--</code>)
4214 </p>
4215 </dd>
4216 </dl></div>
4217 </div></div>
4218 </dd>
4219 <dt class="hdlist1">
4220 color.interactive
4221 </dt>
4222 <dd>
4223 <p>
4224         When set to <code>always</code>, always use colors for interactive prompts
4225         and displays (such as those used by "git-add --interactive" and
4226         "git-clean --interactive"). When false (or <code>never</code>), never.
4227         When set to <code>true</code> or <code>auto</code>, use colors only when the output is
4228         to the terminal. If unset, then the value of <code>color.ui</code> is
4229         used (<code>auto</code> by default).
4230 </p>
4231 </dd>
4232 <dt class="hdlist1">
4233 color.interactive.&lt;slot&gt;
4234 </dt>
4235 <dd>
4236 <p>
4237         Use customized color for <em>git add --interactive</em> and <em>git clean
4238         --interactive</em> output. <code>&lt;slot&gt;</code> may be <code>prompt</code>, <code>header</code>, <code>help</code>
4239         or <code>error</code>, for four distinct types of normal output from
4240         interactive commands.
4241 </p>
4242 </dd>
4243 <dt class="hdlist1">
4244 color.pager
4245 </dt>
4246 <dd>
4247 <p>
4248         A boolean to specify whether <code>auto</code> color modes should colorize
4249         output going to the pager. Defaults to true; set this to false
4250         if your pager does not understand ANSI color codes.
4251 </p>
4252 </dd>
4253 <dt class="hdlist1">
4254 color.push
4255 </dt>
4256 <dd>
4257 <p>
4258         A boolean to enable/disable color in push errors. May be set to
4259         <code>always</code>, <code>false</code> (or <code>never</code>) or <code>auto</code> (or <code>true</code>), in which
4260         case colors are used only when the error output goes to a terminal.
4261         If unset, then the value of <code>color.ui</code> is used (<code>auto</code> by default).
4262 </p>
4263 </dd>
4264 <dt class="hdlist1">
4265 color.push.error
4266 </dt>
4267 <dd>
4268 <p>
4269         Use customized color for push errors.
4270 </p>
4271 </dd>
4272 <dt class="hdlist1">
4273 color.remote
4274 </dt>
4275 <dd>
4276 <p>
4277         If set, keywords at the start of the line are highlighted. The
4278         keywords are "error", "warning", "hint" and "success", and are
4279         matched case-insensitively. May be set to <code>always</code>, <code>false</code> (or
4280         <code>never</code>) or <code>auto</code> (or <code>true</code>). If unset, then the value of
4281         <code>color.ui</code> is used (<code>auto</code> by default).
4282 </p>
4283 </dd>
4284 <dt class="hdlist1">
4285 color.remote.&lt;slot&gt;
4286 </dt>
4287 <dd>
4288 <p>
4289         Use customized color for each remote keyword. <code>&lt;slot&gt;</code> may be
4290         <code>hint</code>, <code>warning</code>, <code>success</code> or <code>error</code> which match the
4291         corresponding keyword.
4292 </p>
4293 </dd>
4294 <dt class="hdlist1">
4295 color.showBranch
4296 </dt>
4297 <dd>
4298 <p>
4299         A boolean to enable/disable color in the output of
4300         <a href="git-show-branch.html">git-show-branch(1)</a>. May be set to <code>always</code>,
4301         <code>false</code> (or <code>never</code>) or <code>auto</code> (or <code>true</code>), in which case colors are used
4302         only when the output is to a terminal. If unset, then the
4303         value of <code>color.ui</code> is used (<code>auto</code> by default).
4304 </p>
4305 </dd>
4306 <dt class="hdlist1">
4307 color.status
4308 </dt>
4309 <dd>
4310 <p>
4311         A boolean to enable/disable color in the output of
4312         <a href="git-status.html">git-status(1)</a>. May be set to <code>always</code>,
4313         <code>false</code> (or <code>never</code>) or <code>auto</code> (or <code>true</code>), in which case colors are used
4314         only when the output is to a terminal. If unset, then the
4315         value of <code>color.ui</code> is used (<code>auto</code> by default).
4316 </p>
4317 </dd>
4318 <dt class="hdlist1">
4319 color.status.&lt;slot&gt;
4320 </dt>
4321 <dd>
4322 <p>
4323         Use customized color for status colorization. <code>&lt;slot&gt;</code> is
4324         one of <code>header</code> (the header text of the status message),
4325         <code>added</code> or <code>updated</code> (files which are added but not committed),
4326         <code>changed</code> (files which are changed but not added in the index),
4327         <code>untracked</code> (files which are not tracked by Git),
4328         <code>branch</code> (the current branch),
4329         <code>nobranch</code> (the color the <em>no branch</em> warning is shown in, defaulting
4330         to red),
4331         <code>localBranch</code> or <code>remoteBranch</code> (the local and remote branch names,
4332         respectively, when branch and tracking information is displayed in the
4333         status short-format), or
4334         <code>unmerged</code> (files which have unmerged changes).
4335 </p>
4336 </dd>
4337 <dt class="hdlist1">
4338 color.transport
4339 </dt>
4340 <dd>
4341 <p>
4342         A boolean to enable/disable color when pushes are rejected. May be
4343         set to <code>always</code>, <code>false</code> (or <code>never</code>) or <code>auto</code> (or <code>true</code>), in which
4344         case colors are used only when the error output goes to a terminal.
4345         If unset, then the value of <code>color.ui</code> is used (<code>auto</code> by default).
4346 </p>
4347 </dd>
4348 <dt class="hdlist1">
4349 color.transport.rejected
4350 </dt>
4351 <dd>
4352 <p>
4353         Use customized color when a push was rejected.
4354 </p>
4355 </dd>
4356 <dt class="hdlist1">
4357 color.ui
4358 </dt>
4359 <dd>
4360 <p>
4361         This variable determines the default value for variables such
4362         as <code>color.diff</code> and <code>color.grep</code> that control the use of color
4363         per command family. Its scope will expand as more commands learn
4364         configuration to set a default for the <code>--color</code> option.  Set it
4365         to <code>false</code> or <code>never</code> if you prefer Git commands not to use
4366         color unless enabled explicitly with some other configuration
4367         or the <code>--color</code> option. Set it to <code>always</code> if you want all
4368         output not intended for machine consumption to use color, to
4369         <code>true</code> or <code>auto</code> (this is the default since Git 1.8.4) if you
4370         want such output to use color when written to the terminal.
4371 </p>
4372 </dd>
4373 <dt class="hdlist1">
4374 column.ui
4375 </dt>
4376 <dd>
4377 <p>
4378         Specify whether supported commands should output in columns.
4379         This variable consists of a list of tokens separated by spaces
4380         or commas:
4381 </p>
4382 <div class="paragraph"><p>These options control when the feature should be enabled
4383 (defaults to <em>never</em>):</p></div>
4384 <div class="openblock">
4385 <div class="content">
4386 <div class="dlist"><dl>
4387 <dt class="hdlist1">
4388 <code>always</code>
4389 </dt>
4390 <dd>
4391 <p>
4392         always show in columns
4393 </p>
4394 </dd>
4395 <dt class="hdlist1">
4396 <code>never</code>
4397 </dt>
4398 <dd>
4399 <p>
4400         never show in columns
4401 </p>
4402 </dd>
4403 <dt class="hdlist1">
4404 <code>auto</code>
4405 </dt>
4406 <dd>
4407 <p>
4408         show in columns if the output is to the terminal
4409 </p>
4410 </dd>
4411 </dl></div>
4412 </div></div>
4413 <div class="paragraph"><p>These options control layout (defaults to <em>column</em>).  Setting any
4414 of these implies <em>always</em> if none of <em>always</em>, <em>never</em>, or <em>auto</em> are
4415 specified.</p></div>
4416 <div class="openblock">
4417 <div class="content">
4418 <div class="dlist"><dl>
4419 <dt class="hdlist1">
4420 <code>column</code>
4421 </dt>
4422 <dd>
4423 <p>
4424         fill columns before rows
4425 </p>
4426 </dd>
4427 <dt class="hdlist1">
4428 <code>row</code>
4429 </dt>
4430 <dd>
4431 <p>
4432         fill rows before columns
4433 </p>
4434 </dd>
4435 <dt class="hdlist1">
4436 <code>plain</code>
4437 </dt>
4438 <dd>
4439 <p>
4440         show in one column
4441 </p>
4442 </dd>
4443 </dl></div>
4444 </div></div>
4445 <div class="paragraph"><p>Finally, these options can be combined with a layout option (defaults
4446 to <em>nodense</em>):</p></div>
4447 <div class="openblock">
4448 <div class="content">
4449 <div class="dlist"><dl>
4450 <dt class="hdlist1">
4451 <code>dense</code>
4452 </dt>
4453 <dd>
4454 <p>
4455         make unequal size columns to utilize more space
4456 </p>
4457 </dd>
4458 <dt class="hdlist1">
4459 <code>nodense</code>
4460 </dt>
4461 <dd>
4462 <p>
4463         make equal size columns
4464 </p>
4465 </dd>
4466 </dl></div>
4467 </div></div>
4468 </dd>
4469 <dt class="hdlist1">
4470 column.branch
4471 </dt>
4472 <dd>
4473 <p>
4474         Specify whether to output branch listing in <code>git branch</code> in columns.
4475         See <code>column.ui</code> for details.
4476 </p>
4477 </dd>
4478 <dt class="hdlist1">
4479 column.clean
4480 </dt>
4481 <dd>
4482 <p>
4483         Specify the layout when listing items in <code>git clean -i</code>, which always
4484         shows files and directories in columns. See <code>column.ui</code> for details.
4485 </p>
4486 </dd>
4487 <dt class="hdlist1">
4488 column.status
4489 </dt>
4490 <dd>
4491 <p>
4492         Specify whether to output untracked files in <code>git status</code> in columns.
4493         See <code>column.ui</code> for details.
4494 </p>
4495 </dd>
4496 <dt class="hdlist1">
4497 column.tag
4498 </dt>
4499 <dd>
4500 <p>
4501         Specify whether to output tag listings in <code>git tag</code> in columns.
4502         See <code>column.ui</code> for details.
4503 </p>
4504 </dd>
4505 <dt class="hdlist1">
4506 commit.cleanup
4507 </dt>
4508 <dd>
4509 <p>
4510         This setting overrides the default of the <code>--cleanup</code> option in
4511         <code>git commit</code>. See <a href="git-commit.html">git-commit(1)</a> for details. Changing the
4512         default can be useful when you always want to keep lines that begin
4513         with the comment character <code>#</code> in your log message, in which case you
4514         would do <code>git config commit.cleanup whitespace</code> (note that you will
4515         have to remove the help lines that begin with <code>#</code> in the commit log
4516         template yourself, if you do this).
4517 </p>
4518 </dd>
4519 <dt class="hdlist1">
4520 commit.gpgSign
4521 </dt>
4522 <dd>
4523 <p>
4524         A boolean to specify whether all commits should be GPG signed.
4525         Use of this option when doing operations such as rebase can
4526         result in a large number of commits being signed. It may be
4527         convenient to use an agent to avoid typing your GPG passphrase
4528         several times.
4529 </p>
4530 </dd>
4531 <dt class="hdlist1">
4532 commit.status
4533 </dt>
4534 <dd>
4535 <p>
4536         A boolean to enable/disable inclusion of status information in the
4537         commit message template when using an editor to prepare the commit
4538         message.  Defaults to true.
4539 </p>
4540 </dd>
4541 <dt class="hdlist1">
4542 commit.template
4543 </dt>
4544 <dd>
4545 <p>
4546         Specify the pathname of a file to use as the template for
4547         new commit messages.
4548 </p>
4549 </dd>
4550 <dt class="hdlist1">
4551 commit.verbose
4552 </dt>
4553 <dd>
4554 <p>
4555         A boolean or int to specify the level of verbosity with <code>git commit</code>.
4556         See <a href="git-commit.html">git-commit(1)</a>.
4557 </p>
4558 </dd>
4559 <dt class="hdlist1">
4560 commitGraph.generationVersion
4561 </dt>
4562 <dd>
4563 <p>
4564         Specifies the type of generation number version to use when writing
4565         or reading the commit-graph file. If version 1 is specified, then
4566         the corrected commit dates will not be written or read. Defaults to
4567         2.
4568 </p>
4569 </dd>
4570 <dt class="hdlist1">
4571 commitGraph.maxNewFilters
4572 </dt>
4573 <dd>
4574 <p>
4575         Specifies the default value for the <code>--max-new-filters</code> option of <code>git
4576         commit-graph write</code> (c.f., <a href="git-commit-graph.html">git-commit-graph(1)</a>).
4577 </p>
4578 </dd>
4579 <dt class="hdlist1">
4580 commitGraph.readChangedPaths
4581 </dt>
4582 <dd>
4583 <p>
4584         If true, then git will use the changed-path Bloom filters in the
4585         commit-graph file (if it exists, and they are present). Defaults to
4586         true. See <a href="git-commit-graph.html">git-commit-graph(1)</a> for more information.
4587 </p>
4588 </dd>
4589 <dt class="hdlist1">
4590 credential.helper
4591 </dt>
4592 <dd>
4593 <p>
4594         Specify an external helper to be called when a username or
4595         password credential is needed; the helper may consult external
4596         storage to avoid prompting the user for the credentials. This is
4597         normally the name of a credential helper with possible
4598         arguments, but may also be an absolute path with arguments or, if
4599         preceded by <code>!</code>, shell commands.
4600 </p>
4601 <div class="paragraph"><p>Note that multiple helpers may be defined. See <a href="gitcredentials.html">gitcredentials(7)</a>
4602 for details and examples.</p></div>
4603 </dd>
4604 <dt class="hdlist1">
4605 credential.useHttpPath
4606 </dt>
4607 <dd>
4608 <p>
4609         When acquiring credentials, consider the "path" component of an http
4610         or https URL to be important. Defaults to false. See
4611         <a href="gitcredentials.html">gitcredentials(7)</a> for more information.
4612 </p>
4613 </dd>
4614 <dt class="hdlist1">
4615 credential.username
4616 </dt>
4617 <dd>
4618 <p>
4619         If no username is set for a network authentication, use this username
4620         by default. See credential.&lt;context&gt;.* below, and
4621         <a href="gitcredentials.html">gitcredentials(7)</a>.
4622 </p>
4623 </dd>
4624 <dt class="hdlist1">
4625 credential.&lt;url&gt;.*
4626 </dt>
4627 <dd>
4628 <p>
4629         Any of the credential.* options above can be applied selectively to
4630         some credentials. For example, "credential.https://example.com.username"
4631         would set the default username only for https connections to
4632         example.com. See <a href="gitcredentials.html">gitcredentials(7)</a> for details on how URLs are
4633         matched.
4634 </p>
4635 </dd>
4636 <dt class="hdlist1">
4637 credentialCache.ignoreSIGHUP
4638 </dt>
4639 <dd>
4640 <p>
4641         Tell git-credential-cache&#8212;daemon to ignore SIGHUP, instead of quitting.
4642 </p>
4643 </dd>
4644 <dt class="hdlist1">
4645 credentialStore.lockTimeoutMS
4646 </dt>
4647 <dd>
4648 <p>
4649         The length of time, in milliseconds, for git-credential-store to retry
4650         when trying to lock the credentials file. A value of 0 means not to retry at
4651         all; -1 means to try indefinitely. Default is 1000 (i.e., retry for
4652         1s).
4653 </p>
4654 </dd>
4655 <dt class="hdlist1">
4656 completion.commands
4657 </dt>
4658 <dd>
4659 <p>
4660         This is only used by git-completion.bash to add or remove
4661         commands from the list of completed commands. Normally only
4662         porcelain commands and a few select others are completed. You
4663         can add more commands, separated by space, in this
4664         variable. Prefixing the command with <em>-</em> will remove it from
4665         the existing list.
4666 </p>
4667 </dd>
4668 <dt class="hdlist1">
4669 diff.autoRefreshIndex
4670 </dt>
4671 <dd>
4672 <p>
4673         When using <em>git diff</em> to compare with work tree
4674         files, do not consider stat-only changes as changed.
4675         Instead, silently run <code>git update-index --refresh</code> to
4676         update the cached stat information for paths whose
4677         contents in the work tree match the contents in the
4678         index.  This option defaults to true.  Note that this
4679         affects only <em>git diff</em> Porcelain, and not lower level
4680         <em>diff</em> commands such as <em>git diff-files</em>.
4681 </p>
4682 </dd>
4683 <dt class="hdlist1">
4684 diff.dirstat
4685 </dt>
4686 <dd>
4687 <p>
4688         A comma separated list of <code>--dirstat</code> parameters specifying the
4689         default behavior of the <code>--dirstat</code> option to <a href="git-diff.html">git-diff(1)</a>
4690         and friends. The defaults can be overridden on the command line
4691         (using <code>--dirstat=&lt;param1,param2,...&gt;</code>). The fallback defaults
4692         (when not changed by <code>diff.dirstat</code>) are <code>changes,noncumulative,3</code>.
4693         The following parameters are available:
4694 </p>
4695 <div class="openblock">
4696 <div class="content">
4697 <div class="dlist"><dl>
4698 <dt class="hdlist1">
4699 <code>changes</code>
4700 </dt>
4701 <dd>
4702 <p>
4703         Compute the dirstat numbers by counting the lines that have been
4704         removed from the source, or added to the destination. This ignores
4705         the amount of pure code movements within a file.  In other words,
4706         rearranging lines in a file is not counted as much as other changes.
4707         This is the default behavior when no parameter is given.
4708 </p>
4709 </dd>
4710 <dt class="hdlist1">
4711 <code>lines</code>
4712 </dt>
4713 <dd>
4714 <p>
4715         Compute the dirstat numbers by doing the regular line-based diff
4716         analysis, and summing the removed/added line counts. (For binary
4717         files, count 64-byte chunks instead, since binary files have no
4718         natural concept of lines). This is a more expensive <code>--dirstat</code>
4719         behavior than the <code>changes</code> behavior, but it does count rearranged
4720         lines within a file as much as other changes. The resulting output
4721         is consistent with what you get from the other <code>--*stat</code> options.
4722 </p>
4723 </dd>
4724 <dt class="hdlist1">
4725 <code>files</code>
4726 </dt>
4727 <dd>
4728 <p>
4729         Compute the dirstat numbers by counting the number of files changed.
4730         Each changed file counts equally in the dirstat analysis. This is
4731         the computationally cheapest <code>--dirstat</code> behavior, since it does
4732         not have to look at the file contents at all.
4733 </p>
4734 </dd>
4735 <dt class="hdlist1">
4736 <code>cumulative</code>
4737 </dt>
4738 <dd>
4739 <p>
4740         Count changes in a child directory for the parent directory as well.
4741         Note that when using <code>cumulative</code>, the sum of the percentages
4742         reported may exceed 100%. The default (non-cumulative) behavior can
4743         be specified with the <code>noncumulative</code> parameter.
4744 </p>
4745 </dd>
4746 <dt class="hdlist1">
4747 &lt;limit&gt;
4748 </dt>
4749 <dd>
4750 <p>
4751         An integer parameter specifies a cut-off percent (3% by default).
4752         Directories contributing less than this percentage of the changes
4753         are not shown in the output.
4754 </p>
4755 </dd>
4756 </dl></div>
4757 </div></div>
4758 <div class="paragraph"><p>Example: The following will count changed files, while ignoring
4759 directories with less than 10% of the total amount of changed files,
4760 and accumulating child directory counts in the parent directories:
4761 <code>files,10,cumulative</code>.</p></div>
4762 </dd>
4763 <dt class="hdlist1">
4764 diff.statNameWidth
4765 </dt>
4766 <dd>
4767 <p>
4768         Limit the width of the filename part in --stat output. If set, applies
4769         to all commands generating --stat output except format-patch.
4770 </p>
4771 </dd>
4772 <dt class="hdlist1">
4773 diff.statGraphWidth
4774 </dt>
4775 <dd>
4776 <p>
4777         Limit the width of the graph part in --stat output. If set, applies
4778         to all commands generating --stat output except format-patch.
4779 </p>
4780 </dd>
4781 <dt class="hdlist1">
4782 diff.context
4783 </dt>
4784 <dd>
4785 <p>
4786         Generate diffs with &lt;n&gt; lines of context instead of the default
4787         of 3. This value is overridden by the -U option.
4788 </p>
4789 </dd>
4790 <dt class="hdlist1">
4791 diff.interHunkContext
4792 </dt>
4793 <dd>
4794 <p>
4795         Show the context between diff hunks, up to the specified number
4796         of lines, thereby fusing the hunks that are close to each other.
4797         This value serves as the default for the <code>--inter-hunk-context</code>
4798         command line option.
4799 </p>
4800 </dd>
4801 <dt class="hdlist1">
4802 diff.external
4803 </dt>
4804 <dd>
4805 <p>
4806         If this config variable is set, diff generation is not
4807         performed using the internal diff machinery, but using the
4808         given command.  Can be overridden with the &#8216;GIT_EXTERNAL_DIFF&#8217;
4809         environment variable.  The command is called with parameters
4810         as described under "git Diffs" in <a href="git.html">git(1)</a>.  Note: if
4811         you want to use an external diff program only on a subset of
4812         your files, you might want to use <a href="gitattributes.html">gitattributes(5)</a> instead.
4813 </p>
4814 </dd>
4815 <dt class="hdlist1">
4816 diff.ignoreSubmodules
4817 </dt>
4818 <dd>
4819 <p>
4820         Sets the default value of --ignore-submodules. Note that this
4821         affects only <em>git diff</em> Porcelain, and not lower level <em>diff</em>
4822         commands such as <em>git diff-files</em>. <em>git checkout</em>
4823         and <em>git switch</em> also honor
4824         this setting when reporting uncommitted changes. Setting it to
4825         <em>all</em> disables the submodule summary normally shown by <em>git commit</em>
4826         and <em>git status</em> when <code>status.submoduleSummary</code> is set unless it is
4827         overridden by using the --ignore-submodules command-line option.
4828         The <em>git submodule</em> commands are not affected by this setting.
4829         By default this is set to untracked so that any untracked
4830         submodules are ignored.
4831 </p>
4832 </dd>
4833 <dt class="hdlist1">
4834 diff.mnemonicPrefix
4835 </dt>
4836 <dd>
4837 <p>
4838         If set, <em>git diff</em> uses a prefix pair that is different from the
4839         standard "a/" and "b/" depending on what is being compared.  When
4840         this configuration is in effect, reverse diff output also swaps
4841         the order of the prefixes:
4842 </p>
4843 <div class="dlist"><dl>
4844 <dt class="hdlist1">
4845 <code>git diff</code>
4846 </dt>
4847 <dd>
4848 <p>
4849         compares the (i)ndex and the (w)ork tree;
4850 </p>
4851 </dd>
4852 <dt class="hdlist1">
4853 <code>git diff HEAD</code>
4854 </dt>
4855 <dd>
4856 <p>
4857          compares a (c)ommit and the (w)ork tree;
4858 </p>
4859 </dd>
4860 <dt class="hdlist1">
4861 <code>git diff --cached</code>
4862 </dt>
4863 <dd>
4864 <p>
4865         compares a (c)ommit and the (i)ndex;
4866 </p>
4867 </dd>
4868 <dt class="hdlist1">
4869 <code>git diff HEAD:file1 file2</code>
4870 </dt>
4871 <dd>
4872 <p>
4873         compares an (o)bject and a (w)ork tree entity;
4874 </p>
4875 </dd>
4876 <dt class="hdlist1">
4877 <code>git diff --no-index a b</code>
4878 </dt>
4879 <dd>
4880 <p>
4881         compares two non-git things (1) and (2).
4882 </p>
4883 </dd>
4884 </dl></div>
4885 </dd>
4886 <dt class="hdlist1">
4887 diff.noprefix
4888 </dt>
4889 <dd>
4890 <p>
4891         If set, <em>git diff</em> does not show any source or destination prefix.
4892 </p>
4893 </dd>
4894 <dt class="hdlist1">
4895 diff.relative
4896 </dt>
4897 <dd>
4898 <p>
4899         If set to <em>true</em>, <em>git diff</em> does not show changes outside of the directory
4900         and show pathnames relative to the current directory.
4901 </p>
4902 </dd>
4903 <dt class="hdlist1">
4904 diff.orderFile
4905 </dt>
4906 <dd>
4907 <p>
4908         File indicating how to order files within a diff.
4909         See the <em>-O</em> option to <a href="git-diff.html">git-diff(1)</a> for details.
4910         If <code>diff.orderFile</code> is a relative pathname, it is treated as
4911         relative to the top of the working tree.
4912 </p>
4913 </dd>
4914 <dt class="hdlist1">
4915 diff.renameLimit
4916 </dt>
4917 <dd>
4918 <p>
4919         The number of files to consider in the exhaustive portion of
4920         copy/rename detection; equivalent to the <em>git diff</em> option
4921         <code>-l</code>.  If not set, the default value is currently 1000.  This
4922         setting has no effect if rename detection is turned off.
4923 </p>
4924 </dd>
4925 <dt class="hdlist1">
4926 diff.renames
4927 </dt>
4928 <dd>
4929 <p>
4930         Whether and how Git detects renames.  If set to "false",
4931         rename detection is disabled. If set to "true", basic rename
4932         detection is enabled.  If set to "copies" or "copy", Git will
4933         detect copies, as well.  Defaults to true.  Note that this
4934         affects only <em>git diff</em> Porcelain like <a href="git-diff.html">git-diff(1)</a> and
4935         <a href="git-log.html">git-log(1)</a>, and not lower level commands such as
4936         <a href="git-diff-files.html">git-diff-files(1)</a>.
4937 </p>
4938 </dd>
4939 <dt class="hdlist1">
4940 diff.suppressBlankEmpty
4941 </dt>
4942 <dd>
4943 <p>
4944         A boolean to inhibit the standard behavior of printing a space
4945         before each empty output line. Defaults to false.
4946 </p>
4947 </dd>
4948 <dt class="hdlist1">
4949 diff.submodule
4950 </dt>
4951 <dd>
4952 <p>
4953         Specify the format in which differences in submodules are
4954         shown.  The "short" format just shows the names of the commits
4955         at the beginning and end of the range. The "log" format lists
4956         the commits in the range like <a href="git-submodule.html">git-submodule(1)</a> <code>summary</code>
4957         does. The "diff" format shows an inline diff of the changed
4958         contents of the submodule. Defaults to "short".
4959 </p>
4960 </dd>
4961 <dt class="hdlist1">
4962 diff.wordRegex
4963 </dt>
4964 <dd>
4965 <p>
4966         A POSIX Extended Regular Expression used to determine what is a "word"
4967         when performing word-by-word difference calculations.  Character
4968         sequences that match the regular expression are "words", all other
4969         characters are <strong>ignorable</strong> whitespace.
4970 </p>
4971 </dd>
4972 <dt class="hdlist1">
4973 diff.&lt;driver&gt;.command
4974 </dt>
4975 <dd>
4976 <p>
4977         The custom diff driver command.  See <a href="gitattributes.html">gitattributes(5)</a>
4978         for details.
4979 </p>
4980 </dd>
4981 <dt class="hdlist1">
4982 diff.&lt;driver&gt;.xfuncname
4983 </dt>
4984 <dd>
4985 <p>
4986         The regular expression that the diff driver should use to
4987         recognize the hunk header.  A built-in pattern may also be used.
4988         See <a href="gitattributes.html">gitattributes(5)</a> for details.
4989 </p>
4990 </dd>
4991 <dt class="hdlist1">
4992 diff.&lt;driver&gt;.binary
4993 </dt>
4994 <dd>
4995 <p>
4996         Set this option to true to make the diff driver treat files as
4997         binary.  See <a href="gitattributes.html">gitattributes(5)</a> for details.
4998 </p>
4999 </dd>
5000 <dt class="hdlist1">
5001 diff.&lt;driver&gt;.textconv
5002 </dt>
5003 <dd>
5004 <p>
5005         The command that the diff driver should call to generate the
5006         text-converted version of a file.  The result of the
5007         conversion is used to generate a human-readable diff.  See
5008         <a href="gitattributes.html">gitattributes(5)</a> for details.
5009 </p>
5010 </dd>
5011 <dt class="hdlist1">
5012 diff.&lt;driver&gt;.wordRegex
5013 </dt>
5014 <dd>
5015 <p>
5016         The regular expression that the diff driver should use to
5017         split words in a line.  See <a href="gitattributes.html">gitattributes(5)</a> for
5018         details.
5019 </p>
5020 </dd>
5021 <dt class="hdlist1">
5022 diff.&lt;driver&gt;.cachetextconv
5023 </dt>
5024 <dd>
5025 <p>
5026         Set this option to true to make the diff driver cache the text
5027         conversion outputs.  See <a href="gitattributes.html">gitattributes(5)</a> for details.
5028 </p>
5029 <div class="dlist"><dl>
5030 <dt class="hdlist1">
5031 <code>araxis</code>
5032 </dt>
5033 <dd>
5034 <p>
5035 Use Araxis Merge (requires a graphical session)
5036 </p>
5037 </dd>
5038 <dt class="hdlist1">
5039 <code>bc</code>
5040 </dt>
5041 <dd>
5042 <p>
5043 Use Beyond Compare (requires a graphical session)
5044 </p>
5045 </dd>
5046 <dt class="hdlist1">
5047 <code>bc3</code>
5048 </dt>
5049 <dd>
5050 <p>
5051 Use Beyond Compare (requires a graphical session)
5052 </p>
5053 </dd>
5054 <dt class="hdlist1">
5055 <code>bc4</code>
5056 </dt>
5057 <dd>
5058 <p>
5059 Use Beyond Compare (requires a graphical session)
5060 </p>
5061 </dd>
5062 <dt class="hdlist1">
5063 <code>codecompare</code>
5064 </dt>
5065 <dd>
5066 <p>
5067 Use Code Compare (requires a graphical session)
5068 </p>
5069 </dd>
5070 <dt class="hdlist1">
5071 <code>deltawalker</code>
5072 </dt>
5073 <dd>
5074 <p>
5075 Use DeltaWalker (requires a graphical session)
5076 </p>
5077 </dd>
5078 <dt class="hdlist1">
5079 <code>diffmerge</code>
5080 </dt>
5081 <dd>
5082 <p>
5083 Use DiffMerge (requires a graphical session)
5084 </p>
5085 </dd>
5086 <dt class="hdlist1">
5087 <code>diffuse</code>
5088 </dt>
5089 <dd>
5090 <p>
5091 Use Diffuse (requires a graphical session)
5092 </p>
5093 </dd>
5094 <dt class="hdlist1">
5095 <code>ecmerge</code>
5096 </dt>
5097 <dd>
5098 <p>
5099 Use ECMerge (requires a graphical session)
5100 </p>
5101 </dd>
5102 <dt class="hdlist1">
5103 <code>emerge</code>
5104 </dt>
5105 <dd>
5106 <p>
5107 Use Emacs' Emerge
5108 </p>
5109 </dd>
5110 <dt class="hdlist1">
5111 <code>examdiff</code>
5112 </dt>
5113 <dd>
5114 <p>
5115 Use ExamDiff Pro (requires a graphical session)
5116 </p>
5117 </dd>
5118 <dt class="hdlist1">
5119 <code>guiffy</code>
5120 </dt>
5121 <dd>
5122 <p>
5123 Use Guiffy&#8217;s Diff Tool (requires a graphical session)
5124 </p>
5125 </dd>
5126 <dt class="hdlist1">
5127 <code>gvimdiff</code>
5128 </dt>
5129 <dd>
5130 <p>
5131 Use gVim (requires a graphical session)
5132 </p>
5133 </dd>
5134 <dt class="hdlist1">
5135 <code>kdiff3</code>
5136 </dt>
5137 <dd>
5138 <p>
5139 Use KDiff3 (requires a graphical session)
5140 </p>
5141 </dd>
5142 <dt class="hdlist1">
5143 <code>kompare</code>
5144 </dt>
5145 <dd>
5146 <p>
5147 Use Kompare (requires a graphical session)
5148 </p>
5149 </dd>
5150 <dt class="hdlist1">
5151 <code>meld</code>
5152 </dt>
5153 <dd>
5154 <p>
5155 Use Meld (requires a graphical session)
5156 </p>
5157 </dd>
5158 <dt class="hdlist1">
5159 <code>nvimdiff</code>
5160 </dt>
5161 <dd>
5162 <p>
5163 Use Neovim
5164 </p>
5165 </dd>
5166 <dt class="hdlist1">
5167 <code>opendiff</code>
5168 </dt>
5169 <dd>
5170 <p>
5171 Use FileMerge (requires a graphical session)
5172 </p>
5173 </dd>
5174 <dt class="hdlist1">
5175 <code>p4merge</code>
5176 </dt>
5177 <dd>
5178 <p>
5179 Use HelixCore P4Merge (requires a graphical session)
5180 </p>
5181 </dd>
5182 <dt class="hdlist1">
5183 <code>smerge</code>
5184 </dt>
5185 <dd>
5186 <p>
5187 Use Sublime Merge (requires a graphical session)
5188 </p>
5189 </dd>
5190 <dt class="hdlist1">
5191 <code>tkdiff</code>
5192 </dt>
5193 <dd>
5194 <p>
5195 Use TkDiff (requires a graphical session)
5196 </p>
5197 </dd>
5198 <dt class="hdlist1">
5199 <code>vimdiff</code>
5200 </dt>
5201 <dd>
5202 <p>
5203 Use Vim
5204 </p>
5205 </dd>
5206 <dt class="hdlist1">
5207 <code>winmerge</code>
5208 </dt>
5209 <dd>
5210 <p>
5211 Use WinMerge (requires a graphical session)
5212 </p>
5213 </dd>
5214 <dt class="hdlist1">
5215 <code>xxdiff</code>
5216 </dt>
5217 <dd>
5218 <p>
5219 Use xxdiff (requires a graphical session)
5220 </p>
5221 </dd>
5222 </dl></div>
5223 </dd>
5224 <dt class="hdlist1">
5225 diff.indentHeuristic
5226 </dt>
5227 <dd>
5228 <p>
5229         Set this option to <code>false</code> to disable the default heuristics
5230         that shift diff hunk boundaries to make patches easier to read.
5231 </p>
5232 </dd>
5233 <dt class="hdlist1">
5234 diff.algorithm
5235 </dt>
5236 <dd>
5237 <p>
5238         Choose a diff algorithm.  The variants are as follows:
5239 </p>
5240 <div class="openblock">
5241 <div class="content">
5242 <div class="dlist"><dl>
5243 <dt class="hdlist1">
5244 <code>default</code>, <code>myers</code>
5245 </dt>
5246 <dd>
5247 <p>
5248         The basic greedy diff algorithm. Currently, this is the default.
5249 </p>
5250 </dd>
5251 <dt class="hdlist1">
5252 <code>minimal</code>
5253 </dt>
5254 <dd>
5255 <p>
5256         Spend extra time to make sure the smallest possible diff is
5257         produced.
5258 </p>
5259 </dd>
5260 <dt class="hdlist1">
5261 <code>patience</code>
5262 </dt>
5263 <dd>
5264 <p>
5265         Use "patience diff" algorithm when generating patches.
5266 </p>
5267 </dd>
5268 <dt class="hdlist1">
5269 <code>histogram</code>
5270 </dt>
5271 <dd>
5272 <p>
5273         This algorithm extends the patience algorithm to "support
5274         low-occurrence common elements".
5275 </p>
5276 </dd>
5277 </dl></div>
5278 </div></div>
5279 </dd>
5280 <dt class="hdlist1">
5281 diff.wsErrorHighlight
5282 </dt>
5283 <dd>
5284 <p>
5285         Highlight whitespace errors in the <code>context</code>, <code>old</code> or <code>new</code>
5286         lines of the diff.  Multiple values are separated by comma,
5287         <code>none</code> resets previous values, <code>default</code> reset the list to
5288         <code>new</code> and <code>all</code> is a shorthand for <code>old,new,context</code>.  The
5289         whitespace errors are colored with <code>color.diff.whitespace</code>.
5290         The command line option <code>--ws-error-highlight=&lt;kind&gt;</code>
5291         overrides this setting.
5292 </p>
5293 </dd>
5294 <dt class="hdlist1">
5295 diff.colorMoved
5296 </dt>
5297 <dd>
5298 <p>
5299         If set to either a valid <code>&lt;mode&gt;</code> or a true value, moved lines
5300         in a diff are colored differently, for details of valid modes
5301         see <em>--color-moved</em> in <a href="git-diff.html">git-diff(1)</a>. If simply set to
5302         true the default color mode will be used. When set to false,
5303         moved lines are not colored.
5304 </p>
5305 </dd>
5306 <dt class="hdlist1">
5307 diff.colorMovedWS
5308 </dt>
5309 <dd>
5310 <p>
5311         When moved lines are colored using e.g. the <code>diff.colorMoved</code> setting,
5312         this option controls the <code>&lt;mode&gt;</code> how spaces are treated
5313         for details of valid modes see <em>--color-moved-ws</em> in <a href="git-diff.html">git-diff(1)</a>.
5314 </p>
5315 </dd>
5316 <dt class="hdlist1">
5317 diff.tool
5318 </dt>
5319 <dd>
5320 <p>
5321         Controls which diff tool is used by <a href="git-difftool.html">git-difftool(1)</a>.
5322         This variable overrides the value configured in <code>merge.tool</code>.
5323         The list below shows the valid built-in values.
5324         Any other value is treated as a custom diff tool and requires
5325         that a corresponding difftool.&lt;tool&gt;.cmd variable is defined.
5326 </p>
5327 </dd>
5328 <dt class="hdlist1">
5329 diff.guitool
5330 </dt>
5331 <dd>
5332 <p>
5333         Controls which diff tool is used by <a href="git-difftool.html">git-difftool(1)</a> when
5334         the -g/--gui flag is specified. This variable overrides the value
5335         configured in <code>merge.guitool</code>. The list below shows the valid
5336         built-in values. Any other value is treated as a custom diff tool
5337         and requires that a corresponding difftool.&lt;guitool&gt;.cmd variable
5338         is defined.
5339 </p>
5340 </dd>
5341 <dt class="hdlist1">
5342 difftool.&lt;tool&gt;.cmd
5343 </dt>
5344 <dd>
5345 <p>
5346         Specify the command to invoke the specified diff tool.
5347         The specified command is evaluated in shell with the following
5348         variables available:  <em>LOCAL</em> is set to the name of the temporary
5349         file containing the contents of the diff pre-image and <em>REMOTE</em>
5350         is set to the name of the temporary file containing the contents
5351         of the diff post-image.
5352 </p>
5353 <div class="paragraph"><p>See the <code>--tool=&lt;tool&gt;</code> option in <a href="git-difftool.html">git-difftool(1)</a> for more details.</p></div>
5354 </dd>
5355 <dt class="hdlist1">
5356 difftool.&lt;tool&gt;.path
5357 </dt>
5358 <dd>
5359 <p>
5360         Override the path for the given tool.  This is useful in case
5361         your tool is not in the PATH.
5362 </p>
5363 </dd>
5364 <dt class="hdlist1">
5365 difftool.trustExitCode
5366 </dt>
5367 <dd>
5368 <p>
5369         Exit difftool if the invoked diff tool returns a non-zero exit status.
5370 </p>
5371 <div class="paragraph"><p>See the <code>--trust-exit-code</code> option in <a href="git-difftool.html">git-difftool(1)</a> for more details.</p></div>
5372 </dd>
5373 <dt class="hdlist1">
5374 difftool.prompt
5375 </dt>
5376 <dd>
5377 <p>
5378         Prompt before each invocation of the diff tool.
5379 </p>
5380 </dd>
5381 <dt class="hdlist1">
5382 difftool.guiDefault
5383 </dt>
5384 <dd>
5385 <p>
5386         Set <code>true</code> to use the <code>diff.guitool</code> by default (equivalent to specifying
5387         the <code>--gui</code> argument), or <code>auto</code> to select <code>diff.guitool</code> or <code>diff.tool</code>
5388         depending on the presence of a <code>DISPLAY</code> environment variable value. The
5389         default is <code>false</code>, where the <code>--gui</code> argument must be provided
5390         explicitly for the <code>diff.guitool</code> to be used.
5391 </p>
5392 </dd>
5393 <dt class="hdlist1">
5394 extensions.objectFormat
5395 </dt>
5396 <dd>
5397 <p>
5398         Specify the hash algorithm to use.  The acceptable values are <code>sha1</code> and
5399         <code>sha256</code>.  If not specified, <code>sha1</code> is assumed.  It is an error to specify
5400         this key unless <code>core.repositoryFormatVersion</code> is 1.
5401 </p>
5402 <div class="paragraph"><p>Note that this setting should only be set by <a href="git-init.html">git-init(1)</a> or
5403 <a href="git-clone.html">git-clone(1)</a>.  Trying to change it after initialization will not
5404 work and will produce hard-to-diagnose issues.</p></div>
5405 </dd>
5406 <dt class="hdlist1">
5407 extensions.refStorage
5408 </dt>
5409 <dd>
5410 <p>
5411         Specify the ref storage format to use. The acceptable values are:
5412 </p>
5413 <div class="ulist"><ul>
5414 <li>
5415 <p>
5416 <code>files</code> for loose files with packed-refs. This is the default.
5417 </p>
5418 <div class="paragraph"><p>It is an error to specify this key unless <code>core.repositoryFormatVersion</code> is 1.</p></div>
5419 <div class="paragraph"><p>Note that this setting should only be set by <a href="git-init.html">git-init(1)</a> or
5420 <a href="git-clone.html">git-clone(1)</a>. Trying to change it after initialization will not
5421 work and will produce hard-to-diagnose issues.</p></div>
5422 </li>
5423 </ul></div>
5424 </dd>
5425 <dt class="hdlist1">
5426 extensions.worktreeConfig
5427 </dt>
5428 <dd>
5429 <p>
5430         If enabled, then worktrees will load config settings from the
5431         <code>$GIT_DIR/config.worktree</code> file in addition to the
5432         <code>$GIT_COMMON_DIR/config</code> file. Note that <code>$GIT_COMMON_DIR</code> and
5433         <code>$GIT_DIR</code> are the same for the main working tree, while other
5434         working trees have <code>$GIT_DIR</code> equal to
5435         <code>$GIT_COMMON_DIR/worktrees/&lt;id&gt;/</code>. The settings in the
5436         <code>config.worktree</code> file will override settings from any other
5437         config files.
5438 </p>
5439 <div class="paragraph"><p>When enabling <code>extensions.worktreeConfig</code>, you must be careful to move
5440 certain values from the common config file to the main working tree&#8217;s
5441 <code>config.worktree</code> file, if present:</p></div>
5442 <div class="ulist"><ul>
5443 <li>
5444 <p>
5445 <code>core.worktree</code> must be moved from <code>$GIT_COMMON_DIR/config</code> to
5446   <code>$GIT_COMMON_DIR/config.worktree</code>.
5447 </p>
5448 </li>
5449 <li>
5450 <p>
5451 If <code>core.bare</code> is true, then it must be moved from <code>$GIT_COMMON_DIR/config</code>
5452   to <code>$GIT_COMMON_DIR/config.worktree</code>.
5453 </p>
5454 <div class="paragraph"><p>It may also be beneficial to adjust the locations of <code>core.sparseCheckout</code>
5455 and <code>core.sparseCheckoutCone</code> depending on your desire for customizable
5456 sparse-checkout settings for each worktree. By default, the <code>git
5457 sparse-checkout</code> builtin enables <code>extensions.worktreeConfig</code>, assigns
5458 these config values on a per-worktree basis, and uses the
5459 <code>$GIT_DIR/info/sparse-checkout</code> file to specify the sparsity for each
5460 worktree independently. See <a href="git-sparse-checkout.html">git-sparse-checkout(1)</a> for more
5461 details.</p></div>
5462 <div class="paragraph"><p>For historical reasons, <code>extensions.worktreeConfig</code> is respected
5463 regardless of the <code>core.repositoryFormatVersion</code> setting.</p></div>
5464 </li>
5465 </ul></div>
5466 </dd>
5467 <dt class="hdlist1">
5468 fastimport.unpackLimit
5469 </dt>
5470 <dd>
5471 <p>
5472         If the number of objects imported by <a href="git-fast-import.html">git-fast-import(1)</a>
5473         is below this limit, then the objects will be unpacked into
5474         loose object files.  However, if the number of imported objects
5475         equals or exceeds this limit, then the pack will be stored as a
5476         pack.  Storing the pack from a fast-import can make the import
5477         operation complete faster, especially on slow filesystems.  If
5478         not set, the value of <code>transfer.unpackLimit</code> is used instead.
5479 </p>
5480 </dd>
5481 <dt class="hdlist1">
5482 feature.*
5483 </dt>
5484 <dd>
5485 <p>
5486         The config settings that start with <code>feature.</code> modify the defaults of
5487         a group of other config settings. These groups are created by the Git
5488         developer community as recommended defaults and are subject to change.
5489         In particular, new config options may be added with different defaults.
5490 </p>
5491 </dd>
5492 <dt class="hdlist1">
5493 feature.experimental
5494 </dt>
5495 <dd>
5496 <p>
5497         Enable config options that are new to Git, and are being considered for
5498         future defaults. Config settings included here may be added or removed
5499         with each release, including minor version updates. These settings may
5500         have unintended interactions since they are so new. Please enable this
5501         setting if you are interested in providing feedback on experimental
5502         features. The new default values are:
5503 </p>
5504 <div class="ulist"><ul>
5505 <li>
5506 <p>
5507 <code>fetch.negotiationAlgorithm=skipping</code> may improve fetch negotiation times by
5508 skipping more commits at a time, reducing the number of round trips.
5509 </p>
5510 </li>
5511 <li>
5512 <p>
5513 <code>pack.useBitmapBoundaryTraversal=true</code> may improve bitmap traversal times by
5514 walking fewer objects.
5515 </p>
5516 </li>
5517 </ul></div>
5518 </dd>
5519 <dt class="hdlist1">
5520 feature.manyFiles
5521 </dt>
5522 <dd>
5523 <p>
5524         Enable config options that optimize for repos with many files in the
5525         working directory. With many files, commands such as <code>git status</code> and
5526         <code>git checkout</code> may be slow and these new defaults improve performance:
5527 </p>
5528 <div class="ulist"><ul>
5529 <li>
5530 <p>
5531 <code>index.skipHash=true</code> speeds up index writes by not computing a trailing
5532   checksum. Note that this will cause Git versions earlier than 2.13.0 to
5533   refuse to parse the index and Git versions earlier than 2.40.0 will report
5534   a corrupted index during <code>git fsck</code>.
5535 </p>
5536 </li>
5537 <li>
5538 <p>
5539 <code>index.version=4</code> enables path-prefix compression in the index.
5540 </p>
5541 </li>
5542 <li>
5543 <p>
5544 <code>core.untrackedCache=true</code> enables the untracked cache. This setting assumes
5545 that mtime is working on your machine.
5546 </p>
5547 </li>
5548 </ul></div>
5549 </dd>
5550 <dt class="hdlist1">
5551 fetch.recurseSubmodules
5552 </dt>
5553 <dd>
5554 <p>
5555         This option controls whether <code>git fetch</code> (and the underlying fetch
5556         in <code>git pull</code>) will recursively fetch into populated submodules.
5557         This option can be set either to a boolean value or to <em>on-demand</em>.
5558         Setting it to a boolean changes the behavior of fetch and pull to
5559         recurse unconditionally into submodules when set to true or to not
5560         recurse at all when set to false. When set to <em>on-demand</em>, fetch and
5561         pull will only recurse into a populated submodule when its
5562         superproject retrieves a commit that updates the submodule&#8217;s
5563         reference.
5564         Defaults to <em>on-demand</em>, or to the value of <em>submodule.recurse</em> if set.
5565 </p>
5566 </dd>
5567 <dt class="hdlist1">
5568 fetch.fsckObjects
5569 </dt>
5570 <dd>
5571 <p>
5572         If it is set to true, git-fetch-pack will check all fetched
5573         objects. See <code>transfer.fsckObjects</code> for what&#8217;s
5574         checked. Defaults to false. If not set, the value of
5575         <code>transfer.fsckObjects</code> is used instead.
5576 </p>
5577 </dd>
5578 <dt class="hdlist1">
5579 fetch.fsck.&lt;msg-id&gt;
5580 </dt>
5581 <dd>
5582 <p>
5583         Acts like <code>fsck.&lt;msg-id&gt;</code>, but is used by
5584         <a href="git-fetch-pack.html">git-fetch-pack(1)</a> instead of <a href="git-fsck.html">git-fsck(1)</a>. See
5585         the <code>fsck.&lt;msg-id&gt;</code> documentation for details.
5586 </p>
5587 </dd>
5588 <dt class="hdlist1">
5589 fetch.fsck.skipList
5590 </dt>
5591 <dd>
5592 <p>
5593         Acts like <code>fsck.skipList</code>, but is used by
5594         <a href="git-fetch-pack.html">git-fetch-pack(1)</a> instead of <a href="git-fsck.html">git-fsck(1)</a>. See
5595         the <code>fsck.skipList</code> documentation for details.
5596 </p>
5597 </dd>
5598 <dt class="hdlist1">
5599 fetch.unpackLimit
5600 </dt>
5601 <dd>
5602 <p>
5603         If the number of objects fetched over the Git native
5604         transfer is below this
5605         limit, then the objects will be unpacked into loose object
5606         files. However if the number of received objects equals or
5607         exceeds this limit then the received pack will be stored as
5608         a pack, after adding any missing delta bases.  Storing the
5609         pack from a push can make the push operation complete faster,
5610         especially on slow filesystems.  If not set, the value of
5611         <code>transfer.unpackLimit</code> is used instead.
5612 </p>
5613 </dd>
5614 <dt class="hdlist1">
5615 fetch.prune
5616 </dt>
5617 <dd>
5618 <p>
5619         If true, fetch will automatically behave as if the <code>--prune</code>
5620         option was given on the command line.  See also <code>remote.&lt;name&gt;.prune</code>
5621         and the PRUNING section of <a href="git-fetch.html">git-fetch(1)</a>.
5622 </p>
5623 </dd>
5624 <dt class="hdlist1">
5625 fetch.pruneTags
5626 </dt>
5627 <dd>
5628 <p>
5629         If true, fetch will automatically behave as if the
5630         <code>refs/tags/*:refs/tags/*</code> refspec was provided when pruning,
5631         if not set already. This allows for setting both this option
5632         and <code>fetch.prune</code> to maintain a 1=1 mapping to upstream
5633         refs. See also <code>remote.&lt;name&gt;.pruneTags</code> and the PRUNING
5634         section of <a href="git-fetch.html">git-fetch(1)</a>.
5635 </p>
5636 </dd>
5637 <dt class="hdlist1">
5638 fetch.all
5639 </dt>
5640 <dd>
5641 <p>
5642         If true, fetch will attempt to update all available remotes.
5643         This behavior can be overridden by passing <code>--no-all</code> or by
5644         explicitly specifying one or more remote(s) to fetch from.
5645         Defaults to false.
5646 </p>
5647 </dd>
5648 <dt class="hdlist1">
5649 fetch.output
5650 </dt>
5651 <dd>
5652 <p>
5653         Control how ref update status is printed. Valid values are
5654         <code>full</code> and <code>compact</code>. Default value is <code>full</code>. See the
5655         OUTPUT section in <a href="git-fetch.html">git-fetch(1)</a> for details.
5656 </p>
5657 </dd>
5658 <dt class="hdlist1">
5659 fetch.negotiationAlgorithm
5660 </dt>
5661 <dd>
5662 <p>
5663         Control how information about the commits in the local repository
5664         is sent when negotiating the contents of the packfile to be sent by
5665         the server.  Set to "consecutive" to use an algorithm that walks
5666         over consecutive commits checking each one.  Set to "skipping" to
5667         use an algorithm that skips commits in an effort to converge
5668         faster, but may result in a larger-than-necessary packfile; or set
5669         to "noop" to not send any information at all, which will almost
5670         certainly result in a larger-than-necessary packfile, but will skip
5671         the negotiation step.  Set to "default" to override settings made
5672         previously and use the default behaviour.  The default is normally
5673         "consecutive", but if <code>feature.experimental</code> is true, then the
5674         default is "skipping".  Unknown values will cause <em>git fetch</em> to
5675         error out.
5676 </p>
5677 <div class="paragraph"><p>See also the <code>--negotiate-only</code> and <code>--negotiation-tip</code> options to
5678 <a href="git-fetch.html">git-fetch(1)</a>.</p></div>
5679 </dd>
5680 <dt class="hdlist1">
5681 fetch.showForcedUpdates
5682 </dt>
5683 <dd>
5684 <p>
5685         Set to false to enable <code>--no-show-forced-updates</code> in
5686         <a href="git-fetch.html">git-fetch(1)</a> and <a href="git-pull.html">git-pull(1)</a> commands.
5687         Defaults to true.
5688 </p>
5689 </dd>
5690 <dt class="hdlist1">
5691 fetch.parallel
5692 </dt>
5693 <dd>
5694 <p>
5695         Specifies the maximal number of fetch operations to be run in parallel
5696         at a time (submodules, or remotes when the <code>--multiple</code> option of
5697         <a href="git-fetch.html">git-fetch(1)</a> is in effect).
5698 </p>
5699 <div class="paragraph"><p>A value of 0 will give some reasonable default. If unset, it defaults to 1.</p></div>
5700 <div class="paragraph"><p>For submodules, this setting can be overridden using the <code>submodule.fetchJobs</code>
5701 config setting.</p></div>
5702 </dd>
5703 <dt class="hdlist1">
5704 fetch.writeCommitGraph
5705 </dt>
5706 <dd>
5707 <p>
5708         Set to true to write a commit-graph after every <code>git fetch</code> command
5709         that downloads a pack-file from a remote. Using the <code>--split</code> option,
5710         most executions will create a very small commit-graph file on top of
5711         the existing commit-graph file(s). Occasionally, these files will
5712         merge and the write may take longer. Having an updated commit-graph
5713         file helps performance of many Git commands, including <code>git merge-base</code>,
5714         <code>git push -f</code>, and <code>git log --graph</code>. Defaults to false.
5715 </p>
5716 </dd>
5717 <dt class="hdlist1">
5718 fetch.bundleURI
5719 </dt>
5720 <dd>
5721 <p>
5722         This value stores a URI for downloading Git object data from a bundle
5723         URI before performing an incremental fetch from the origin Git server.
5724         This is similar to how the <code>--bundle-uri</code> option behaves in
5725         <a href="git-clone.html">git-clone(1)</a>. <code>git clone --bundle-uri</code> will set the
5726         <code>fetch.bundleURI</code> value if the supplied bundle URI contains a bundle
5727         list that is organized for incremental fetches.
5728 </p>
5729 <div class="paragraph"><p>If you modify this value and your repository has a <code>fetch.bundleCreationToken</code>
5730 value, then remove that <code>fetch.bundleCreationToken</code> value before fetching from
5731 the new bundle URI.</p></div>
5732 </dd>
5733 <dt class="hdlist1">
5734 fetch.bundleCreationToken
5735 </dt>
5736 <dd>
5737 <p>
5738         When using <code>fetch.bundleURI</code> to fetch incrementally from a bundle
5739         list that uses the "creationToken" heuristic, this config value
5740         stores the maximum <code>creationToken</code> value of the downloaded bundles.
5741         This value is used to prevent downloading bundles in the future
5742         if the advertised <code>creationToken</code> is not strictly larger than this
5743         value.
5744 </p>
5745 <div class="paragraph"><p>The creation token values are chosen by the provider serving the specific
5746 bundle URI. If you modify the URI at <code>fetch.bundleURI</code>, then be sure to
5747 remove the value for the <code>fetch.bundleCreationToken</code> value before fetching.</p></div>
5748 </dd>
5749 <dt class="hdlist1">
5750 format.attach
5751 </dt>
5752 <dd>
5753 <p>
5754         Enable multipart/mixed attachments as the default for
5755         <em>format-patch</em>.  The value can also be a double quoted string
5756         which will enable attachments as the default and set the
5757         value as the boundary.  See the --attach option in
5758         <a href="git-format-patch.html">git-format-patch(1)</a>.  To countermand an earlier
5759         value, set it to an empty string.
5760 </p>
5761 </dd>
5762 <dt class="hdlist1">
5763 format.from
5764 </dt>
5765 <dd>
5766 <p>
5767         Provides the default value for the <code>--from</code> option to format-patch.
5768         Accepts a boolean value, or a name and email address.  If false,
5769         format-patch defaults to <code>--no-from</code>, using commit authors directly in
5770         the "From:" field of patch mails.  If true, format-patch defaults to
5771         <code>--from</code>, using your committer identity in the "From:" field of patch
5772         mails and including a "From:" field in the body of the patch mail if
5773         different.  If set to a non-boolean value, format-patch uses that
5774         value instead of your committer identity.  Defaults to false.
5775 </p>
5776 </dd>
5777 <dt class="hdlist1">
5778 format.forceInBodyFrom
5779 </dt>
5780 <dd>
5781 <p>
5782         Provides the default value for the <code>--[no-]force-in-body-from</code>
5783         option to format-patch.  Defaults to false.
5784 </p>
5785 </dd>
5786 <dt class="hdlist1">
5787 format.numbered
5788 </dt>
5789 <dd>
5790 <p>
5791         A boolean which can enable or disable sequence numbers in patch
5792         subjects.  It defaults to "auto" which enables it only if there
5793         is more than one patch.  It can be enabled or disabled for all
5794         messages by setting it to "true" or "false".  See --numbered
5795         option in <a href="git-format-patch.html">git-format-patch(1)</a>.
5796 </p>
5797 </dd>
5798 <dt class="hdlist1">
5799 format.headers
5800 </dt>
5801 <dd>
5802 <p>
5803         Additional email headers to include in a patch to be submitted
5804         by mail.  See <a href="git-format-patch.html">git-format-patch(1)</a>.
5805 </p>
5806 </dd>
5807 <dt class="hdlist1">
5808 format.to
5809 </dt>
5810 <dt class="hdlist1">
5811 format.cc
5812 </dt>
5813 <dd>
5814 <p>
5815         Additional recipients to include in a patch to be submitted
5816         by mail.  See the --to and --cc options in
5817         <a href="git-format-patch.html">git-format-patch(1)</a>.
5818 </p>
5819 </dd>
5820 <dt class="hdlist1">
5821 format.subjectPrefix
5822 </dt>
5823 <dd>
5824 <p>
5825         The default for format-patch is to output files with the <em>[PATCH]</em>
5826         subject prefix. Use this variable to change that prefix.
5827 </p>
5828 </dd>
5829 <dt class="hdlist1">
5830 format.coverFromDescription
5831 </dt>
5832 <dd>
5833 <p>
5834         The default mode for format-patch to determine which parts of
5835         the cover letter will be populated using the branch&#8217;s
5836         description. See the <code>--cover-from-description</code> option in
5837         <a href="git-format-patch.html">git-format-patch(1)</a>.
5838 </p>
5839 </dd>
5840 <dt class="hdlist1">
5841 format.signature
5842 </dt>
5843 <dd>
5844 <p>
5845         The default for format-patch is to output a signature containing
5846         the Git version number. Use this variable to change that default.
5847         Set this variable to the empty string ("") to suppress
5848         signature generation.
5849 </p>
5850 </dd>
5851 <dt class="hdlist1">
5852 format.signatureFile
5853 </dt>
5854 <dd>
5855 <p>
5856         Works just like format.signature except the contents of the
5857         file specified by this variable will be used as the signature.
5858 </p>
5859 </dd>
5860 <dt class="hdlist1">
5861 format.suffix
5862 </dt>
5863 <dd>
5864 <p>
5865         The default for format-patch is to output files with the suffix
5866         <code>.patch</code>. Use this variable to change that suffix (make sure to
5867         include the dot if you want it).
5868 </p>
5869 </dd>
5870 <dt class="hdlist1">
5871 format.encodeEmailHeaders
5872 </dt>
5873 <dd>
5874 <p>
5875         Encode email headers that have non-ASCII characters with
5876         "Q-encoding" (described in RFC 2047) for email transmission.
5877         Defaults to true.
5878 </p>
5879 </dd>
5880 <dt class="hdlist1">
5881 format.pretty
5882 </dt>
5883 <dd>
5884 <p>
5885         The default pretty format for log/show/whatchanged command.
5886         See <a href="git-log.html">git-log(1)</a>, <a href="git-show.html">git-show(1)</a>,
5887         <a href="git-whatchanged.html">git-whatchanged(1)</a>.
5888 </p>
5889 </dd>
5890 <dt class="hdlist1">
5891 format.thread
5892 </dt>
5893 <dd>
5894 <p>
5895         The default threading style for <em>git format-patch</em>.  Can be
5896         a boolean value, or <code>shallow</code> or <code>deep</code>.  <code>shallow</code> threading
5897         makes every mail a reply to the head of the series,
5898         where the head is chosen from the cover letter, the
5899         <code>--in-reply-to</code>, and the first patch mail, in this order.
5900         <code>deep</code> threading makes every mail a reply to the previous one.
5901         A true boolean value is the same as <code>shallow</code>, and a false
5902         value disables threading.
5903 </p>
5904 </dd>
5905 <dt class="hdlist1">
5906 format.signOff
5907 </dt>
5908 <dd>
5909 <p>
5910         A boolean value which lets you enable the <code>-s/--signoff</code> option of
5911         format-patch by default. <strong>Note:</strong> Adding the <code>Signed-off-by</code> trailer to a
5912         patch should be a conscious act and means that you certify you have
5913         the rights to submit this work under the same open source license.
5914         Please see the <em>SubmittingPatches</em> document for further discussion.
5915 </p>
5916 </dd>
5917 <dt class="hdlist1">
5918 format.coverLetter
5919 </dt>
5920 <dd>
5921 <p>
5922         A boolean that controls whether to generate a cover-letter when
5923         format-patch is invoked, but in addition can be set to "auto", to
5924         generate a cover-letter only when there&#8217;s more than one patch.
5925         Default is false.
5926 </p>
5927 </dd>
5928 <dt class="hdlist1">
5929 format.outputDirectory
5930 </dt>
5931 <dd>
5932 <p>
5933         Set a custom directory to store the resulting files instead of the
5934         current working directory. All directory components will be created.
5935 </p>
5936 </dd>
5937 <dt class="hdlist1">
5938 format.filenameMaxLength
5939 </dt>
5940 <dd>
5941 <p>
5942         The maximum length of the output filenames generated by the
5943         <code>format-patch</code> command; defaults to 64.  Can be overridden
5944         by the <code>--filename-max-length=&lt;n&gt;</code> command line option.
5945 </p>
5946 </dd>
5947 <dt class="hdlist1">
5948 format.useAutoBase
5949 </dt>
5950 <dd>
5951 <p>
5952         A boolean value which lets you enable the <code>--base=auto</code> option of
5953         format-patch by default. Can also be set to "whenAble" to allow
5954         enabling <code>--base=auto</code> if a suitable base is available, but to skip
5955         adding base info otherwise without the format dying.
5956 </p>
5957 </dd>
5958 <dt class="hdlist1">
5959 format.notes
5960 </dt>
5961 <dd>
5962 <p>
5963         Provides the default value for the <code>--notes</code> option to
5964         format-patch. Accepts a boolean value, or a ref which specifies
5965         where to get notes. If false, format-patch defaults to
5966         <code>--no-notes</code>. If true, format-patch defaults to <code>--notes</code>. If
5967         set to a non-boolean value, format-patch defaults to
5968         <code>--notes=&lt;ref&gt;</code>, where <code>ref</code> is the non-boolean value. Defaults
5969         to false.
5970 </p>
5971 <div class="paragraph"><p>If one wishes to use the ref <code>refs/notes/true</code>, please use that literal
5972 instead.</p></div>
5973 <div class="paragraph"><p>This configuration can be specified multiple times in order to allow
5974 multiple notes refs to be included. In that case, it will behave
5975 similarly to multiple <code>--[no-]notes[=]</code> options passed in. That is, a
5976 value of <code>true</code> will show the default notes, a value of <code>&lt;ref&gt;</code> will
5977 also show notes from that notes ref and a value of <code>false</code> will negate
5978 previous configurations and not show notes.</p></div>
5979 <div class="paragraph"><p>For example,</p></div>
5980 <div class="listingblock">
5981 <div class="content">
5982 <pre><code>[format]
5983         notes = true
5984         notes = foo
5985         notes = false
5986         notes = bar</code></pre>
5987 </div></div>
5988 <div class="paragraph"><p>will only show notes from <code>refs/notes/bar</code>.</p></div>
5989 </dd>
5990 <dt class="hdlist1">
5991 format.mboxrd
5992 </dt>
5993 <dd>
5994 <p>
5995         A boolean value which enables the robust "mboxrd" format when
5996         <code>--stdout</code> is in use to escape "^&gt;+From " lines.
5997 </p>
5998 </dd>
5999 <dt class="hdlist1">
6000 format.noprefix
6001 </dt>
6002 <dd>
6003 <p>
6004         If set, do not show any source or destination prefix in patches.
6005         This is equivalent to the <code>diff.noprefix</code> option used by <code>git
6006         diff</code> (but which is not respected by <code>format-patch</code>). Note that
6007         by setting this, the receiver of any patches you generate will
6008         have to apply them using the <code>-p0</code> option.
6009 </p>
6010 </dd>
6011 <dt class="hdlist1">
6012 filter.&lt;driver&gt;.clean
6013 </dt>
6014 <dd>
6015 <p>
6016         The command which is used to convert the content of a worktree
6017         file to a blob upon checkin.  See <a href="gitattributes.html">gitattributes(5)</a> for
6018         details.
6019 </p>
6020 </dd>
6021 <dt class="hdlist1">
6022 filter.&lt;driver&gt;.smudge
6023 </dt>
6024 <dd>
6025 <p>
6026         The command which is used to convert the content of a blob
6027         object to a worktree file upon checkout.  See
6028         <a href="gitattributes.html">gitattributes(5)</a> for details.
6029 </p>
6030 </dd>
6031 <dt class="hdlist1">
6032 fsck.&lt;msg-id&gt;
6033 </dt>
6034 <dd>
6035 <p>
6036         During fsck git may find issues with legacy data which
6037         wouldn&#8217;t be generated by current versions of git, and which
6038         wouldn&#8217;t be sent over the wire if <code>transfer.fsckObjects</code> was
6039         set. This feature is intended to support working with legacy
6040         repositories containing such data.
6041 </p>
6042 <div class="paragraph"><p>Setting <code>fsck.&lt;msg-id&gt;</code> will be picked up by <a href="git-fsck.html">git-fsck(1)</a>, but
6043 to accept pushes of such data set <code>receive.fsck.&lt;msg-id&gt;</code> instead, or
6044 to clone or fetch it set <code>fetch.fsck.&lt;msg-id&gt;</code>.</p></div>
6045 <div class="paragraph"><p>The rest of the documentation discusses <code>fsck.*</code> for brevity, but the
6046 same applies for the corresponding <code>receive.fsck.*</code> and
6047 <code>fetch.fsck.*</code>. variables.</p></div>
6048 <div class="paragraph"><p>Unlike variables like <code>color.ui</code> and <code>core.editor</code>, the
6049 <code>receive.fsck.&lt;msg-id&gt;</code> and <code>fetch.fsck.&lt;msg-id&gt;</code> variables will not
6050 fall back on the <code>fsck.&lt;msg-id&gt;</code> configuration if they aren&#8217;t set. To
6051 uniformly configure the same fsck settings in different circumstances,
6052 all three of them must be set to the same values.</p></div>
6053 <div class="paragraph"><p>When <code>fsck.&lt;msg-id&gt;</code> is set, errors can be switched to warnings and
6054 vice versa by configuring the <code>fsck.&lt;msg-id&gt;</code> setting where the
6055 <code>&lt;msg-id&gt;</code> is the fsck message ID and the value is one of <code>error</code>,
6056 <code>warn</code> or <code>ignore</code>. For convenience, fsck prefixes the error/warning
6057 with the message ID, e.g. "missingEmail: invalid author/committer
6058 line - missing email" means that setting <code>fsck.missingEmail = ignore</code>
6059 will hide that issue.</p></div>
6060 <div class="paragraph"><p>In general, it is better to enumerate existing objects with problems
6061 with <code>fsck.skipList</code>, instead of listing the kind of breakages these
6062 problematic objects share to be ignored, as doing the latter will
6063 allow new instances of the same breakages go unnoticed.</p></div>
6064 <div class="paragraph"><p>Setting an unknown <code>fsck.&lt;msg-id&gt;</code> value will cause fsck to die, but
6065 doing the same for <code>receive.fsck.&lt;msg-id&gt;</code> and <code>fetch.fsck.&lt;msg-id&gt;</code>
6066 will only cause git to warn.</p></div>
6067 <div class="paragraph"><p>See the <code>Fsck Messages</code> section of <a href="git-fsck.html">git-fsck(1)</a> for supported
6068 values of <code>&lt;msg-id&gt;</code>.</p></div>
6069 </dd>
6070 <dt class="hdlist1">
6071 fsck.skipList
6072 </dt>
6073 <dd>
6074 <p>
6075         The path to a list of object names (i.e. one unabbreviated SHA-1 per
6076         line) that are known to be broken in a non-fatal way and should
6077         be ignored. On versions of Git 2.20 and later, comments (<em>#</em>), empty
6078         lines, and any leading and trailing whitespace are ignored. Everything
6079         but a SHA-1 per line will error out on older versions.
6080 </p>
6081 <div class="paragraph"><p>This feature is useful when an established project should be accepted
6082 despite early commits containing errors that can be safely ignored,
6083 such as invalid committer email addresses.  Note: corrupt objects
6084 cannot be skipped with this setting.</p></div>
6085 <div class="paragraph"><p>Like <code>fsck.&lt;msg-id&gt;</code> this variable has corresponding
6086 <code>receive.fsck.skipList</code> and <code>fetch.fsck.skipList</code> variants.</p></div>
6087 <div class="paragraph"><p>Unlike variables like <code>color.ui</code> and <code>core.editor</code> the
6088 <code>receive.fsck.skipList</code> and <code>fetch.fsck.skipList</code> variables will not
6089 fall back on the <code>fsck.skipList</code> configuration if they aren&#8217;t set. To
6090 uniformly configure the same fsck settings in different circumstances,
6091 all three of them must be set to the same values.</p></div>
6092 <div class="paragraph"><p>Older versions of Git (before 2.20) documented that the object names
6093 list should be sorted. This was never a requirement; the object names
6094 could appear in any order, but when reading the list we tracked whether
6095 the list was sorted for the purposes of an internal binary search
6096 implementation, which could save itself some work with an already sorted
6097 list. Unless you had a humongous list there was no reason to go out of
6098 your way to pre-sort the list. After Git version 2.20 a hash implementation
6099 is used instead, so there&#8217;s now no reason to pre-sort the list.</p></div>
6100 </dd>
6101 <dt class="hdlist1">
6102 fsmonitor.allowRemote
6103 </dt>
6104 <dd>
6105 <p>
6106     By default, the fsmonitor daemon refuses to work with network-mounted
6107     repositories. Setting <code>fsmonitor.allowRemote</code> to <code>true</code> overrides this
6108     behavior.  Only respected when <code>core.fsmonitor</code> is set to <code>true</code>.
6109 </p>
6110 </dd>
6111 <dt class="hdlist1">
6112 fsmonitor.socketDir
6113 </dt>
6114 <dd>
6115 <p>
6116     This Mac OS-specific option, if set, specifies the directory in
6117     which to create the Unix domain socket used for communication
6118     between the fsmonitor daemon and various Git commands. The directory must
6119     reside on a native Mac OS filesystem.  Only respected when <code>core.fsmonitor</code>
6120     is set to <code>true</code>.
6121 </p>
6122 </dd>
6123 <dt class="hdlist1">
6124 gc.aggressiveDepth
6125 </dt>
6126 <dd>
6127 <p>
6128         The depth parameter used in the delta compression
6129         algorithm used by <em>git gc --aggressive</em>.  This defaults
6130         to 50, which is the default for the <code>--depth</code> option when
6131         <code>--aggressive</code> isn&#8217;t in use.
6132 </p>
6133 <div class="paragraph"><p>See the documentation for the <code>--depth</code> option in
6134 <a href="git-repack.html">git-repack(1)</a> for more details.</p></div>
6135 </dd>
6136 <dt class="hdlist1">
6137 gc.aggressiveWindow
6138 </dt>
6139 <dd>
6140 <p>
6141         The window size parameter used in the delta compression
6142         algorithm used by <em>git gc --aggressive</em>.  This defaults
6143         to 250, which is a much more aggressive window size than
6144         the default <code>--window</code> of 10.
6145 </p>
6146 <div class="paragraph"><p>See the documentation for the <code>--window</code> option in
6147 <a href="git-repack.html">git-repack(1)</a> for more details.</p></div>
6148 </dd>
6149 <dt class="hdlist1">
6150 gc.auto
6151 </dt>
6152 <dd>
6153 <p>
6154         When there are approximately more than this many loose
6155         objects in the repository, <code>git gc --auto</code> will pack them.
6156         Some Porcelain commands use this command to perform a
6157         light-weight garbage collection from time to time.  The
6158         default value is 6700.
6159 </p>
6160 <div class="paragraph"><p>Setting this to 0 disables not only automatic packing based on the
6161 number of loose objects, but also any other heuristic <code>git gc --auto</code> will
6162 otherwise use to determine if there&#8217;s work to do, such as
6163 <code>gc.autoPackLimit</code>.</p></div>
6164 </dd>
6165 <dt class="hdlist1">
6166 gc.autoPackLimit
6167 </dt>
6168 <dd>
6169 <p>
6170         When there are more than this many packs that are not
6171         marked with <code>*.keep</code> file in the repository, <code>git gc
6172         --auto</code> consolidates them into one larger pack.  The
6173         default value is 50.  Setting this to 0 disables it.
6174         Setting <code>gc.auto</code> to 0 will also disable this.
6175 </p>
6176 <div class="paragraph"><p>See the <code>gc.bigPackThreshold</code> configuration variable below. When in
6177 use, it&#8217;ll affect how the auto pack limit works.</p></div>
6178 </dd>
6179 <dt class="hdlist1">
6180 gc.autoDetach
6181 </dt>
6182 <dd>
6183 <p>
6184         Make <code>git gc --auto</code> return immediately and run in the background
6185         if the system supports it. Default is true.
6186 </p>
6187 </dd>
6188 <dt class="hdlist1">
6189 gc.bigPackThreshold
6190 </dt>
6191 <dd>
6192 <p>
6193         If non-zero, all non-cruft packs larger than this limit are kept
6194         when <code>git gc</code> is run. This is very similar to
6195         <code>--keep-largest-pack</code> except that all non-cruft packs that meet
6196         the threshold are kept, not just the largest pack. Defaults to
6197         zero. Common unit suffixes of <em>k</em>, <em>m</em>, or <em>g</em> are supported.
6198 </p>
6199 <div class="paragraph"><p>Note that if the number of kept packs is more than gc.autoPackLimit,
6200 this configuration variable is ignored, all packs except the base pack
6201 will be repacked. After this the number of packs should go below
6202 gc.autoPackLimit and gc.bigPackThreshold should be respected again.</p></div>
6203 <div class="paragraph"><p>If the amount of memory estimated for <code>git repack</code> to run smoothly is
6204 not available and <code>gc.bigPackThreshold</code> is not set, the largest pack
6205 will also be excluded (this is the equivalent of running <code>git gc</code> with
6206 <code>--keep-largest-pack</code>).</p></div>
6207 </dd>
6208 <dt class="hdlist1">
6209 gc.writeCommitGraph
6210 </dt>
6211 <dd>
6212 <p>
6213         If true, then gc will rewrite the commit-graph file when
6214         <a href="git-gc.html">git-gc(1)</a> is run. When using <code>git gc --auto</code>
6215         the commit-graph will be updated if housekeeping is
6216         required. Default is true. See <a href="git-commit-graph.html">git-commit-graph(1)</a>
6217         for details.
6218 </p>
6219 </dd>
6220 <dt class="hdlist1">
6221 gc.logExpiry
6222 </dt>
6223 <dd>
6224 <p>
6225         If the file gc.log exists, then <code>git gc --auto</code> will print
6226         its content and exit with status zero instead of running
6227         unless that file is more than <em>gc.logExpiry</em> old.  Default is
6228         "1.day".  See <code>gc.pruneExpire</code> for more ways to specify its
6229         value.
6230 </p>
6231 </dd>
6232 <dt class="hdlist1">
6233 gc.packRefs
6234 </dt>
6235 <dd>
6236 <p>
6237         Running <code>git pack-refs</code> in a repository renders it
6238         unclonable by Git versions prior to 1.5.1.2 over dumb
6239         transports such as HTTP.  This variable determines whether
6240         <em>git gc</em> runs <code>git pack-refs</code>. This can be set to <code>notbare</code>
6241         to enable it within all non-bare repos or it can be set to a
6242         boolean value.  The default is <code>true</code>.
6243 </p>
6244 </dd>
6245 <dt class="hdlist1">
6246 gc.cruftPacks
6247 </dt>
6248 <dd>
6249 <p>
6250         Store unreachable objects in a cruft pack (see
6251         <a href="git-repack.html">git-repack(1)</a>) instead of as loose objects. The default
6252         is <code>true</code>.
6253 </p>
6254 </dd>
6255 <dt class="hdlist1">
6256 gc.maxCruftSize
6257 </dt>
6258 <dd>
6259 <p>
6260         Limit the size of new cruft packs when repacking. When
6261         specified in addition to <code>--max-cruft-size</code>, the command line
6262         option takes priority. See the <code>--max-cruft-size</code> option of
6263         <a href="git-repack.html">git-repack(1)</a>.
6264 </p>
6265 </dd>
6266 <dt class="hdlist1">
6267 gc.pruneExpire
6268 </dt>
6269 <dd>
6270 <p>
6271         When <em>git gc</em> is run, it will call <em>prune --expire 2.weeks.ago</em>
6272         (and <em>repack --cruft --cruft-expiration 2.weeks.ago</em> if using
6273         cruft packs via <code>gc.cruftPacks</code> or <code>--cruft</code>).  Override the
6274         grace period with this config variable.  The value "now" may be
6275         used to disable this grace period and always prune unreachable
6276         objects immediately, or "never" may be used to suppress pruning.
6277         This feature helps prevent corruption when <em>git gc</em> runs
6278         concurrently with another process writing to the repository; see
6279         the "NOTES" section of <a href="git-gc.html">git-gc(1)</a>.
6280 </p>
6281 </dd>
6282 <dt class="hdlist1">
6283 gc.worktreePruneExpire
6284 </dt>
6285 <dd>
6286 <p>
6287         When <em>git gc</em> is run, it calls
6288         <em>git worktree prune --expire 3.months.ago</em>.
6289         This config variable can be used to set a different grace
6290         period. The value "now" may be used to disable the grace
6291         period and prune <code>$GIT_DIR/worktrees</code> immediately, or "never"
6292         may be used to suppress pruning.
6293 </p>
6294 </dd>
6295 <dt class="hdlist1">
6296 gc.reflogExpire
6297 </dt>
6298 <dt class="hdlist1">
6299 gc.&lt;pattern&gt;.reflogExpire
6300 </dt>
6301 <dd>
6302 <p>
6303         <em>git reflog expire</em> removes reflog entries older than
6304         this time; defaults to 90 days. The value "now" expires all
6305         entries immediately, and "never" suppresses expiration
6306         altogether. With "&lt;pattern&gt;" (e.g.
6307         "refs/stash") in the middle the setting applies only to
6308         the refs that match the &lt;pattern&gt;.
6309 </p>
6310 </dd>
6311 <dt class="hdlist1">
6312 gc.reflogExpireUnreachable
6313 </dt>
6314 <dt class="hdlist1">
6315 gc.&lt;pattern&gt;.reflogExpireUnreachable
6316 </dt>
6317 <dd>
6318 <p>
6319         <em>git reflog expire</em> removes reflog entries older than
6320         this time and are not reachable from the current tip;
6321         defaults to 30 days. The value "now" expires all entries
6322         immediately, and "never" suppresses expiration altogether.
6323         With "&lt;pattern&gt;" (e.g. "refs/stash")
6324         in the middle, the setting applies only to the refs that
6325         match the &lt;pattern&gt;.
6326 </p>
6327 <div class="paragraph"><p>These types of entries are generally created as a result of using <code>git
6328 commit --amend</code> or <code>git rebase</code> and are the commits prior to the amend
6329 or rebase occurring.  Since these changes are not part of the current
6330 project most users will want to expire them sooner, which is why the
6331 default is more aggressive than <code>gc.reflogExpire</code>.</p></div>
6332 </dd>
6333 <dt class="hdlist1">
6334 gc.recentObjectsHook
6335 </dt>
6336 <dd>
6337 <p>
6338         When considering whether or not to remove an object (either when
6339         generating a cruft pack or storing unreachable objects as
6340         loose), use the shell to execute the specified command(s).
6341         Interpret their output as object IDs which Git will consider as
6342         "recent", regardless of their age. By treating their mtimes as
6343         "now", any objects (and their descendants) mentioned in the
6344         output will be kept regardless of their true age.
6345 </p>
6346 <div class="paragraph"><p>Output must contain exactly one hex object ID per line, and nothing
6347 else. Objects which cannot be found in the repository are ignored.
6348 Multiple hooks are supported, but all must exit successfully, else the
6349 operation (either generating a cruft pack or unpacking unreachable
6350 objects) will be halted.</p></div>
6351 </dd>
6352 <dt class="hdlist1">
6353 gc.repackFilter
6354 </dt>
6355 <dd>
6356 <p>
6357         When repacking, use the specified filter to move certain
6358         objects into a separate packfile.  See the
6359         <code>--filter=&lt;filter-spec&gt;</code> option of <a href="git-repack.html">git-repack(1)</a>.
6360 </p>
6361 </dd>
6362 <dt class="hdlist1">
6363 gc.repackFilterTo
6364 </dt>
6365 <dd>
6366 <p>
6367         When repacking and using a filter, see <code>gc.repackFilter</code>, the
6368         specified location will be used to create the packfile
6369         containing the filtered out objects. <strong>WARNING:</strong> The
6370         specified location should be accessible, using for example the
6371         Git alternates mechanism, otherwise the repo could be
6372         considered corrupt by Git as it migh not be able to access the
6373         objects in that packfile. See the <code>--filter-to=&lt;dir&gt;</code> option
6374         of <a href="git-repack.html">git-repack(1)</a> and the <code>objects/info/alternates</code>
6375         section of <a href="gitrepository-layout.html">gitrepository-layout(5)</a>.
6376 </p>
6377 </dd>
6378 <dt class="hdlist1">
6379 gc.rerereResolved
6380 </dt>
6381 <dd>
6382 <p>
6383         Records of conflicted merge you resolved earlier are
6384         kept for this many days when <em>git rerere gc</em> is run.
6385         You can also use more human-readable "1.month.ago", etc.
6386         The default is 60 days.  See <a href="git-rerere.html">git-rerere(1)</a>.
6387 </p>
6388 </dd>
6389 <dt class="hdlist1">
6390 gc.rerereUnresolved
6391 </dt>
6392 <dd>
6393 <p>
6394         Records of conflicted merge you have not resolved are
6395         kept for this many days when <em>git rerere gc</em> is run.
6396         You can also use more human-readable "1.month.ago", etc.
6397         The default is 15 days.  See <a href="git-rerere.html">git-rerere(1)</a>.
6398 </p>
6399 </dd>
6400 <dt class="hdlist1">
6401 gitcvs.commitMsgAnnotation
6402 </dt>
6403 <dd>
6404 <p>
6405         Append this string to each commit message. Set to empty string
6406         to disable this feature. Defaults to "via git-CVS emulator".
6407 </p>
6408 </dd>
6409 <dt class="hdlist1">
6410 gitcvs.enabled
6411 </dt>
6412 <dd>
6413 <p>
6414         Whether the CVS server interface is enabled for this repository.
6415         See <a href="git-cvsserver.html">git-cvsserver(1)</a>.
6416 </p>
6417 </dd>
6418 <dt class="hdlist1">
6419 gitcvs.logFile
6420 </dt>
6421 <dd>
6422 <p>
6423         Path to a log file where the CVS server interface well&#8230; logs
6424         various stuff. See <a href="git-cvsserver.html">git-cvsserver(1)</a>.
6425 </p>
6426 </dd>
6427 <dt class="hdlist1">
6428 gitcvs.usecrlfattr
6429 </dt>
6430 <dd>
6431 <p>
6432         If true, the server will look up the end-of-line conversion
6433         attributes for files to determine the <code>-k</code> modes to use. If
6434         the attributes force Git to treat a file as text,
6435         the <code>-k</code> mode will be left blank so CVS clients will
6436         treat it as text. If they suppress text conversion, the file
6437         will be set with <em>-kb</em> mode, which suppresses any newline munging
6438         the client might otherwise do. If the attributes do not allow
6439         the file type to be determined, then <code>gitcvs.allBinary</code> is
6440         used. See <a href="gitattributes.html">gitattributes(5)</a>.
6441 </p>
6442 </dd>
6443 <dt class="hdlist1">
6444 gitcvs.allBinary
6445 </dt>
6446 <dd>
6447 <p>
6448         This is used if <code>gitcvs.usecrlfattr</code> does not resolve
6449         the correct <em>-kb</em> mode to use. If true, all
6450         unresolved files are sent to the client in
6451         mode <em>-kb</em>. This causes the client to treat them
6452         as binary files, which suppresses any newline munging it
6453         otherwise might do. Alternatively, if it is set to "guess",
6454         then the contents of the file are examined to decide if
6455         it is binary, similar to <code>core.autocrlf</code>.
6456 </p>
6457 </dd>
6458 <dt class="hdlist1">
6459 gitcvs.dbName
6460 </dt>
6461 <dd>
6462 <p>
6463         Database used by git-cvsserver to cache revision information
6464         derived from the Git repository. The exact meaning depends on the
6465         used database driver, for SQLite (which is the default driver) this
6466         is a filename. Supports variable substitution (see
6467         <a href="git-cvsserver.html">git-cvsserver(1)</a> for details). May not contain semicolons (<code>;</code>).
6468         Default: <em>%Ggitcvs.%m.sqlite</em>
6469 </p>
6470 </dd>
6471 <dt class="hdlist1">
6472 gitcvs.dbDriver
6473 </dt>
6474 <dd>
6475 <p>
6476         Used Perl DBI driver. You can specify any available driver
6477         for this here, but it might not work. git-cvsserver is tested
6478         with <em>DBD::SQLite</em>, reported to work with <em>DBD::Pg</em>, and
6479         reported <strong>not</strong> to work with <em>DBD::mysql</em>. Experimental feature.
6480         May not contain double colons (<code>:</code>). Default: <em>SQLite</em>.
6481         See <a href="git-cvsserver.html">git-cvsserver(1)</a>.
6482 </p>
6483 </dd>
6484 <dt class="hdlist1">
6485 gitcvs.dbUser, gitcvs.dbPass
6486 </dt>
6487 <dd>
6488 <p>
6489         Database user and password. Only useful if setting <code>gitcvs.dbDriver</code>,
6490         since SQLite has no concept of database users and/or passwords.
6491         <em>gitcvs.dbUser</em> supports variable substitution (see
6492         <a href="git-cvsserver.html">git-cvsserver(1)</a> for details).
6493 </p>
6494 </dd>
6495 <dt class="hdlist1">
6496 gitcvs.dbTableNamePrefix
6497 </dt>
6498 <dd>
6499 <p>
6500         Database table name prefix.  Prepended to the names of any
6501         database tables used, allowing a single database to be used
6502         for several repositories.  Supports variable substitution (see
6503         <a href="git-cvsserver.html">git-cvsserver(1)</a> for details).  Any non-alphabetic
6504         characters will be replaced with underscores.
6505 </p>
6506 </dd>
6507 </dl></div>
6508 <div class="paragraph"><p>All gitcvs variables except for <code>gitcvs.usecrlfattr</code> and
6509 <code>gitcvs.allBinary</code> can also be specified as
6510 <em>gitcvs.&lt;access_method&gt;.&lt;varname&gt;</em> (where <em>access_method</em>
6511 is one of "ext" and "pserver") to make them apply only for the given
6512 access method.</p></div>
6513 <div class="dlist"><dl>
6514 <dt class="hdlist1">
6515 gitweb.category
6516 </dt>
6517 <dt class="hdlist1">
6518 gitweb.description
6519 </dt>
6520 <dt class="hdlist1">
6521 gitweb.owner
6522 </dt>
6523 <dt class="hdlist1">
6524 gitweb.url
6525 </dt>
6526 <dd>
6527 <p>
6528         See <a href="gitweb.html">gitweb(1)</a> for description.
6529 </p>
6530 </dd>
6531 <dt class="hdlist1">
6532 gitweb.avatar
6533 </dt>
6534 <dt class="hdlist1">
6535 gitweb.blame
6536 </dt>
6537 <dt class="hdlist1">
6538 gitweb.grep
6539 </dt>
6540 <dt class="hdlist1">
6541 gitweb.highlight
6542 </dt>
6543 <dt class="hdlist1">
6544 gitweb.patches
6545 </dt>
6546 <dt class="hdlist1">
6547 gitweb.pickaxe
6548 </dt>
6549 <dt class="hdlist1">
6550 gitweb.remote_heads
6551 </dt>
6552 <dt class="hdlist1">
6553 gitweb.showSizes
6554 </dt>
6555 <dt class="hdlist1">
6556 gitweb.snapshot
6557 </dt>
6558 <dd>
6559 <p>
6560         See <a href="gitweb.conf.html">gitweb.conf(5)</a> for description.
6561 </p>
6562 </dd>
6563 <dt class="hdlist1">
6564 grep.lineNumber
6565 </dt>
6566 <dd>
6567 <p>
6568         If set to true, enable <code>-n</code> option by default.
6569 </p>
6570 </dd>
6571 <dt class="hdlist1">
6572 grep.column
6573 </dt>
6574 <dd>
6575 <p>
6576         If set to true, enable the <code>--column</code> option by default.
6577 </p>
6578 </dd>
6579 <dt class="hdlist1">
6580 grep.patternType
6581 </dt>
6582 <dd>
6583 <p>
6584         Set the default matching behavior. Using a value of <em>basic</em>, <em>extended</em>,
6585         <em>fixed</em>, or <em>perl</em> will enable the <code>--basic-regexp</code>, <code>--extended-regexp</code>,
6586         <code>--fixed-strings</code>, or <code>--perl-regexp</code> option accordingly, while the
6587         value <em>default</em> will use the <code>grep.extendedRegexp</code> option to choose
6588         between <em>basic</em> and <em>extended</em>.
6589 </p>
6590 </dd>
6591 <dt class="hdlist1">
6592 grep.extendedRegexp
6593 </dt>
6594 <dd>
6595 <p>
6596         If set to true, enable <code>--extended-regexp</code> option by default. This
6597         option is ignored when the <code>grep.patternType</code> option is set to a value
6598         other than <em>default</em>.
6599 </p>
6600 </dd>
6601 <dt class="hdlist1">
6602 grep.threads
6603 </dt>
6604 <dd>
6605 <p>
6606         Number of grep worker threads to use. If unset (or set to 0), Git will
6607         use as many threads as the number of logical cores available.
6608 </p>
6609 </dd>
6610 <dt class="hdlist1">
6611 grep.fullName
6612 </dt>
6613 <dd>
6614 <p>
6615         If set to true, enable <code>--full-name</code> option by default.
6616 </p>
6617 </dd>
6618 <dt class="hdlist1">
6619 grep.fallbackToNoIndex
6620 </dt>
6621 <dd>
6622 <p>
6623         If set to true, fall back to git grep --no-index if git grep
6624         is executed outside of a git repository.  Defaults to false.
6625 </p>
6626 </dd>
6627 <dt class="hdlist1">
6628 gpg.program
6629 </dt>
6630 <dd>
6631 <p>
6632         Use this custom program instead of "<code>gpg</code>" found on <code>$PATH</code> when
6633         making or verifying a PGP signature. The program must support the
6634         same command-line interface as GPG, namely, to verify a detached
6635         signature, "<code>gpg --verify $signature - &lt;$file</code>" is run, and the
6636         program is expected to signal a good signature by exiting with
6637         code 0.  To generate an ASCII-armored detached signature, the
6638         standard input of "<code>gpg -bsau $key</code>" is fed with the contents to be
6639         signed, and the program is expected to send the result to its
6640         standard output.
6641 </p>
6642 </dd>
6643 <dt class="hdlist1">
6644 gpg.format
6645 </dt>
6646 <dd>
6647 <p>
6648         Specifies which key format to use when signing with <code>--gpg-sign</code>.
6649         Default is "openpgp". Other possible values are "x509", "ssh".
6650 </p>
6651 <div class="paragraph"><p>See <a href="gitformat-signature.html">gitformat-signature(5)</a> for the signature format, which differs
6652 based on the selected <code>gpg.format</code>.</p></div>
6653 </dd>
6654 <dt class="hdlist1">
6655 gpg.&lt;format&gt;.program
6656 </dt>
6657 <dd>
6658 <p>
6659         Use this to customize the program used for the signing format you
6660         chose. (see <code>gpg.program</code> and <code>gpg.format</code>) <code>gpg.program</code> can still
6661         be used as a legacy synonym for <code>gpg.openpgp.program</code>. The default
6662         value for <code>gpg.x509.program</code> is "gpgsm" and <code>gpg.ssh.program</code> is "ssh-keygen".
6663 </p>
6664 </dd>
6665 <dt class="hdlist1">
6666 gpg.minTrustLevel
6667 </dt>
6668 <dd>
6669 <p>
6670         Specifies a minimum trust level for signature verification.  If
6671         this option is unset, then signature verification for merge
6672         operations requires a key with at least <code>marginal</code> trust.  Other
6673         operations that perform signature verification require a key
6674         with at least <code>undefined</code> trust.  Setting this option overrides
6675         the required trust-level for all operations.  Supported values,
6676         in increasing order of significance:
6677 </p>
6678 <div class="ulist"><ul>
6679 <li>
6680 <p>
6681 <code>undefined</code>
6682 </p>
6683 </li>
6684 <li>
6685 <p>
6686 <code>never</code>
6687 </p>
6688 </li>
6689 <li>
6690 <p>
6691 <code>marginal</code>
6692 </p>
6693 </li>
6694 <li>
6695 <p>
6696 <code>fully</code>
6697 </p>
6698 </li>
6699 <li>
6700 <p>
6701 <code>ultimate</code>
6702 </p>
6703 </li>
6704 </ul></div>
6705 </dd>
6706 <dt class="hdlist1">
6707 gpg.ssh.defaultKeyCommand
6708 </dt>
6709 <dd>
6710 <p>
6711         This command will be run when user.signingkey is not set and a ssh
6712         signature is requested. On successful exit a valid ssh public key
6713         prefixed with <code>key::</code> is expected in the first line of its output.
6714         This allows for a script doing a dynamic lookup of the correct public
6715         key when it is impractical to statically configure <code>user.signingKey</code>.
6716         For example when keys or SSH Certificates are rotated frequently or
6717         selection of the right key depends on external factors unknown to git.
6718 </p>
6719 </dd>
6720 <dt class="hdlist1">
6721 gpg.ssh.allowedSignersFile
6722 </dt>
6723 <dd>
6724 <p>
6725         A file containing ssh public keys which you are willing to trust.
6726         The file consists of one or more lines of principals followed by an ssh
6727         public key.
6728         e.g.: <code>user1@example.com,user2@example.com ssh-rsa AAAAX1...</code>
6729         See ssh-keygen(1) "ALLOWED SIGNERS" for details.
6730         The principal is only used to identify the key and is available when
6731         verifying a signature.
6732 </p>
6733 <div class="paragraph"><p>SSH has no concept of trust levels like gpg does. To be able to differentiate
6734 between valid signatures and trusted signatures the trust level of a signature
6735 verification is set to <code>fully</code> when the public key is present in the allowedSignersFile.
6736 Otherwise the trust level is <code>undefined</code> and git verify-commit/tag will fail.</p></div>
6737 <div class="paragraph"><p>This file can be set to a location outside of the repository and every developer
6738 maintains their own trust store. A central repository server could generate this
6739 file automatically from ssh keys with push access to verify the code against.
6740 In a corporate setting this file is probably generated at a global location
6741 from automation that already handles developer ssh keys.</p></div>
6742 <div class="paragraph"><p>A repository that only allows signed commits can store the file
6743 in the repository itself using a path relative to the top-level of the working tree.
6744 This way only committers with an already valid key can add or change keys in the keyring.</p></div>
6745 <div class="paragraph"><p>Since OpensSSH 8.8 this file allows specifying a key lifetime using valid-after &amp;
6746 valid-before options. Git will mark signatures as valid if the signing key was
6747 valid at the time of the signature&#8217;s creation. This allows users to change a
6748 signing key without invalidating all previously made signatures.</p></div>
6749 <div class="paragraph"><p>Using a SSH CA key with the cert-authority option
6750 (see ssh-keygen(1) "CERTIFICATES") is also valid.</p></div>
6751 </dd>
6752 <dt class="hdlist1">
6753 gpg.ssh.revocationFile
6754 </dt>
6755 <dd>
6756 <p>
6757         Either a SSH KRL or a list of revoked public keys (without the principal prefix).
6758         See ssh-keygen(1) for details.
6759         If a public key is found in this file then it will always be treated
6760         as having trust level "never" and signatures will show as invalid.
6761 </p>
6762 </dd>
6763 <dt class="hdlist1">
6764 gui.commitMsgWidth
6765 </dt>
6766 <dd>
6767 <p>
6768         Defines how wide the commit message window is in the
6769         <a href="git-gui.html">git-gui(1)</a>. "75" is the default.
6770 </p>
6771 </dd>
6772 <dt class="hdlist1">
6773 gui.diffContext
6774 </dt>
6775 <dd>
6776 <p>
6777         Specifies how many context lines should be used in calls to diff
6778         made by the <a href="git-gui.html">git-gui(1)</a>. The default is "5".
6779 </p>
6780 </dd>
6781 <dt class="hdlist1">
6782 gui.displayUntracked
6783 </dt>
6784 <dd>
6785 <p>
6786         Determines if <a href="git-gui.html">git-gui(1)</a> shows untracked files
6787         in the file list. The default is "true".
6788 </p>
6789 </dd>
6790 <dt class="hdlist1">
6791 gui.encoding
6792 </dt>
6793 <dd>
6794 <p>
6795         Specifies the default character encoding to use for displaying of
6796         file contents in <a href="git-gui.html">git-gui(1)</a> and <a href="gitk.html">gitk(1)</a>.
6797         It can be overridden by setting the <em>encoding</em> attribute
6798         for relevant files (see <a href="gitattributes.html">gitattributes(5)</a>).
6799         If this option is not set, the tools default to the
6800         locale encoding.
6801 </p>
6802 </dd>
6803 <dt class="hdlist1">
6804 gui.matchTrackingBranch
6805 </dt>
6806 <dd>
6807 <p>
6808         Determines if new branches created with <a href="git-gui.html">git-gui(1)</a> should
6809         default to tracking remote branches with matching names or
6810         not. Default: "false".
6811 </p>
6812 </dd>
6813 <dt class="hdlist1">
6814 gui.newBranchTemplate
6815 </dt>
6816 <dd>
6817 <p>
6818         Is used as a suggested name when creating new branches using the
6819         <a href="git-gui.html">git-gui(1)</a>.
6820 </p>
6821 </dd>
6822 <dt class="hdlist1">
6823 gui.pruneDuringFetch
6824 </dt>
6825 <dd>
6826 <p>
6827         "true" if <a href="git-gui.html">git-gui(1)</a> should prune remote-tracking branches when
6828         performing a fetch. The default value is "false".
6829 </p>
6830 </dd>
6831 <dt class="hdlist1">
6832 gui.trustmtime
6833 </dt>
6834 <dd>
6835 <p>
6836         Determines if <a href="git-gui.html">git-gui(1)</a> should trust the file modification
6837         timestamp or not. By default the timestamps are not trusted.
6838 </p>
6839 </dd>
6840 <dt class="hdlist1">
6841 gui.spellingDictionary
6842 </dt>
6843 <dd>
6844 <p>
6845         Specifies the dictionary used for spell checking commit messages in
6846         the <a href="git-gui.html">git-gui(1)</a>. When set to "none" spell checking is turned
6847         off.
6848 </p>
6849 </dd>
6850 <dt class="hdlist1">
6851 gui.fastCopyBlame
6852 </dt>
6853 <dd>
6854 <p>
6855         If true, <em>git gui blame</em> uses <code>-C</code> instead of <code>-C -C</code> for original
6856         location detection. It makes blame significantly faster on huge
6857         repositories at the expense of less thorough copy detection.
6858 </p>
6859 </dd>
6860 <dt class="hdlist1">
6861 gui.copyBlameThreshold
6862 </dt>
6863 <dd>
6864 <p>
6865         Specifies the threshold to use in <em>git gui blame</em> original location
6866         detection, measured in alphanumeric characters. See the
6867         <a href="git-blame.html">git-blame(1)</a> manual for more information on copy detection.
6868 </p>
6869 </dd>
6870 <dt class="hdlist1">
6871 gui.blamehistoryctx
6872 </dt>
6873 <dd>
6874 <p>
6875         Specifies the radius of history context in days to show in
6876         <a href="gitk.html">gitk(1)</a> for the selected commit, when the <code>Show History
6877         Context</code> menu item is invoked from <em>git gui blame</em>. If this
6878         variable is set to zero, the whole history is shown.
6879 </p>
6880 </dd>
6881 <dt class="hdlist1">
6882 guitool.&lt;name&gt;.cmd
6883 </dt>
6884 <dd>
6885 <p>
6886         Specifies the shell command line to execute when the corresponding item
6887         of the <a href="git-gui.html">git-gui(1)</a> <code>Tools</code> menu is invoked. This option is
6888         mandatory for every tool. The command is executed from the root of
6889         the working directory, and in the environment it receives the name of
6890         the tool as <code>GIT_GUITOOL</code>, the name of the currently selected file as
6891         <em>FILENAME</em>, and the name of the current branch as <em>CUR_BRANCH</em> (if
6892         the head is detached, <em>CUR_BRANCH</em> is empty).
6893 </p>
6894 </dd>
6895 <dt class="hdlist1">
6896 guitool.&lt;name&gt;.needsFile
6897 </dt>
6898 <dd>
6899 <p>
6900         Run the tool only if a diff is selected in the GUI. It guarantees
6901         that <em>FILENAME</em> is not empty.
6902 </p>
6903 </dd>
6904 <dt class="hdlist1">
6905 guitool.&lt;name&gt;.noConsole
6906 </dt>
6907 <dd>
6908 <p>
6909         Run the command silently, without creating a window to display its
6910         output.
6911 </p>
6912 </dd>
6913 <dt class="hdlist1">
6914 guitool.&lt;name&gt;.noRescan
6915 </dt>
6916 <dd>
6917 <p>
6918         Don&#8217;t rescan the working directory for changes after the tool
6919         finishes execution.
6920 </p>
6921 </dd>
6922 <dt class="hdlist1">
6923 guitool.&lt;name&gt;.confirm
6924 </dt>
6925 <dd>
6926 <p>
6927         Show a confirmation dialog before actually running the tool.
6928 </p>
6929 </dd>
6930 <dt class="hdlist1">
6931 guitool.&lt;name&gt;.argPrompt
6932 </dt>
6933 <dd>
6934 <p>
6935         Request a string argument from the user, and pass it to the tool
6936         through the <code>ARGS</code> environment variable. Since requesting an
6937         argument implies confirmation, the <em>confirm</em> option has no effect
6938         if this is enabled. If the option is set to <em>true</em>, <em>yes</em>, or <em>1</em>,
6939         the dialog uses a built-in generic prompt; otherwise the exact
6940         value of the variable is used.
6941 </p>
6942 </dd>
6943 <dt class="hdlist1">
6944 guitool.&lt;name&gt;.revPrompt
6945 </dt>
6946 <dd>
6947 <p>
6948         Request a single valid revision from the user, and set the
6949         <code>REVISION</code> environment variable. In other aspects this option
6950         is similar to <em>argPrompt</em>, and can be used together with it.
6951 </p>
6952 </dd>
6953 <dt class="hdlist1">
6954 guitool.&lt;name&gt;.revUnmerged
6955 </dt>
6956 <dd>
6957 <p>
6958         Show only unmerged branches in the <em>revPrompt</em> subdialog.
6959         This is useful for tools similar to merge or rebase, but not
6960         for things like checkout or reset.
6961 </p>
6962 </dd>
6963 <dt class="hdlist1">
6964 guitool.&lt;name&gt;.title
6965 </dt>
6966 <dd>
6967 <p>
6968         Specifies the title to use for the prompt dialog. The default
6969         is the tool name.
6970 </p>
6971 </dd>
6972 <dt class="hdlist1">
6973 guitool.&lt;name&gt;.prompt
6974 </dt>
6975 <dd>
6976 <p>
6977         Specifies the general prompt string to display at the top of
6978         the dialog, before subsections for <em>argPrompt</em> and <em>revPrompt</em>.
6979         The default value includes the actual command.
6980 </p>
6981 </dd>
6982 <dt class="hdlist1">
6983 help.browser
6984 </dt>
6985 <dd>
6986 <p>
6987         Specify the browser that will be used to display help in the
6988         <em>web</em> format. See <a href="git-help.html">git-help(1)</a>.
6989 </p>
6990 </dd>
6991 <dt class="hdlist1">
6992 help.format
6993 </dt>
6994 <dd>
6995 <p>
6996         Override the default help format used by <a href="git-help.html">git-help(1)</a>.
6997         Values <em>man</em>, <em>info</em>, <em>web</em> and <em>html</em> are supported. <em>man</em> is
6998         the default. <em>web</em> and <em>html</em> are the same.
6999 </p>
7000 </dd>
7001 <dt class="hdlist1">
7002 help.autoCorrect
7003 </dt>
7004 <dd>
7005 <p>
7006         If git detects typos and can identify exactly one valid command similar
7007         to the error, git will try to suggest the correct command or even
7008         run the suggestion automatically. Possible config values are:
7009 </p>
7010 <div class="ulist"><ul>
7011 <li>
7012 <p>
7013 0 (default): show the suggested command.
7014 </p>
7015 </li>
7016 <li>
7017 <p>
7018 positive number: run the suggested command after specified
7019 deciseconds (0.1 sec).
7020 </p>
7021 </li>
7022 <li>
7023 <p>
7024 "immediate": run the suggested command immediately.
7025 </p>
7026 </li>
7027 <li>
7028 <p>
7029 "prompt": show the suggestion and prompt for confirmation to run
7030 the command.
7031 </p>
7032 </li>
7033 <li>
7034 <p>
7035 "never": don&#8217;t run or show any suggested command.
7036 </p>
7037 </li>
7038 </ul></div>
7039 </dd>
7040 <dt class="hdlist1">
7041 help.htmlPath
7042 </dt>
7043 <dd>
7044 <p>
7045         Specify the path where the HTML documentation resides. File system paths
7046         and URLs are supported. HTML pages will be prefixed with this path when
7047         help is displayed in the <em>web</em> format. This defaults to the documentation
7048         path of your Git installation.
7049 </p>
7050 </dd>
7051 <dt class="hdlist1">
7052 http.proxy
7053 </dt>
7054 <dd>
7055 <p>
7056         Override the HTTP proxy, normally configured using the <em>http_proxy</em>,
7057         <em>https_proxy</em>, and <em>all_proxy</em> environment variables (see <code>curl(1)</code>). In
7058         addition to the syntax understood by curl, it is possible to specify a
7059         proxy string with a user name but no password, in which case git will
7060         attempt to acquire one in the same way it does for other credentials. See
7061         <a href="gitcredentials.html">gitcredentials(7)</a> for more information. The syntax thus is
7062         <em>[protocol://][user[:password]@]proxyhost[:port]</em>. This can be overridden
7063         on a per-remote basis; see remote.&lt;name&gt;.proxy
7064 </p>
7065 </dd>
7066 <dt class="hdlist1">
7067 http.proxyAuthMethod
7068 </dt>
7069 <dd>
7070 <p>
7071         Set the method with which to authenticate against the HTTP proxy. This
7072         only takes effect if the configured proxy string contains a user name part
7073         (i.e. is of the form <em>user@host</em> or <em>user@host:port</em>). This can be
7074         overridden on a per-remote basis; see <code>remote.&lt;name&gt;.proxyAuthMethod</code>.
7075         Both can be overridden by the <code>GIT_HTTP_PROXY_AUTHMETHOD</code> environment
7076         variable.  Possible values are:
7077 </p>
7078 <div class="openblock">
7079 <div class="content">
7080 <div class="ulist"><ul>
7081 <li>
7082 <p>
7083 <code>anyauth</code> - Automatically pick a suitable authentication method. It is
7084   assumed that the proxy answers an unauthenticated request with a 407
7085   status code and one or more Proxy-authenticate headers with supported
7086   authentication methods. This is the default.
7087 </p>
7088 </li>
7089 <li>
7090 <p>
7091 <code>basic</code> - HTTP Basic authentication
7092 </p>
7093 </li>
7094 <li>
7095 <p>
7096 <code>digest</code> - HTTP Digest authentication; this prevents the password from being
7097   transmitted to the proxy in clear text
7098 </p>
7099 </li>
7100 <li>
7101 <p>
7102 <code>negotiate</code> - GSS-Negotiate authentication (compare the --negotiate option
7103   of <code>curl(1)</code>)
7104 </p>
7105 </li>
7106 <li>
7107 <p>
7108 <code>ntlm</code> - NTLM authentication (compare the --ntlm option of <code>curl(1)</code>)
7109 </p>
7110 </li>
7111 </ul></div>
7112 </div></div>
7113 </dd>
7114 <dt class="hdlist1">
7115 http.proxySSLCert
7116 </dt>
7117 <dd>
7118 <p>
7119         The pathname of a file that stores a client certificate to use to authenticate
7120         with an HTTPS proxy. Can be overridden by the <code>GIT_PROXY_SSL_CERT</code> environment
7121         variable.
7122 </p>
7123 </dd>
7124 <dt class="hdlist1">
7125 http.proxySSLKey
7126 </dt>
7127 <dd>
7128 <p>
7129         The pathname of a file that stores a private key to use to authenticate with
7130         an HTTPS proxy. Can be overridden by the <code>GIT_PROXY_SSL_KEY</code> environment
7131         variable.
7132 </p>
7133 </dd>
7134 <dt class="hdlist1">
7135 http.proxySSLCertPasswordProtected
7136 </dt>
7137 <dd>
7138 <p>
7139         Enable Git&#8217;s password prompt for the proxy SSL certificate.  Otherwise OpenSSL
7140         will prompt the user, possibly many times, if the certificate or private key
7141         is encrypted. Can be overridden by the <code>GIT_PROXY_SSL_CERT_PASSWORD_PROTECTED</code>
7142         environment variable.
7143 </p>
7144 </dd>
7145 <dt class="hdlist1">
7146 http.proxySSLCAInfo
7147 </dt>
7148 <dd>
7149 <p>
7150         Pathname to the file containing the certificate bundle that should be used to
7151         verify the proxy with when using an HTTPS proxy. Can be overridden by the
7152         <code>GIT_PROXY_SSL_CAINFO</code> environment variable.
7153 </p>
7154 </dd>
7155 <dt class="hdlist1">
7156 http.emptyAuth
7157 </dt>
7158 <dd>
7159 <p>
7160         Attempt authentication without seeking a username or password.  This
7161         can be used to attempt GSS-Negotiate authentication without specifying
7162         a username in the URL, as libcurl normally requires a username for
7163         authentication.
7164 </p>
7165 </dd>
7166 <dt class="hdlist1">
7167 http.delegation
7168 </dt>
7169 <dd>
7170 <p>
7171         Control GSSAPI credential delegation. The delegation is disabled
7172         by default in libcurl since version 7.21.7. Set parameter to tell
7173         the server what it is allowed to delegate when it comes to user
7174         credentials. Used with GSS/kerberos. Possible values are:
7175 </p>
7176 <div class="openblock">
7177 <div class="content">
7178 <div class="ulist"><ul>
7179 <li>
7180 <p>
7181 <code>none</code> - Don&#8217;t allow any delegation.
7182 </p>
7183 </li>
7184 <li>
7185 <p>
7186 <code>policy</code> - Delegates if and only if the OK-AS-DELEGATE flag is set in the
7187   Kerberos service ticket, which is a matter of realm policy.
7188 </p>
7189 </li>
7190 <li>
7191 <p>
7192 <code>always</code> - Unconditionally allow the server to delegate.
7193 </p>
7194 </li>
7195 </ul></div>
7196 </div></div>
7197 </dd>
7198 <dt class="hdlist1">
7199 http.extraHeader
7200 </dt>
7201 <dd>
7202 <p>
7203         Pass an additional HTTP header when communicating with a server.  If
7204         more than one such entry exists, all of them are added as extra
7205         headers.  To allow overriding the settings inherited from the system
7206         config, an empty value will reset the extra headers to the empty list.
7207 </p>
7208 </dd>
7209 <dt class="hdlist1">
7210 http.cookieFile
7211 </dt>
7212 <dd>
7213 <p>
7214         The pathname of a file containing previously stored cookie lines,
7215         which should be used
7216         in the Git http session, if they match the server. The file format
7217         of the file to read cookies from should be plain HTTP headers or
7218         the Netscape/Mozilla cookie file format (see <code>curl(1)</code>).
7219         NOTE that the file specified with http.cookieFile is used only as
7220         input unless http.saveCookies is set.
7221 </p>
7222 </dd>
7223 <dt class="hdlist1">
7224 http.saveCookies
7225 </dt>
7226 <dd>
7227 <p>
7228         If set, store cookies received during requests to the file specified by
7229         http.cookieFile. Has no effect if http.cookieFile is unset.
7230 </p>
7231 </dd>
7232 <dt class="hdlist1">
7233 http.version
7234 </dt>
7235 <dd>
7236 <p>
7237         Use the specified HTTP protocol version when communicating with a server.
7238         If you want to force the default. The available and default version depend
7239         on libcurl. Currently the possible values of
7240         this option are:
7241 </p>
7242 <div class="ulist"><ul>
7243 <li>
7244 <p>
7245 HTTP/2
7246 </p>
7247 </li>
7248 <li>
7249 <p>
7250 HTTP/1.1
7251 </p>
7252 </li>
7253 </ul></div>
7254 </dd>
7255 <dt class="hdlist1">
7256 http.curloptResolve
7257 </dt>
7258 <dd>
7259 <p>
7260         Hostname resolution information that will be used first by
7261         libcurl when sending HTTP requests.  This information should
7262         be in one of the following formats:
7263 </p>
7264 <div class="ulist"><ul>
7265 <li>
7266 <p>
7267 [+]HOST:PORT:ADDRESS[,ADDRESS]
7268 </p>
7269 </li>
7270 <li>
7271 <p>
7272 -HOST:PORT
7273 </p>
7274 </li>
7275 </ul></div>
7276 <div class="paragraph"><p>The first format redirects all requests to the given <code>HOST:PORT</code>
7277 to the provided <code>ADDRESS</code>(s). The second format clears all
7278 previous config values for that <code>HOST:PORT</code> combination.  To
7279 allow easy overriding of all the settings inherited from the
7280 system config, an empty value will reset all resolution
7281 information to the empty list.</p></div>
7282 </dd>
7283 <dt class="hdlist1">
7284 http.sslVersion
7285 </dt>
7286 <dd>
7287 <p>
7288         The SSL version to use when negotiating an SSL connection, if you
7289         want to force the default.  The available and default version
7290         depend on whether libcurl was built against NSS or OpenSSL and the
7291         particular configuration of the crypto library in use. Internally
7292         this sets the <em>CURLOPT_SSL_VERSION</em> option; see the libcurl
7293         documentation for more details on the format of this option and
7294         for the ssl version supported. Currently the possible values of
7295         this option are:
7296 </p>
7297 <div class="ulist"><ul>
7298 <li>
7299 <p>
7300 sslv2
7301 </p>
7302 </li>
7303 <li>
7304 <p>
7305 sslv3
7306 </p>
7307 </li>
7308 <li>
7309 <p>
7310 tlsv1
7311 </p>
7312 </li>
7313 <li>
7314 <p>
7315 tlsv1.0
7316 </p>
7317 </li>
7318 <li>
7319 <p>
7320 tlsv1.1
7321 </p>
7322 </li>
7323 <li>
7324 <p>
7325 tlsv1.2
7326 </p>
7327 </li>
7328 <li>
7329 <p>
7330 tlsv1.3
7331 </p>
7332 </li>
7333 </ul></div>
7334 <div class="paragraph"><p>Can be overridden by the <code>GIT_SSL_VERSION</code> environment variable.
7335 To force git to use libcurl&#8217;s default ssl version and ignore any
7336 explicit http.sslversion option, set <code>GIT_SSL_VERSION</code> to the
7337 empty string.</p></div>
7338 </dd>
7339 <dt class="hdlist1">
7340 http.sslCipherList
7341 </dt>
7342 <dd>
7343 <p>
7344   A list of SSL ciphers to use when negotiating an SSL connection.
7345   The available ciphers depend on whether libcurl was built against
7346   NSS or OpenSSL and the particular configuration of the crypto
7347   library in use.  Internally this sets the <em>CURLOPT_SSL_CIPHER_LIST</em>
7348   option; see the libcurl documentation for more details on the format
7349   of this list.
7350 </p>
7351 <div class="paragraph"><p>Can be overridden by the <code>GIT_SSL_CIPHER_LIST</code> environment variable.
7352 To force git to use libcurl&#8217;s default cipher list and ignore any
7353 explicit http.sslCipherList option, set <code>GIT_SSL_CIPHER_LIST</code> to the
7354 empty string.</p></div>
7355 </dd>
7356 <dt class="hdlist1">
7357 http.sslVerify
7358 </dt>
7359 <dd>
7360 <p>
7361         Whether to verify the SSL certificate when fetching or pushing
7362         over HTTPS. Defaults to true. Can be overridden by the
7363         <code>GIT_SSL_NO_VERIFY</code> environment variable.
7364 </p>
7365 </dd>
7366 <dt class="hdlist1">
7367 http.sslCert
7368 </dt>
7369 <dd>
7370 <p>
7371         File containing the SSL certificate when fetching or pushing
7372         over HTTPS. Can be overridden by the <code>GIT_SSL_CERT</code> environment
7373         variable.
7374 </p>
7375 </dd>
7376 <dt class="hdlist1">
7377 http.sslKey
7378 </dt>
7379 <dd>
7380 <p>
7381         File containing the SSL private key when fetching or pushing
7382         over HTTPS. Can be overridden by the <code>GIT_SSL_KEY</code> environment
7383         variable.
7384 </p>
7385 </dd>
7386 <dt class="hdlist1">
7387 http.sslCertPasswordProtected
7388 </dt>
7389 <dd>
7390 <p>
7391         Enable Git&#8217;s password prompt for the SSL certificate.  Otherwise
7392         OpenSSL will prompt the user, possibly many times, if the
7393         certificate or private key is encrypted.  Can be overridden by the
7394         <code>GIT_SSL_CERT_PASSWORD_PROTECTED</code> environment variable.
7395 </p>
7396 </dd>
7397 <dt class="hdlist1">
7398 http.sslCAInfo
7399 </dt>
7400 <dd>
7401 <p>
7402         File containing the certificates to verify the peer with when
7403         fetching or pushing over HTTPS. Can be overridden by the
7404         <code>GIT_SSL_CAINFO</code> environment variable.
7405 </p>
7406 </dd>
7407 <dt class="hdlist1">
7408 http.sslCAPath
7409 </dt>
7410 <dd>
7411 <p>
7412         Path containing files with the CA certificates to verify the peer
7413         with when fetching or pushing over HTTPS. Can be overridden
7414         by the <code>GIT_SSL_CAPATH</code> environment variable.
7415 </p>
7416 </dd>
7417 <dt class="hdlist1">
7418 http.sslBackend
7419 </dt>
7420 <dd>
7421 <p>
7422         Name of the SSL backend to use (e.g. "openssl" or "schannel").
7423         This option is ignored if cURL lacks support for choosing the SSL
7424         backend at runtime.
7425 </p>
7426 </dd>
7427 <dt class="hdlist1">
7428 http.schannelCheckRevoke
7429 </dt>
7430 <dd>
7431 <p>
7432         Used to enforce or disable certificate revocation checks in cURL
7433         when http.sslBackend is set to "schannel". Defaults to <code>true</code> if
7434         unset. Only necessary to disable this if Git consistently errors
7435         and the message is about checking the revocation status of a
7436         certificate. This option is ignored if cURL lacks support for
7437         setting the relevant SSL option at runtime.
7438 </p>
7439 </dd>
7440 <dt class="hdlist1">
7441 http.schannelUseSSLCAInfo
7442 </dt>
7443 <dd>
7444 <p>
7445         As of cURL v7.60.0, the Secure Channel backend can use the
7446         certificate bundle provided via <code>http.sslCAInfo</code>, but that would
7447         override the Windows Certificate Store. Since this is not desirable
7448         by default, Git will tell cURL not to use that bundle by default
7449         when the <code>schannel</code> backend was configured via <code>http.sslBackend</code>,
7450         unless <code>http.schannelUseSSLCAInfo</code> overrides this behavior.
7451 </p>
7452 </dd>
7453 <dt class="hdlist1">
7454 http.pinnedPubkey
7455 </dt>
7456 <dd>
7457 <p>
7458         Public key of the https service. It may either be the filename of
7459         a PEM or DER encoded public key file or a string starting with
7460         <em>sha256//</em> followed by the base64 encoded sha256 hash of the
7461         public key. See also libcurl <em>CURLOPT_PINNEDPUBLICKEY</em>. git will
7462         exit with an error if this option is set but not supported by
7463         cURL.
7464 </p>
7465 </dd>
7466 <dt class="hdlist1">
7467 http.sslTry
7468 </dt>
7469 <dd>
7470 <p>
7471         Attempt to use AUTH SSL/TLS and encrypted data transfers
7472         when connecting via regular FTP protocol. This might be needed
7473         if the FTP server requires it for security reasons or you wish
7474         to connect securely whenever remote FTP server supports it.
7475         Default is false since it might trigger certificate verification
7476         errors on misconfigured servers.
7477 </p>
7478 </dd>
7479 <dt class="hdlist1">
7480 http.maxRequests
7481 </dt>
7482 <dd>
7483 <p>
7484         How many HTTP requests to launch in parallel. Can be overridden
7485         by the <code>GIT_HTTP_MAX_REQUESTS</code> environment variable. Default is 5.
7486 </p>
7487 </dd>
7488 <dt class="hdlist1">
7489 http.minSessions
7490 </dt>
7491 <dd>
7492 <p>
7493         The number of curl sessions (counted across slots) to be kept across
7494         requests. They will not be ended with curl_easy_cleanup() until
7495         http_cleanup() is invoked. If USE_CURL_MULTI is not defined, this
7496         value will be capped at 1. Defaults to 1.
7497 </p>
7498 </dd>
7499 <dt class="hdlist1">
7500 http.postBuffer
7501 </dt>
7502 <dd>
7503 <p>
7504         Maximum size in bytes of the buffer used by smart HTTP
7505         transports when POSTing data to the remote system.
7506         For requests larger than this buffer size, HTTP/1.1 and
7507         Transfer-Encoding: chunked is used to avoid creating a
7508         massive pack file locally.  Default is 1 MiB, which is
7509         sufficient for most requests.
7510 </p>
7511 <div class="paragraph"><p>Note that raising this limit is only effective for disabling chunked
7512 transfer encoding and therefore should be used only where the remote
7513 server or a proxy only supports HTTP/1.0 or is noncompliant with the
7514 HTTP standard.  Raising this is not, in general, an effective solution
7515 for most push problems, but can increase memory consumption
7516 significantly since the entire buffer is allocated even for small
7517 pushes.</p></div>
7518 </dd>
7519 <dt class="hdlist1">
7520 http.lowSpeedLimit, http.lowSpeedTime
7521 </dt>
7522 <dd>
7523 <p>
7524         If the HTTP transfer speed, in bytes per second, is less than
7525         <em>http.lowSpeedLimit</em> for longer than <em>http.lowSpeedTime</em> seconds,
7526         the transfer is aborted.
7527         Can be overridden by the <code>GIT_HTTP_LOW_SPEED_LIMIT</code> and
7528         <code>GIT_HTTP_LOW_SPEED_TIME</code> environment variables.
7529 </p>
7530 </dd>
7531 <dt class="hdlist1">
7532 http.noEPSV
7533 </dt>
7534 <dd>
7535 <p>
7536         A boolean which disables using of EPSV ftp command by curl.
7537         This can be helpful with some "poor" ftp servers which don&#8217;t
7538         support EPSV mode. Can be overridden by the <code>GIT_CURL_FTP_NO_EPSV</code>
7539         environment variable. Default is false (curl will use EPSV).
7540 </p>
7541 </dd>
7542 <dt class="hdlist1">
7543 http.userAgent
7544 </dt>
7545 <dd>
7546 <p>
7547         The HTTP USER_AGENT string presented to an HTTP server.  The default
7548         value represents the version of the Git client such as git/1.7.1.
7549         This option allows you to override this value to a more common value
7550         such as Mozilla/4.0.  This may be necessary, for instance, if
7551         connecting through a firewall that restricts HTTP connections to a set
7552         of common USER_AGENT strings (but not including those like git/1.7.1).
7553         Can be overridden by the <code>GIT_HTTP_USER_AGENT</code> environment variable.
7554 </p>
7555 </dd>
7556 <dt class="hdlist1">
7557 http.followRedirects
7558 </dt>
7559 <dd>
7560 <p>
7561         Whether git should follow HTTP redirects. If set to <code>true</code>, git
7562         will transparently follow any redirect issued by a server it
7563         encounters. If set to <code>false</code>, git will treat all redirects as
7564         errors. If set to <code>initial</code>, git will follow redirects only for
7565         the initial request to a remote, but not for subsequent
7566         follow-up HTTP requests. Since git uses the redirected URL as
7567         the base for the follow-up requests, this is generally
7568         sufficient. The default is <code>initial</code>.
7569 </p>
7570 </dd>
7571 <dt class="hdlist1">
7572 http.&lt;url&gt;.*
7573 </dt>
7574 <dd>
7575 <p>
7576         Any of the http.* options above can be applied selectively to some URLs.
7577         For a config key to match a URL, each element of the config key is
7578         compared to that of the URL, in the following order:
7579 </p>
7580 <div class="openblock">
7581 <div class="content">
7582 <div class="olist arabic"><ol class="arabic">
7583 <li>
7584 <p>
7585 Scheme (e.g., <code>https</code> in <code>https://example.com/</code>). This field
7586   must match exactly between the config key and the URL.
7587 </p>
7588 </li>
7589 <li>
7590 <p>
7591 Host/domain name (e.g., <code>example.com</code> in <code>https://example.com/</code>).
7592   This field must match between the config key and the URL. It is
7593   possible to specify a <code>*</code> as part of the host name to match all subdomains
7594   at this level. <code>https://*.example.com/</code> for example would match
7595   <code>https://foo.example.com/</code>, but not <code>https://foo.bar.example.com/</code>.
7596 </p>
7597 </li>
7598 <li>
7599 <p>
7600 Port number (e.g., <code>8080</code> in <code>http://example.com:8080/</code>).
7601   This field must match exactly between the config key and the URL.
7602   Omitted port numbers are automatically converted to the correct
7603   default for the scheme before matching.
7604 </p>
7605 </li>
7606 <li>
7607 <p>
7608 Path (e.g., <code>repo.git</code> in <code>https://example.com/repo.git</code>). The
7609   path field of the config key must match the path field of the URL
7610   either exactly or as a prefix of slash-delimited path elements.  This means
7611   a config key with path <code>foo/</code> matches URL path <code>foo/bar</code>.  A prefix can only
7612   match on a slash (<code>/</code>) boundary.  Longer matches take precedence (so a config
7613   key with path <code>foo/bar</code> is a better match to URL path <code>foo/bar</code> than a config
7614   key with just path <code>foo/</code>).
7615 </p>
7616 </li>
7617 <li>
7618 <p>
7619 User name (e.g., <code>user</code> in <code>https://user@example.com/repo.git</code>). If
7620   the config key has a user name it must match the user name in the
7621   URL exactly. If the config key does not have a user name, that
7622   config key will match a URL with any user name (including none),
7623   but at a lower precedence than a config key with a user name.
7624 </p>
7625 </li>
7626 </ol></div>
7627 </div></div>
7628 <div class="paragraph"><p>The list above is ordered by decreasing precedence; a URL that matches
7629 a config key&#8217;s path is preferred to one that matches its user name. For example,
7630 if the URL is <code>https://user@example.com/foo/bar</code> a config key match of
7631 <code>https://example.com/foo</code> will be preferred over a config key match of
7632 <code>https://user@example.com</code>.</p></div>
7633 <div class="paragraph"><p>All URLs are normalized before attempting any matching (the password part,
7634 if embedded in the URL, is always ignored for matching purposes) so that
7635 equivalent URLs that are simply spelled differently will match properly.
7636 Environment variable settings always override any matches.  The URLs that are
7637 matched against are those given directly to Git commands.  This means any URLs
7638 visited as a result of a redirection do not participate in matching.</p></div>
7639 </dd>
7640 <dt class="hdlist1">
7641 i18n.commitEncoding
7642 </dt>
7643 <dd>
7644 <p>
7645         Character encoding the commit messages are stored in; Git itself
7646         does not care per se, but this information is necessary e.g. when
7647         importing commits from emails or in the gitk graphical history
7648         browser (and possibly in other places in the future or in other
7649         porcelains). See e.g. <a href="git-mailinfo.html">git-mailinfo(1)</a>. Defaults to <em>utf-8</em>.
7650 </p>
7651 </dd>
7652 <dt class="hdlist1">
7653 i18n.logOutputEncoding
7654 </dt>
7655 <dd>
7656 <p>
7657         Character encoding the commit messages are converted to when
7658         running <em>git log</em> and friends.
7659 </p>
7660 </dd>
7661 <dt class="hdlist1">
7662 imap.folder
7663 </dt>
7664 <dd>
7665 <p>
7666         The folder to drop the mails into, which is typically the Drafts
7667         folder. For example: "INBOX.Drafts", "INBOX/Drafts" or
7668         "[Gmail]/Drafts". Required.
7669 </p>
7670 </dd>
7671 <dt class="hdlist1">
7672 imap.tunnel
7673 </dt>
7674 <dd>
7675 <p>
7676         Command used to set up a tunnel to the IMAP server through which
7677         commands will be piped instead of using a direct network connection
7678         to the server. Required when imap.host is not set.
7679 </p>
7680 </dd>
7681 <dt class="hdlist1">
7682 imap.host
7683 </dt>
7684 <dd>
7685 <p>
7686         A URL identifying the server. Use an <code>imap://</code> prefix for non-secure
7687         connections and an <code>imaps://</code> prefix for secure connections.
7688         Ignored when imap.tunnel is set, but required otherwise.
7689 </p>
7690 </dd>
7691 <dt class="hdlist1">
7692 imap.user
7693 </dt>
7694 <dd>
7695 <p>
7696         The username to use when logging in to the server.
7697 </p>
7698 </dd>
7699 <dt class="hdlist1">
7700 imap.pass
7701 </dt>
7702 <dd>
7703 <p>
7704         The password to use when logging in to the server.
7705 </p>
7706 </dd>
7707 <dt class="hdlist1">
7708 imap.port
7709 </dt>
7710 <dd>
7711 <p>
7712         An integer port number to connect to on the server.
7713         Defaults to 143 for imap:// hosts and 993 for imaps:// hosts.
7714         Ignored when imap.tunnel is set.
7715 </p>
7716 </dd>
7717 <dt class="hdlist1">
7718 imap.sslverify
7719 </dt>
7720 <dd>
7721 <p>
7722         A boolean to enable/disable verification of the server certificate
7723         used by the SSL/TLS connection. Default is <code>true</code>. Ignored when
7724         imap.tunnel is set.
7725 </p>
7726 </dd>
7727 <dt class="hdlist1">
7728 imap.preformattedHTML
7729 </dt>
7730 <dd>
7731 <p>
7732         A boolean to enable/disable the use of html encoding when sending
7733         a patch.  An html encoded patch will be bracketed with &lt;pre&gt;
7734         and have a content type of text/html.  Ironically, enabling this
7735         option causes Thunderbird to send the patch as a plain/text,
7736         format=fixed email.  Default is <code>false</code>.
7737 </p>
7738 </dd>
7739 <dt class="hdlist1">
7740 imap.authMethod
7741 </dt>
7742 <dd>
7743 <p>
7744         Specify the authentication method for authenticating with the IMAP server.
7745         If Git was built with the NO_CURL option, or if your curl version is older
7746         than 7.34.0, or if you&#8217;re running git-imap-send with the <code>--no-curl</code>
7747         option, the only supported method is <em>CRAM-MD5</em>. If this is not set
7748         then <em>git imap-send</em> uses the basic IMAP plaintext LOGIN command.
7749 </p>
7750 </dd>
7751 <dt class="hdlist1">
7752 include.path
7753 </dt>
7754 <dt class="hdlist1">
7755 includeIf.&lt;condition&gt;.path
7756 </dt>
7757 <dd>
7758 <p>
7759         Special variables to include other configuration files. See
7760         the "CONFIGURATION FILE" section in the main
7761         <a href="git-config.html">git-config(1)</a> documentation,
7762         specifically the "Includes" and "Conditional Includes" subsections.
7763 </p>
7764 </dd>
7765 <dt class="hdlist1">
7766 index.recordEndOfIndexEntries
7767 </dt>
7768 <dd>
7769 <p>
7770         Specifies whether the index file should include an "End Of Index
7771         Entry" section. This reduces index load time on multiprocessor
7772         machines but produces a message "ignoring EOIE extension" when
7773         reading the index using Git versions before 2.20. Defaults to
7774         <em>true</em> if index.threads has been explicitly enabled, <em>false</em>
7775         otherwise.
7776 </p>
7777 </dd>
7778 <dt class="hdlist1">
7779 index.recordOffsetTable
7780 </dt>
7781 <dd>
7782 <p>
7783         Specifies whether the index file should include an "Index Entry
7784         Offset Table" section. This reduces index load time on
7785         multiprocessor machines but produces a message "ignoring IEOT
7786         extension" when reading the index using Git versions before 2.20.
7787         Defaults to <em>true</em> if index.threads has been explicitly enabled,
7788         <em>false</em> otherwise.
7789 </p>
7790 </dd>
7791 <dt class="hdlist1">
7792 index.sparse
7793 </dt>
7794 <dd>
7795 <p>
7796         When enabled, write the index using sparse-directory entries. This
7797         has no effect unless <code>core.sparseCheckout</code> and
7798         <code>core.sparseCheckoutCone</code> are both enabled. Defaults to <em>false</em>.
7799 </p>
7800 </dd>
7801 <dt class="hdlist1">
7802 index.threads
7803 </dt>
7804 <dd>
7805 <p>
7806         Specifies the number of threads to spawn when loading the index.
7807         This is meant to reduce index load time on multiprocessor machines.
7808         Specifying 0 or <em>true</em> will cause Git to auto-detect the number of
7809         CPUs and set the number of threads accordingly. Specifying 1 or
7810         <em>false</em> will disable multithreading. Defaults to <em>true</em>.
7811 </p>
7812 </dd>
7813 <dt class="hdlist1">
7814 index.version
7815 </dt>
7816 <dd>
7817 <p>
7818         Specify the version with which new index files should be
7819         initialized.  This does not affect existing repositories.
7820         If <code>feature.manyFiles</code> is enabled, then the default is 4.
7821 </p>
7822 </dd>
7823 <dt class="hdlist1">
7824 index.skipHash
7825 </dt>
7826 <dd>
7827 <p>
7828         When enabled, do not compute the trailing hash for the index file.
7829         This accelerates Git commands that manipulate the index, such as
7830         <code>git add</code>, <code>git commit</code>, or <code>git status</code>. Instead of storing the
7831         checksum, write a trailing set of bytes with value zero, indicating
7832         that the computation was skipped.
7833 </p>
7834 <div class="paragraph"><p>If you enable <code>index.skipHash</code>, then Git clients older than 2.13.0 will
7835 refuse to parse the index and Git clients older than 2.40.0 will report an
7836 error during <code>git fsck</code>.</p></div>
7837 </dd>
7838 <dt class="hdlist1">
7839 init.templateDir
7840 </dt>
7841 <dd>
7842 <p>
7843         Specify the directory from which templates will be copied.
7844         (See the "TEMPLATE DIRECTORY" section of <a href="git-init.html">git-init(1)</a>.)
7845 </p>
7846 </dd>
7847 <dt class="hdlist1">
7848 init.defaultBranch
7849 </dt>
7850 <dd>
7851 <p>
7852         Allows overriding the default branch name e.g. when initializing
7853         a new repository.
7854 </p>
7855 </dd>
7856 <dt class="hdlist1">
7857 instaweb.browser
7858 </dt>
7859 <dd>
7860 <p>
7861         Specify the program that will be used to browse your working
7862         repository in gitweb. See <a href="git-instaweb.html">git-instaweb(1)</a>.
7863 </p>
7864 </dd>
7865 <dt class="hdlist1">
7866 instaweb.httpd
7867 </dt>
7868 <dd>
7869 <p>
7870         The HTTP daemon command-line to start gitweb on your working
7871         repository. See <a href="git-instaweb.html">git-instaweb(1)</a>.
7872 </p>
7873 </dd>
7874 <dt class="hdlist1">
7875 instaweb.local
7876 </dt>
7877 <dd>
7878 <p>
7879         If true the web server started by <a href="git-instaweb.html">git-instaweb(1)</a> will
7880         be bound to the local IP (127.0.0.1).
7881 </p>
7882 </dd>
7883 <dt class="hdlist1">
7884 instaweb.modulePath
7885 </dt>
7886 <dd>
7887 <p>
7888         The default module path for <a href="git-instaweb.html">git-instaweb(1)</a> to use
7889         instead of /usr/lib/apache2/modules.  Only used if httpd
7890         is Apache.
7891 </p>
7892 </dd>
7893 <dt class="hdlist1">
7894 instaweb.port
7895 </dt>
7896 <dd>
7897 <p>
7898         The port number to bind the gitweb httpd to. See
7899         <a href="git-instaweb.html">git-instaweb(1)</a>.
7900 </p>
7901 </dd>
7902 <dt class="hdlist1">
7903 interactive.singleKey
7904 </dt>
7905 <dd>
7906 <p>
7907         In interactive commands, allow the user to provide one-letter
7908         input with a single key (i.e., without hitting enter).
7909         Currently this is used by the <code>--patch</code> mode of
7910         <a href="git-add.html">git-add(1)</a>, <a href="git-checkout.html">git-checkout(1)</a>,
7911         <a href="git-restore.html">git-restore(1)</a>, <a href="git-commit.html">git-commit(1)</a>,
7912         <a href="git-reset.html">git-reset(1)</a>, and <a href="git-stash.html">git-stash(1)</a>. Note that this
7913         setting is silently ignored if portable keystroke input
7914         is not available; requires the Perl module Term::ReadKey.
7915 </p>
7916 </dd>
7917 <dt class="hdlist1">
7918 interactive.diffFilter
7919 </dt>
7920 <dd>
7921 <p>
7922         When an interactive command (such as <code>git add --patch</code>) shows
7923         a colorized diff, git will pipe the diff through the shell
7924         command defined by this configuration variable. The command may
7925         mark up the diff further for human consumption, provided that it
7926         retains a one-to-one correspondence with the lines in the
7927         original diff. Defaults to disabled (no filtering).
7928 </p>
7929 </dd>
7930 <dt class="hdlist1">
7931 log.abbrevCommit
7932 </dt>
7933 <dd>
7934 <p>
7935         If true, makes <a href="git-log.html">git-log(1)</a>, <a href="git-show.html">git-show(1)</a>, and
7936         <a href="git-whatchanged.html">git-whatchanged(1)</a> assume <code>--abbrev-commit</code>. You may
7937         override this option with <code>--no-abbrev-commit</code>.
7938 </p>
7939 </dd>
7940 <dt class="hdlist1">
7941 log.date
7942 </dt>
7943 <dd>
7944 <p>
7945         Set the default date-time mode for the <em>log</em> command.
7946         Setting a value for log.date is similar to using <em>git log</em>'s
7947         <code>--date</code> option.  See <a href="git-log.html">git-log(1)</a> for details.
7948 </p>
7949 <div class="paragraph"><p>If the format is set to "auto:foo" and the pager is in use, format
7950 "foo" will be used for the date format. Otherwise, "default" will
7951 be used.</p></div>
7952 </dd>
7953 <dt class="hdlist1">
7954 log.decorate
7955 </dt>
7956 <dd>
7957 <p>
7958         Print out the ref names of any commits that are shown by the log
7959         command. If <em>short</em> is specified, the ref name prefixes <em>refs/heads/</em>,
7960         <em>refs/tags/</em> and <em>refs/remotes/</em> will not be printed. If <em>full</em> is
7961         specified, the full ref name (including prefix) will be printed.
7962         If <em>auto</em> is specified, then if the output is going to a terminal,
7963         the ref names are shown as if <em>short</em> were given, otherwise no ref
7964         names are shown. This is the same as the <code>--decorate</code> option
7965         of the <code>git log</code>.
7966 </p>
7967 </dd>
7968 <dt class="hdlist1">
7969 log.initialDecorationSet
7970 </dt>
7971 <dd>
7972 <p>
7973         By default, <code>git log</code> only shows decorations for certain known ref
7974         namespaces. If <em>all</em> is specified, then show all refs as
7975         decorations.
7976 </p>
7977 </dd>
7978 <dt class="hdlist1">
7979 log.excludeDecoration
7980 </dt>
7981 <dd>
7982 <p>
7983         Exclude the specified patterns from the log decorations. This is
7984         similar to the <code>--decorate-refs-exclude</code> command-line option, but
7985         the config option can be overridden by the <code>--decorate-refs</code>
7986         option.
7987 </p>
7988 </dd>
7989 <dt class="hdlist1">
7990 log.diffMerges
7991 </dt>
7992 <dd>
7993 <p>
7994         Set diff format to be used when <code>--diff-merges=on</code> is
7995         specified, see <code>--diff-merges</code> in <a href="git-log.html">git-log(1)</a> for
7996         details. Defaults to <code>separate</code>.
7997 </p>
7998 </dd>
7999 <dt class="hdlist1">
8000 log.follow
8001 </dt>
8002 <dd>
8003 <p>
8004         If <code>true</code>, <code>git log</code> will act as if the <code>--follow</code> option was used when
8005         a single &lt;path&gt; is given.  This has the same limitations as <code>--follow</code>,
8006         i.e. it cannot be used to follow multiple files and does not work well
8007         on non-linear history.
8008 </p>
8009 </dd>
8010 <dt class="hdlist1">
8011 log.graphColors
8012 </dt>
8013 <dd>
8014 <p>
8015         A list of colors, separated by commas, that can be used to draw
8016         history lines in <code>git log --graph</code>.
8017 </p>
8018 </dd>
8019 <dt class="hdlist1">
8020 log.showRoot
8021 </dt>
8022 <dd>
8023 <p>
8024         If true, the initial commit will be shown as a big creation event.
8025         This is equivalent to a diff against an empty tree.
8026         Tools like <a href="git-log.html">git-log(1)</a> or <a href="git-whatchanged.html">git-whatchanged(1)</a>, which
8027         normally hide the root commit will now show it. True by default.
8028 </p>
8029 </dd>
8030 <dt class="hdlist1">
8031 log.showSignature
8032 </dt>
8033 <dd>
8034 <p>
8035         If true, makes <a href="git-log.html">git-log(1)</a>, <a href="git-show.html">git-show(1)</a>, and
8036         <a href="git-whatchanged.html">git-whatchanged(1)</a> assume <code>--show-signature</code>.
8037 </p>
8038 </dd>
8039 <dt class="hdlist1">
8040 log.mailmap
8041 </dt>
8042 <dd>
8043 <p>
8044         If true, makes <a href="git-log.html">git-log(1)</a>, <a href="git-show.html">git-show(1)</a>, and
8045         <a href="git-whatchanged.html">git-whatchanged(1)</a> assume <code>--use-mailmap</code>, otherwise
8046         assume <code>--no-use-mailmap</code>. True by default.
8047 </p>
8048 </dd>
8049 <dt class="hdlist1">
8050 lsrefs.unborn
8051 </dt>
8052 <dd>
8053 <p>
8054         May be "advertise" (the default), "allow", or "ignore". If "advertise",
8055         the server will respond to the client sending "unborn" (as described in
8056         <a href="gitprotocol-v2.html">gitprotocol-v2(5)</a>) and will advertise support for this feature during the
8057         protocol v2 capability advertisement. "allow" is the same as
8058         "advertise" except that the server will not advertise support for this
8059         feature; this is useful for load-balanced servers that cannot be
8060         updated atomically (for example), since the administrator could
8061         configure "allow", then after a delay, configure "advertise".
8062 </p>
8063 </dd>
8064 <dt class="hdlist1">
8065 mailinfo.scissors
8066 </dt>
8067 <dd>
8068 <p>
8069         If true, makes <a href="git-mailinfo.html">git-mailinfo(1)</a> (and therefore
8070         <a href="git-am.html">git-am(1)</a>) act by default as if the --scissors option
8071         was provided on the command-line. When active, this feature
8072         removes everything from the message body before a scissors
8073         line (i.e. consisting mainly of "&gt;8", "8&lt;" and "-").
8074 </p>
8075 </dd>
8076 <dt class="hdlist1">
8077 mailmap.file
8078 </dt>
8079 <dd>
8080 <p>
8081         The location of an augmenting mailmap file. The default
8082         mailmap, located in the root of the repository, is loaded
8083         first, then the mailmap file pointed to by this variable.
8084         The location of the mailmap file may be in a repository
8085         subdirectory, or somewhere outside of the repository itself.
8086         See <a href="git-shortlog.html">git-shortlog(1)</a> and <a href="git-blame.html">git-blame(1)</a>.
8087 </p>
8088 </dd>
8089 <dt class="hdlist1">
8090 mailmap.blob
8091 </dt>
8092 <dd>
8093 <p>
8094         Like <code>mailmap.file</code>, but consider the value as a reference to a
8095         blob in the repository. If both <code>mailmap.file</code> and
8096         <code>mailmap.blob</code> are given, both are parsed, with entries from
8097         <code>mailmap.file</code> taking precedence. In a bare repository, this
8098         defaults to <code>HEAD:.mailmap</code>. In a non-bare repository, it
8099         defaults to empty.
8100 </p>
8101 </dd>
8102 <dt class="hdlist1">
8103 maintenance.auto
8104 </dt>
8105 <dd>
8106 <p>
8107         This boolean config option controls whether some commands run
8108         <code>git maintenance run --auto</code> after doing their normal work. Defaults
8109         to true.
8110 </p>
8111 </dd>
8112 <dt class="hdlist1">
8113 maintenance.strategy
8114 </dt>
8115 <dd>
8116 <p>
8117         This string config option provides a way to specify one of a few
8118         recommended schedules for background maintenance. This only affects
8119         which tasks are run during <code>git maintenance run --schedule=X</code>
8120         commands, provided no <code>--task=&lt;task&gt;</code> arguments are provided.
8121         Further, if a <code>maintenance.&lt;task&gt;.schedule</code> config value is set,
8122         then that value is used instead of the one provided by
8123         <code>maintenance.strategy</code>. The possible strategy strings are:
8124 </p>
8125 <div class="ulist"><ul>
8126 <li>
8127 <p>
8128 <code>none</code>: This default setting implies no tasks are run at any schedule.
8129 </p>
8130 </li>
8131 <li>
8132 <p>
8133 <code>incremental</code>: This setting optimizes for performing small maintenance
8134   activities that do not delete any data. This does not schedule the <code>gc</code>
8135   task, but runs the <code>prefetch</code> and <code>commit-graph</code> tasks hourly, the
8136   <code>loose-objects</code> and <code>incremental-repack</code> tasks daily, and the <code>pack-refs</code>
8137   task weekly.
8138 </p>
8139 </li>
8140 </ul></div>
8141 </dd>
8142 <dt class="hdlist1">
8143 maintenance.&lt;task&gt;.enabled
8144 </dt>
8145 <dd>
8146 <p>
8147         This boolean config option controls whether the maintenance task
8148         with name <code>&lt;task&gt;</code> is run when no <code>--task</code> option is specified to
8149         <code>git maintenance run</code>. These config values are ignored if a
8150         <code>--task</code> option exists. By default, only <code>maintenance.gc.enabled</code>
8151         is true.
8152 </p>
8153 </dd>
8154 <dt class="hdlist1">
8155 maintenance.&lt;task&gt;.schedule
8156 </dt>
8157 <dd>
8158 <p>
8159         This config option controls whether or not the given <code>&lt;task&gt;</code> runs
8160         during a <code>git maintenance run --schedule=&lt;frequency&gt;</code> command. The
8161         value must be one of "hourly", "daily", or "weekly".
8162 </p>
8163 </dd>
8164 <dt class="hdlist1">
8165 maintenance.commit-graph.auto
8166 </dt>
8167 <dd>
8168 <p>
8169         This integer config option controls how often the <code>commit-graph</code> task
8170         should be run as part of <code>git maintenance run --auto</code>. If zero, then
8171         the <code>commit-graph</code> task will not run with the <code>--auto</code> option. A
8172         negative value will force the task to run every time. Otherwise, a
8173         positive value implies the command should run when the number of
8174         reachable commits that are not in the commit-graph file is at least
8175         the value of <code>maintenance.commit-graph.auto</code>. The default value is
8176         100.
8177 </p>
8178 </dd>
8179 <dt class="hdlist1">
8180 maintenance.loose-objects.auto
8181 </dt>
8182 <dd>
8183 <p>
8184         This integer config option controls how often the <code>loose-objects</code> task
8185         should be run as part of <code>git maintenance run --auto</code>. If zero, then
8186         the <code>loose-objects</code> task will not run with the <code>--auto</code> option. A
8187         negative value will force the task to run every time. Otherwise, a
8188         positive value implies the command should run when the number of
8189         loose objects is at least the value of <code>maintenance.loose-objects.auto</code>.
8190         The default value is 100.
8191 </p>
8192 </dd>
8193 <dt class="hdlist1">
8194 maintenance.incremental-repack.auto
8195 </dt>
8196 <dd>
8197 <p>
8198         This integer config option controls how often the <code>incremental-repack</code>
8199         task should be run as part of <code>git maintenance run --auto</code>. If zero,
8200         then the <code>incremental-repack</code> task will not run with the <code>--auto</code>
8201         option. A negative value will force the task to run every time.
8202         Otherwise, a positive value implies the command should run when the
8203         number of pack-files not in the multi-pack-index is at least the value
8204         of <code>maintenance.incremental-repack.auto</code>. The default value is 10.
8205 </p>
8206 </dd>
8207 <dt class="hdlist1">
8208 man.viewer
8209 </dt>
8210 <dd>
8211 <p>
8212         Specify the programs that may be used to display help in the
8213         <em>man</em> format. See <a href="git-help.html">git-help(1)</a>.
8214 </p>
8215 </dd>
8216 <dt class="hdlist1">
8217 man.&lt;tool&gt;.cmd
8218 </dt>
8219 <dd>
8220 <p>
8221         Specify the command to invoke the specified man viewer. The
8222         specified command is evaluated in shell with the man page
8223         passed as an argument. (See <a href="git-help.html">git-help(1)</a>.)
8224 </p>
8225 </dd>
8226 <dt class="hdlist1">
8227 man.&lt;tool&gt;.path
8228 </dt>
8229 <dd>
8230 <p>
8231         Override the path for the given tool that may be used to
8232         display help in the <em>man</em> format. See <a href="git-help.html">git-help(1)</a>.
8233 </p>
8234 </dd>
8235 <dt class="hdlist1">
8236 merge.conflictStyle
8237 </dt>
8238 <dd>
8239 <p>
8240         Specify the style in which conflicted hunks are written out to
8241         working tree files upon merge.  The default is "merge", which
8242         shows a <code>&lt;&lt;&lt;&lt;&lt;&lt;&lt;</code> conflict marker, changes made by one side,
8243         a <code>=======</code> marker, changes made by the other side, and then
8244         a <code>&gt;&gt;&gt;&gt;&gt;&gt;&gt;</code> marker.  An alternate style, "diff3", adds a <code>|||||||</code>
8245         marker and the original text before the <code>=======</code> marker.  The
8246         "merge" style tends to produce smaller conflict regions than diff3,
8247         both because of the exclusion of the original text, and because
8248         when a subset of lines match on the two sides, they are just pulled
8249         out of the conflict region.  Another alternate style, "zdiff3", is
8250         similar to diff3 but removes matching lines on the two sides from
8251         the conflict region when those matching lines appear near either
8252         the beginning or end of a conflict region.
8253 </p>
8254 </dd>
8255 <dt class="hdlist1">
8256 merge.defaultToUpstream
8257 </dt>
8258 <dd>
8259 <p>
8260         If merge is called without any commit argument, merge the upstream
8261         branches configured for the current branch by using their last
8262         observed values stored in their remote-tracking branches.
8263         The values of the <code>branch.&lt;current branch&gt;.merge</code> that name the
8264         branches at the remote named by <code>branch.&lt;current branch&gt;.remote</code>
8265         are consulted, and then they are mapped via <code>remote.&lt;remote&gt;.fetch</code>
8266         to their corresponding remote-tracking branches, and the tips of
8267         these tracking branches are merged. Defaults to true.
8268 </p>
8269 </dd>
8270 <dt class="hdlist1">
8271 merge.ff
8272 </dt>
8273 <dd>
8274 <p>
8275         By default, Git does not create an extra merge commit when merging
8276         a commit that is a descendant of the current commit. Instead, the
8277         tip of the current branch is fast-forwarded. When set to <code>false</code>,
8278         this variable tells Git to create an extra merge commit in such
8279         a case (equivalent to giving the <code>--no-ff</code> option from the command
8280         line). When set to <code>only</code>, only such fast-forward merges are
8281         allowed (equivalent to giving the <code>--ff-only</code> option from the
8282         command line).
8283 </p>
8284 </dd>
8285 <dt class="hdlist1">
8286 merge.verifySignatures
8287 </dt>
8288 <dd>
8289 <p>
8290         If true, this is equivalent to the --verify-signatures command
8291         line option. See <a href="git-merge.html">git-merge(1)</a> for details.
8292 </p>
8293 </dd>
8294 <dt class="hdlist1">
8295 merge.branchdesc
8296 </dt>
8297 <dd>
8298 <p>
8299         In addition to branch names, populate the log message with
8300         the branch description text associated with them.  Defaults
8301         to false.
8302 </p>
8303 </dd>
8304 <dt class="hdlist1">
8305 merge.log
8306 </dt>
8307 <dd>
8308 <p>
8309         In addition to branch names, populate the log message with at
8310         most the specified number of one-line descriptions from the
8311         actual commits that are being merged.  Defaults to false, and
8312         true is a synonym for 20.
8313 </p>
8314 </dd>
8315 <dt class="hdlist1">
8316 merge.suppressDest
8317 </dt>
8318 <dd>
8319 <p>
8320         By adding a glob that matches the names of integration
8321         branches to this multi-valued configuration variable, the
8322         default merge message computed for merges into these
8323         integration branches will omit "into &lt;branch name&gt;" from
8324         its title.
8325 </p>
8326 <div class="paragraph"><p>An element with an empty value can be used to clear the list
8327 of globs accumulated from previous configuration entries.
8328 When there is no <code>merge.suppressDest</code> variable defined, the
8329 default value of <code>master</code> is used for backward compatibility.</p></div>
8330 </dd>
8331 <dt class="hdlist1">
8332 merge.renameLimit
8333 </dt>
8334 <dd>
8335 <p>
8336         The number of files to consider in the exhaustive portion of
8337         rename detection during a merge.  If not specified, defaults
8338         to the value of diff.renameLimit.  If neither
8339         merge.renameLimit nor diff.renameLimit are specified,
8340         currently defaults to 7000.  This setting has no effect if
8341         rename detection is turned off.
8342 </p>
8343 </dd>
8344 <dt class="hdlist1">
8345 merge.renames
8346 </dt>
8347 <dd>
8348 <p>
8349         Whether Git detects renames.  If set to "false", rename detection
8350         is disabled. If set to "true", basic rename detection is enabled.
8351         Defaults to the value of diff.renames.
8352 </p>
8353 </dd>
8354 <dt class="hdlist1">
8355 merge.directoryRenames
8356 </dt>
8357 <dd>
8358 <p>
8359         Whether Git detects directory renames, affecting what happens at
8360         merge time to new files added to a directory on one side of
8361         history when that directory was renamed on the other side of
8362         history.  If merge.directoryRenames is set to "false", directory
8363         rename detection is disabled, meaning that such new files will be
8364         left behind in the old directory.  If set to "true", directory
8365         rename detection is enabled, meaning that such new files will be
8366         moved into the new directory.  If set to "conflict", a conflict
8367         will be reported for such paths.  If merge.renames is false,
8368         merge.directoryRenames is ignored and treated as false.  Defaults
8369         to "conflict".
8370 </p>
8371 </dd>
8372 <dt class="hdlist1">
8373 merge.renormalize
8374 </dt>
8375 <dd>
8376 <p>
8377         Tell Git that canonical representation of files in the
8378         repository has changed over time (e.g. earlier commits record
8379         text files with CRLF line endings, but recent ones use LF line
8380         endings).  In such a repository, Git can convert the data
8381         recorded in commits to a canonical form before performing a
8382         merge to reduce unnecessary conflicts.  For more information,
8383         see section "Merging branches with differing checkin/checkout
8384         attributes" in <a href="gitattributes.html">gitattributes(5)</a>.
8385 </p>
8386 </dd>
8387 <dt class="hdlist1">
8388 merge.stat
8389 </dt>
8390 <dd>
8391 <p>
8392         Whether to print the diffstat between ORIG_HEAD and the merge result
8393         at the end of the merge.  True by default.
8394 </p>
8395 </dd>
8396 <dt class="hdlist1">
8397 merge.autoStash
8398 </dt>
8399 <dd>
8400 <p>
8401         When set to true, automatically create a temporary stash entry
8402         before the operation begins, and apply it after the operation
8403         ends.  This means that you can run merge on a dirty worktree.
8404         However, use with care: the final stash application after a
8405         successful merge might result in non-trivial conflicts.
8406         This option can be overridden by the <code>--no-autostash</code> and
8407         <code>--autostash</code> options of <a href="git-merge.html">git-merge(1)</a>.
8408         Defaults to false.
8409 </p>
8410 </dd>
8411 <dt class="hdlist1">
8412 merge.tool
8413 </dt>
8414 <dd>
8415 <p>
8416         Controls which merge tool is used by <a href="git-mergetool.html">git-mergetool(1)</a>.
8417         The list below shows the valid built-in values.
8418         Any other value is treated as a custom merge tool and requires
8419         that a corresponding mergetool.&lt;tool&gt;.cmd variable is defined.
8420 </p>
8421 </dd>
8422 <dt class="hdlist1">
8423 merge.guitool
8424 </dt>
8425 <dd>
8426 <p>
8427         Controls which merge tool is used by <a href="git-mergetool.html">git-mergetool(1)</a> when the
8428         -g/--gui flag is specified. The list below shows the valid built-in values.
8429         Any other value is treated as a custom merge tool and requires that a
8430         corresponding mergetool.&lt;guitool&gt;.cmd variable is defined.
8431 </p>
8432 <div class="dlist"><dl>
8433 <dt class="hdlist1">
8434 <code>araxis</code>
8435 </dt>
8436 <dd>
8437 <p>
8438 Use Araxis Merge (requires a graphical session)
8439 </p>
8440 </dd>
8441 <dt class="hdlist1">
8442 <code>bc</code>
8443 </dt>
8444 <dd>
8445 <p>
8446 Use Beyond Compare (requires a graphical session)
8447 </p>
8448 </dd>
8449 <dt class="hdlist1">
8450 <code>bc3</code>
8451 </dt>
8452 <dd>
8453 <p>
8454 Use Beyond Compare (requires a graphical session)
8455 </p>
8456 </dd>
8457 <dt class="hdlist1">
8458 <code>bc4</code>
8459 </dt>
8460 <dd>
8461 <p>
8462 Use Beyond Compare (requires a graphical session)
8463 </p>
8464 </dd>
8465 <dt class="hdlist1">
8466 <code>codecompare</code>
8467 </dt>
8468 <dd>
8469 <p>
8470 Use Code Compare (requires a graphical session)
8471 </p>
8472 </dd>
8473 <dt class="hdlist1">
8474 <code>deltawalker</code>
8475 </dt>
8476 <dd>
8477 <p>
8478 Use DeltaWalker (requires a graphical session)
8479 </p>
8480 </dd>
8481 <dt class="hdlist1">
8482 <code>diffmerge</code>
8483 </dt>
8484 <dd>
8485 <p>
8486 Use DiffMerge (requires a graphical session)
8487 </p>
8488 </dd>
8489 <dt class="hdlist1">
8490 <code>diffuse</code>
8491 </dt>
8492 <dd>
8493 <p>
8494 Use Diffuse (requires a graphical session)
8495 </p>
8496 </dd>
8497 <dt class="hdlist1">
8498 <code>ecmerge</code>
8499 </dt>
8500 <dd>
8501 <p>
8502 Use ECMerge (requires a graphical session)
8503 </p>
8504 </dd>
8505 <dt class="hdlist1">
8506 <code>emerge</code>
8507 </dt>
8508 <dd>
8509 <p>
8510 Use Emacs' Emerge
8511 </p>
8512 </dd>
8513 <dt class="hdlist1">
8514 <code>examdiff</code>
8515 </dt>
8516 <dd>
8517 <p>
8518 Use ExamDiff Pro (requires a graphical session)
8519 </p>
8520 </dd>
8521 <dt class="hdlist1">
8522 <code>guiffy</code>
8523 </dt>
8524 <dd>
8525 <p>
8526 Use Guiffy&#8217;s Diff Tool (requires a graphical session)
8527 </p>
8528 </dd>
8529 <dt class="hdlist1">
8530 <code>gvimdiff</code>
8531 </dt>
8532 <dd>
8533 <p>
8534 Use gVim (requires a graphical session) with a custom layout (see <code>git help mergetool</code>'s <code>BACKEND SPECIFIC HINTS</code> section)
8535 </p>
8536 </dd>
8537 <dt class="hdlist1">
8538 <code>gvimdiff1</code>
8539 </dt>
8540 <dd>
8541 <p>
8542 Use gVim (requires a graphical session) with a 2 panes layout (LOCAL and REMOTE)
8543 </p>
8544 </dd>
8545 <dt class="hdlist1">
8546 <code>gvimdiff2</code>
8547 </dt>
8548 <dd>
8549 <p>
8550 Use gVim (requires a graphical session) with a 3 panes layout (LOCAL, MERGED and REMOTE)
8551 </p>
8552 </dd>
8553 <dt class="hdlist1">
8554 <code>gvimdiff3</code>
8555 </dt>
8556 <dd>
8557 <p>
8558 Use gVim (requires a graphical session) where only the MERGED file is shown
8559 </p>
8560 </dd>
8561 <dt class="hdlist1">
8562 <code>kdiff3</code>
8563 </dt>
8564 <dd>
8565 <p>
8566 Use KDiff3 (requires a graphical session)
8567 </p>
8568 </dd>
8569 <dt class="hdlist1">
8570 <code>meld</code>
8571 </dt>
8572 <dd>
8573 <p>
8574 Use Meld (requires a graphical session) with optional <code>auto merge</code> (see <code>git help mergetool</code>'s <code>CONFIGURATION</code> section)
8575 </p>
8576 </dd>
8577 <dt class="hdlist1">
8578 <code>nvimdiff</code>
8579 </dt>
8580 <dd>
8581 <p>
8582 Use Neovim with a custom layout (see <code>git help mergetool</code>'s <code>BACKEND SPECIFIC HINTS</code> section)
8583 </p>
8584 </dd>
8585 <dt class="hdlist1">
8586 <code>nvimdiff1</code>
8587 </dt>
8588 <dd>
8589 <p>
8590 Use Neovim with a 2 panes layout (LOCAL and REMOTE)
8591 </p>
8592 </dd>
8593 <dt class="hdlist1">
8594 <code>nvimdiff2</code>
8595 </dt>
8596 <dd>
8597 <p>
8598 Use Neovim with a 3 panes layout (LOCAL, MERGED and REMOTE)
8599 </p>
8600 </dd>
8601 <dt class="hdlist1">
8602 <code>nvimdiff3</code>
8603 </dt>
8604 <dd>
8605 <p>
8606 Use Neovim where only the MERGED file is shown
8607 </p>
8608 </dd>
8609 <dt class="hdlist1">
8610 <code>opendiff</code>
8611 </dt>
8612 <dd>
8613 <p>
8614 Use FileMerge (requires a graphical session)
8615 </p>
8616 </dd>
8617 <dt class="hdlist1">
8618 <code>p4merge</code>
8619 </dt>
8620 <dd>
8621 <p>
8622 Use HelixCore P4Merge (requires a graphical session)
8623 </p>
8624 </dd>
8625 <dt class="hdlist1">
8626 <code>smerge</code>
8627 </dt>
8628 <dd>
8629 <p>
8630 Use Sublime Merge (requires a graphical session)
8631 </p>
8632 </dd>
8633 <dt class="hdlist1">
8634 <code>tkdiff</code>
8635 </dt>
8636 <dd>
8637 <p>
8638 Use TkDiff (requires a graphical session)
8639 </p>
8640 </dd>
8641 <dt class="hdlist1">
8642 <code>tortoisemerge</code>
8643 </dt>
8644 <dd>
8645 <p>
8646 Use TortoiseMerge (requires a graphical session)
8647 </p>
8648 </dd>
8649 <dt class="hdlist1">
8650 <code>vimdiff</code>
8651 </dt>
8652 <dd>
8653 <p>
8654 Use Vim with a custom layout (see <code>git help mergetool</code>'s <code>BACKEND SPECIFIC HINTS</code> section)
8655 </p>
8656 </dd>
8657 <dt class="hdlist1">
8658 <code>vimdiff1</code>
8659 </dt>
8660 <dd>
8661 <p>
8662 Use Vim with a 2 panes layout (LOCAL and REMOTE)
8663 </p>
8664 </dd>
8665 <dt class="hdlist1">
8666 <code>vimdiff2</code>
8667 </dt>
8668 <dd>
8669 <p>
8670 Use Vim with a 3 panes layout (LOCAL, MERGED and REMOTE)
8671 </p>
8672 </dd>
8673 <dt class="hdlist1">
8674 <code>vimdiff3</code>
8675 </dt>
8676 <dd>
8677 <p>
8678 Use Vim where only the MERGED file is shown
8679 </p>
8680 </dd>
8681 <dt class="hdlist1">
8682 <code>winmerge</code>
8683 </dt>
8684 <dd>
8685 <p>
8686 Use WinMerge (requires a graphical session)
8687 </p>
8688 </dd>
8689 <dt class="hdlist1">
8690 <code>xxdiff</code>
8691 </dt>
8692 <dd>
8693 <p>
8694 Use xxdiff (requires a graphical session)
8695 </p>
8696 </dd>
8697 </dl></div>
8698 </dd>
8699 <dt class="hdlist1">
8700 merge.verbosity
8701 </dt>
8702 <dd>
8703 <p>
8704         Controls the amount of output shown by the recursive merge
8705         strategy.  Level 0 outputs nothing except a final error
8706         message if conflicts were detected. Level 1 outputs only
8707         conflicts, 2 outputs conflicts and file changes.  Level 5 and
8708         above outputs debugging information.  The default is level 2.
8709         Can be overridden by the <code>GIT_MERGE_VERBOSITY</code> environment variable.
8710 </p>
8711 </dd>
8712 <dt class="hdlist1">
8713 merge.&lt;driver&gt;.name
8714 </dt>
8715 <dd>
8716 <p>
8717         Defines a human-readable name for a custom low-level
8718         merge driver.  See <a href="gitattributes.html">gitattributes(5)</a> for details.
8719 </p>
8720 </dd>
8721 <dt class="hdlist1">
8722 merge.&lt;driver&gt;.driver
8723 </dt>
8724 <dd>
8725 <p>
8726         Defines the command that implements a custom low-level
8727         merge driver.  See <a href="gitattributes.html">gitattributes(5)</a> for details.
8728 </p>
8729 </dd>
8730 <dt class="hdlist1">
8731 merge.&lt;driver&gt;.recursive
8732 </dt>
8733 <dd>
8734 <p>
8735         Names a low-level merge driver to be used when
8736         performing an internal merge between common ancestors.
8737         See <a href="gitattributes.html">gitattributes(5)</a> for details.
8738 </p>
8739 </dd>
8740 <dt class="hdlist1">
8741 mergetool.&lt;tool&gt;.path
8742 </dt>
8743 <dd>
8744 <p>
8745         Override the path for the given tool.  This is useful in case
8746         your tool is not in the PATH.
8747 </p>
8748 </dd>
8749 <dt class="hdlist1">
8750 mergetool.&lt;tool&gt;.cmd
8751 </dt>
8752 <dd>
8753 <p>
8754         Specify the command to invoke the specified merge tool.  The
8755         specified command is evaluated in shell with the following
8756         variables available: <em>BASE</em> is the name of a temporary file
8757         containing the common base of the files to be merged, if available;
8758         <em>LOCAL</em> is the name of a temporary file containing the contents of
8759         the file on the current branch; <em>REMOTE</em> is the name of a temporary
8760         file containing the contents of the file from the branch being
8761         merged; <em>MERGED</em> contains the name of the file to which the merge
8762         tool should write the results of a successful merge.
8763 </p>
8764 </dd>
8765 <dt class="hdlist1">
8766 mergetool.&lt;tool&gt;.hideResolved
8767 </dt>
8768 <dd>
8769 <p>
8770         Allows the user to override the global <code>mergetool.hideResolved</code> value
8771         for a specific tool. See <code>mergetool.hideResolved</code> for the full
8772         description.
8773 </p>
8774 </dd>
8775 <dt class="hdlist1">
8776 mergetool.&lt;tool&gt;.trustExitCode
8777 </dt>
8778 <dd>
8779 <p>
8780         For a custom merge command, specify whether the exit code of
8781         the merge command can be used to determine whether the merge was
8782         successful.  If this is not set to true then the merge target file
8783         timestamp is checked, and the merge is assumed to have been successful
8784         if the file has been updated; otherwise, the user is prompted to
8785         indicate the success of the merge.
8786 </p>
8787 </dd>
8788 <dt class="hdlist1">
8789 mergetool.meld.hasOutput
8790 </dt>
8791 <dd>
8792 <p>
8793         Older versions of <code>meld</code> do not support the <code>--output</code> option.
8794         Git will attempt to detect whether <code>meld</code> supports <code>--output</code>
8795         by inspecting the output of <code>meld --help</code>.  Configuring
8796         <code>mergetool.meld.hasOutput</code> will make Git skip these checks and
8797         use the configured value instead.  Setting <code>mergetool.meld.hasOutput</code>
8798         to <code>true</code> tells Git to unconditionally use the <code>--output</code> option,
8799         and <code>false</code> avoids using <code>--output</code>.
8800 </p>
8801 </dd>
8802 <dt class="hdlist1">
8803 mergetool.meld.useAutoMerge
8804 </dt>
8805 <dd>
8806 <p>
8807         When the <code>--auto-merge</code> is given, meld will merge all non-conflicting
8808         parts automatically, highlight the conflicting parts, and wait for
8809         user decision.  Setting <code>mergetool.meld.useAutoMerge</code> to <code>true</code> tells
8810         Git to unconditionally use the <code>--auto-merge</code> option with <code>meld</code>.
8811         Setting this value to <code>auto</code> makes git detect whether <code>--auto-merge</code>
8812         is supported and will only use <code>--auto-merge</code> when available.  A
8813         value of <code>false</code> avoids using <code>--auto-merge</code> altogether, and is the
8814         default value.
8815 </p>
8816 </dd>
8817 <dt class="hdlist1">
8818 mergetool.vimdiff.layout
8819 </dt>
8820 <dd>
8821 <p>
8822         The vimdiff backend uses this variable to control how its split
8823         windows appear. Applies even if you are using Neovim (<code>nvim</code>) or
8824         gVim (<code>gvim</code>) as the merge tool. See BACKEND SPECIFIC HINTS section
8825         in <a href="git-mergetool.html">git-mergetool(1)</a>.
8826         for details.
8827 </p>
8828 </dd>
8829 <dt class="hdlist1">
8830 mergetool.hideResolved
8831 </dt>
8832 <dd>
8833 <p>
8834         During a merge, Git will automatically resolve as many conflicts as
8835         possible and write the <em>MERGED</em> file containing conflict markers around
8836         any conflicts that it cannot resolve; <em>LOCAL</em> and <em>REMOTE</em> normally
8837         represent the versions of the file from before Git&#8217;s conflict
8838         resolution. This flag causes <em>LOCAL</em> and <em>REMOTE</em> to be overwritten so
8839         that only the unresolved conflicts are presented to the merge tool. Can
8840         be configured per-tool via the <code>mergetool.&lt;tool&gt;.hideResolved</code>
8841         configuration variable. Defaults to <code>false</code>.
8842 </p>
8843 </dd>
8844 <dt class="hdlist1">
8845 mergetool.keepBackup
8846 </dt>
8847 <dd>
8848 <p>
8849         After performing a merge, the original file with conflict markers
8850         can be saved as a file with a <code>.orig</code> extension.  If this variable
8851         is set to <code>false</code> then this file is not preserved.  Defaults to
8852         <code>true</code> (i.e. keep the backup files).
8853 </p>
8854 </dd>
8855 <dt class="hdlist1">
8856 mergetool.keepTemporaries
8857 </dt>
8858 <dd>
8859 <p>
8860         When invoking a custom merge tool, Git uses a set of temporary
8861         files to pass to the tool. If the tool returns an error and this
8862         variable is set to <code>true</code>, then these temporary files will be
8863         preserved; otherwise, they will be removed after the tool has
8864         exited. Defaults to <code>false</code>.
8865 </p>
8866 </dd>
8867 <dt class="hdlist1">
8868 mergetool.writeToTemp
8869 </dt>
8870 <dd>
8871 <p>
8872         Git writes temporary <em>BASE</em>, <em>LOCAL</em>, and <em>REMOTE</em> versions of
8873         conflicting files in the worktree by default.  Git will attempt
8874         to use a temporary directory for these files when set <code>true</code>.
8875         Defaults to <code>false</code>.
8876 </p>
8877 </dd>
8878 <dt class="hdlist1">
8879 mergetool.prompt
8880 </dt>
8881 <dd>
8882 <p>
8883         Prompt before each invocation of the merge resolution program.
8884 </p>
8885 </dd>
8886 <dt class="hdlist1">
8887 mergetool.guiDefault
8888 </dt>
8889 <dd>
8890 <p>
8891         Set <code>true</code> to use the <code>merge.guitool</code> by default (equivalent to
8892         specifying the <code>--gui</code> argument), or <code>auto</code> to select <code>merge.guitool</code>
8893         or <code>merge.tool</code> depending on the presence of a <code>DISPLAY</code> environment
8894         variable value. The default is <code>false</code>, where the <code>--gui</code> argument
8895         must be provided explicitly for the <code>merge.guitool</code> to be used.
8896 </p>
8897 </dd>
8898 <dt class="hdlist1">
8899 notes.mergeStrategy
8900 </dt>
8901 <dd>
8902 <p>
8903         Which merge strategy to choose by default when resolving notes
8904         conflicts.  Must be one of <code>manual</code>, <code>ours</code>, <code>theirs</code>, <code>union</code>, or
8905         <code>cat_sort_uniq</code>.  Defaults to <code>manual</code>.  See the "NOTES MERGE STRATEGIES"
8906         section of <a href="git-notes.html">git-notes(1)</a> for more information on each strategy.
8907 </p>
8908 <div class="paragraph"><p>This setting can be overridden by passing the <code>--strategy</code> option to
8909 <a href="git-notes.html">git-notes(1)</a>.</p></div>
8910 </dd>
8911 <dt class="hdlist1">
8912 notes.&lt;name&gt;.mergeStrategy
8913 </dt>
8914 <dd>
8915 <p>
8916         Which merge strategy to choose when doing a notes merge into
8917         refs/notes/&lt;name&gt;.  This overrides the more general
8918         "notes.mergeStrategy".  See the "NOTES MERGE STRATEGIES" section in
8919         <a href="git-notes.html">git-notes(1)</a> for more information on the available strategies.
8920 </p>
8921 </dd>
8922 <dt class="hdlist1">
8923 notes.displayRef
8924 </dt>
8925 <dd>
8926 <p>
8927         Which ref (or refs, if a glob or specified more than once), in
8928         addition to the default set by <code>core.notesRef</code> or
8929         <code>GIT_NOTES_REF</code>, to read notes from when showing commit
8930         messages with the <em>git log</em> family of commands.
8931 </p>
8932 <div class="paragraph"><p>This setting can be overridden with the <code>GIT_NOTES_DISPLAY_REF</code>
8933 environment variable, which must be a colon separated list of refs or
8934 globs.</p></div>
8935 <div class="paragraph"><p>A warning will be issued for refs that do not exist,
8936 but a glob that does not match any refs is silently ignored.</p></div>
8937 <div class="paragraph"><p>This setting can be disabled by the <code>--no-notes</code> option to the <em>git
8938 log</em> family of commands, or by the <code>--notes=&lt;ref&gt;</code> option accepted by
8939 those commands.</p></div>
8940 <div class="paragraph"><p>The effective value of "core.notesRef" (possibly overridden by
8941 GIT_NOTES_REF) is also implicitly added to the list of refs to be
8942 displayed.</p></div>
8943 </dd>
8944 <dt class="hdlist1">
8945 notes.rewrite.&lt;command&gt;
8946 </dt>
8947 <dd>
8948 <p>
8949         When rewriting commits with &lt;command&gt; (currently <code>amend</code> or
8950         <code>rebase</code>), if this variable is <code>false</code>, git will not copy
8951         notes from the original to the rewritten commit.  Defaults to
8952         <code>true</code>.  See also "<code>notes.rewriteRef</code>" below.
8953 </p>
8954 <div class="paragraph"><p>This setting can be overridden with the <code>GIT_NOTES_REWRITE_REF</code>
8955 environment variable, which must be a colon separated list of refs or
8956 globs.</p></div>
8957 </dd>
8958 <dt class="hdlist1">
8959 notes.rewriteMode
8960 </dt>
8961 <dd>
8962 <p>
8963         When copying notes during a rewrite (see the
8964         "notes.rewrite.&lt;command&gt;" option), determines what to do if
8965         the target commit already has a note.  Must be one of
8966         <code>overwrite</code>, <code>concatenate</code>, <code>cat_sort_uniq</code>, or <code>ignore</code>.
8967         Defaults to <code>concatenate</code>.
8968 </p>
8969 <div class="paragraph"><p>This setting can be overridden with the <code>GIT_NOTES_REWRITE_MODE</code>
8970 environment variable.</p></div>
8971 </dd>
8972 <dt class="hdlist1">
8973 notes.rewriteRef
8974 </dt>
8975 <dd>
8976 <p>
8977         When copying notes during a rewrite, specifies the (fully
8978         qualified) ref whose notes should be copied.  May be a glob,
8979         in which case notes in all matching refs will be copied.  You
8980         may also specify this configuration several times.
8981 </p>
8982 <div class="paragraph"><p>Does not have a default value; you must configure this variable to
8983 enable note rewriting.  Set it to <code>refs/notes/commits</code> to enable
8984 rewriting for the default commit notes.</p></div>
8985 <div class="paragraph"><p>Can be overridden with the <code>GIT_NOTES_REWRITE_REF</code> environment variable.
8986 See <code>notes.rewrite.&lt;command&gt;</code> above for a further description of its format.</p></div>
8987 </dd>
8988 <dt class="hdlist1">
8989 pack.window
8990 </dt>
8991 <dd>
8992 <p>
8993         The size of the window used by <a href="git-pack-objects.html">git-pack-objects(1)</a> when no
8994         window size is given on the command line. Defaults to 10.
8995 </p>
8996 </dd>
8997 <dt class="hdlist1">
8998 pack.depth
8999 </dt>
9000 <dd>
9001 <p>
9002         The maximum delta depth used by <a href="git-pack-objects.html">git-pack-objects(1)</a> when no
9003         maximum depth is given on the command line. Defaults to 50.
9004         Maximum value is 4095.
9005 </p>
9006 </dd>
9007 <dt class="hdlist1">
9008 pack.windowMemory
9009 </dt>
9010 <dd>
9011 <p>
9012         The maximum size of memory that is consumed by each thread
9013         in <a href="git-pack-objects.html">git-pack-objects(1)</a> for pack window memory when
9014         no limit is given on the command line.  The value can be
9015         suffixed with "k", "m", or "g".  When left unconfigured (or
9016         set explicitly to 0), there will be no limit.
9017 </p>
9018 </dd>
9019 <dt class="hdlist1">
9020 pack.compression
9021 </dt>
9022 <dd>
9023 <p>
9024         An integer -1..9, indicating the compression level for objects
9025         in a pack file. -1 is the zlib default. 0 means no
9026         compression, and 1..9 are various speed/size tradeoffs, 9 being
9027         slowest.  If not set,  defaults to core.compression.  If that is
9028         not set,  defaults to -1, the zlib default, which is "a default
9029         compromise between speed and compression (currently equivalent
9030         to level 6)."
9031 </p>
9032 <div class="paragraph"><p>Note that changing the compression level will not automatically recompress
9033 all existing objects. You can force recompression by passing the -F option
9034 to <a href="git-repack.html">git-repack(1)</a>.</p></div>
9035 </dd>
9036 <dt class="hdlist1">
9037 pack.allowPackReuse
9038 </dt>
9039 <dd>
9040 <p>
9041         When true or "single", and when reachability bitmaps are
9042         enabled, pack-objects will try to send parts of the bitmapped
9043         packfile verbatim. When "multi", and when a multi-pack
9044         reachability bitmap is available, pack-objects will try to send
9045         parts of all packs in the MIDX.
9046 </p>
9047 <div class="literalblock">
9048 <div class="content">
9049 <pre><code>If only a single pack bitmap is available, and
9050 `pack.allowPackReuse` is set to "multi", reuse parts of just the
9051 bitmapped packfile. This can reduce memory and CPU usage to
9052 serve fetches, but might result in sending a slightly larger
9053 pack. Defaults to true.</code></pre>
9054 </div></div>
9055 </dd>
9056 <dt class="hdlist1">
9057 pack.island
9058 </dt>
9059 <dd>
9060 <p>
9061         An extended regular expression configuring a set of delta
9062         islands. See "DELTA ISLANDS" in <a href="git-pack-objects.html">git-pack-objects(1)</a>
9063         for details.
9064 </p>
9065 </dd>
9066 <dt class="hdlist1">
9067 pack.islandCore
9068 </dt>
9069 <dd>
9070 <p>
9071         Specify an island name which gets to have its objects be
9072         packed first. This creates a kind of pseudo-pack at the front
9073         of one pack, so that the objects from the specified island are
9074         hopefully faster to copy into any pack that should be served
9075         to a user requesting these objects. In practice this means
9076         that the island specified should likely correspond to what is
9077         the most commonly cloned in the repo. See also "DELTA ISLANDS"
9078         in <a href="git-pack-objects.html">git-pack-objects(1)</a>.
9079 </p>
9080 </dd>
9081 <dt class="hdlist1">
9082 pack.deltaCacheSize
9083 </dt>
9084 <dd>
9085 <p>
9086         The maximum memory in bytes used for caching deltas in
9087         <a href="git-pack-objects.html">git-pack-objects(1)</a> before writing them out to a pack.
9088         This cache is used to speed up the writing object phase by not
9089         having to recompute the final delta result once the best match
9090         for all objects is found.  Repacking large repositories on machines
9091         which are tight with memory might be badly impacted by this though,
9092         especially if this cache pushes the system into swapping.
9093         A value of 0 means no limit. The smallest size of 1 byte may be
9094         used to virtually disable this cache. Defaults to 256 MiB.
9095 </p>
9096 </dd>
9097 <dt class="hdlist1">
9098 pack.deltaCacheLimit
9099 </dt>
9100 <dd>
9101 <p>
9102         The maximum size of a delta, that is cached in
9103         <a href="git-pack-objects.html">git-pack-objects(1)</a>. This cache is used to speed up the
9104         writing object phase by not having to recompute the final delta
9105         result once the best match for all objects is found.
9106         Defaults to 1000. Maximum value is 65535.
9107 </p>
9108 </dd>
9109 <dt class="hdlist1">
9110 pack.threads
9111 </dt>
9112 <dd>
9113 <p>
9114         Specifies the number of threads to spawn when searching for best
9115         delta matches.  This requires that <a href="git-pack-objects.html">git-pack-objects(1)</a>
9116         be compiled with pthreads otherwise this option is ignored with a
9117         warning. This is meant to reduce packing time on multiprocessor
9118         machines. The required amount of memory for the delta search window
9119         is however multiplied by the number of threads.
9120         Specifying 0 will cause Git to auto-detect the number of CPUs
9121         and set the number of threads accordingly.
9122 </p>
9123 </dd>
9124 <dt class="hdlist1">
9125 pack.indexVersion
9126 </dt>
9127 <dd>
9128 <p>
9129         Specify the default pack index version.  Valid values are 1 for
9130         legacy pack index used by Git versions prior to 1.5.2, and 2 for
9131         the new pack index with capabilities for packs larger than 4 GB
9132         as well as proper protection against the repacking of corrupted
9133         packs.  Version 2 is the default.  Note that version 2 is enforced
9134         and this config option is ignored whenever the corresponding pack is
9135         larger than 2 GB.
9136 </p>
9137 <div class="paragraph"><p>If you have an old Git that does not understand the version 2 <code>*.idx</code> file,
9138 cloning or fetching over a non-native protocol (e.g. "http")
9139 that will copy both <code>*.pack</code> file and corresponding <code>*.idx</code> file from the
9140 other side may give you a repository that cannot be accessed with your
9141 older version of Git. If the <code>*.pack</code> file is smaller than 2 GB, however,
9142 you can use <a href="git-index-pack.html">git-index-pack(1)</a> on the *.pack file to regenerate
9143 the <code>*.idx</code> file.</p></div>
9144 </dd>
9145 <dt class="hdlist1">
9146 pack.packSizeLimit
9147 </dt>
9148 <dd>
9149 <p>
9150         The maximum size of a pack.  This setting only affects
9151         packing to a file when repacking, i.e. the git:// protocol
9152         is unaffected.  It can be overridden by the <code>--max-pack-size</code>
9153         option of <a href="git-repack.html">git-repack(1)</a>.  Reaching this limit results
9154         in the creation of multiple packfiles.
9155 </p>
9156 <div class="paragraph"><p>Note that this option is rarely useful, and may result in a larger total
9157 on-disk size (because Git will not store deltas between packs) and
9158 worse runtime performance (object lookup within multiple packs is
9159 slower than a single pack, and optimizations like reachability bitmaps
9160 cannot cope with multiple packs).</p></div>
9161 <div class="paragraph"><p>If you need to actively run Git using smaller packfiles (e.g., because your
9162 filesystem does not support large files), this option may help. But if
9163 your goal is to transmit a packfile over a medium that supports limited
9164 sizes (e.g., removable media that cannot store the whole repository),
9165 you are likely better off creating a single large packfile and splitting
9166 it using a generic multi-volume archive tool (e.g., Unix <code>split</code>).</p></div>
9167 <div class="paragraph"><p>The minimum size allowed is limited to 1 MiB. The default is unlimited.
9168 Common unit suffixes of <em>k</em>, <em>m</em>, or <em>g</em> are supported.</p></div>
9169 </dd>
9170 <dt class="hdlist1">
9171 pack.useBitmaps
9172 </dt>
9173 <dd>
9174 <p>
9175         When true, git will use pack bitmaps (if available) when packing
9176         to stdout (e.g., during the server side of a fetch). Defaults to
9177         true. You should not generally need to turn this off unless
9178         you are debugging pack bitmaps.
9179 </p>
9180 </dd>
9181 <dt class="hdlist1">
9182 pack.useBitmapBoundaryTraversal
9183 </dt>
9184 <dd>
9185 <p>
9186         When true, Git will use an experimental algorithm for computing
9187         reachability queries with bitmaps. Instead of building up
9188         complete bitmaps for all of the negated tips and then OR-ing
9189         them together, consider negated tips with existing bitmaps as
9190         additive (i.e. OR-ing them into the result if they exist,
9191         ignoring them otherwise), and build up a bitmap at the boundary
9192         instead.
9193 </p>
9194 <div class="paragraph"><p>When using this algorithm, Git may include too many objects as a result
9195 of not opening up trees belonging to certain UNINTERESTING commits. This
9196 inexactness matches the non-bitmap traversal algorithm.</p></div>
9197 <div class="paragraph"><p>In many cases, this can provide a speed-up over the exact algorithm,
9198 particularly when there is poor bitmap coverage of the negated side of
9199 the query.</p></div>
9200 </dd>
9201 <dt class="hdlist1">
9202 pack.useSparse
9203 </dt>
9204 <dd>
9205 <p>
9206         When true, git will default to using the <em>--sparse</em> option in
9207         <em>git pack-objects</em> when the <em>--revs</em> option is present. This
9208         algorithm only walks trees that appear in paths that introduce new
9209         objects. This can have significant performance benefits when
9210         computing a pack to send a small change. However, it is possible
9211         that extra objects are added to the pack-file if the included
9212         commits contain certain types of direct renames. Default is
9213         <code>true</code>.
9214 </p>
9215 </dd>
9216 <dt class="hdlist1">
9217 pack.preferBitmapTips
9218 </dt>
9219 <dd>
9220 <p>
9221         When selecting which commits will receive bitmaps, prefer a
9222         commit at the tip of any reference that is a suffix of any value
9223         of this configuration over any other commits in the "selection
9224         window".
9225 </p>
9226 <div class="paragraph"><p>Note that setting this configuration to <code>refs/foo</code> does not mean that
9227 the commits at the tips of <code>refs/foo/bar</code> and <code>refs/foo/baz</code> will
9228 necessarily be selected. This is because commits are selected for
9229 bitmaps from within a series of windows of variable length.</p></div>
9230 <div class="paragraph"><p>If a commit at the tip of any reference which is a suffix of any value
9231 of this configuration is seen in a window, it is immediately given
9232 preference over any other commit in that window.</p></div>
9233 </dd>
9234 <dt class="hdlist1">
9235 pack.writeBitmaps (deprecated)
9236 </dt>
9237 <dd>
9238 <p>
9239         This is a deprecated synonym for <code>repack.writeBitmaps</code>.
9240 </p>
9241 </dd>
9242 <dt class="hdlist1">
9243 pack.writeBitmapHashCache
9244 </dt>
9245 <dd>
9246 <p>
9247         When true, git will include a "hash cache" section in the bitmap
9248         index (if one is written). This cache can be used to feed git&#8217;s
9249         delta heuristics, potentially leading to better deltas between
9250         bitmapped and non-bitmapped objects (e.g., when serving a fetch
9251         between an older, bitmapped pack and objects that have been
9252         pushed since the last gc). The downside is that it consumes 4
9253         bytes per object of disk space. Defaults to true.
9254 </p>
9255 <div class="paragraph"><p>When writing a multi-pack reachability bitmap, no new namehashes are
9256 computed; instead, any namehashes stored in an existing bitmap are
9257 permuted into their appropriate location when writing a new bitmap.</p></div>
9258 </dd>
9259 <dt class="hdlist1">
9260 pack.writeBitmapLookupTable
9261 </dt>
9262 <dd>
9263 <p>
9264         When true, Git will include a "lookup table" section in the
9265         bitmap index (if one is written). This table is used to defer
9266         loading individual bitmaps as late as possible. This can be
9267         beneficial in repositories that have relatively large bitmap
9268         indexes. Defaults to false.
9269 </p>
9270 </dd>
9271 <dt class="hdlist1">
9272 pack.readReverseIndex
9273 </dt>
9274 <dd>
9275 <p>
9276         When true, git will read any .rev file(s) that may be available
9277         (see: <a href="gitformat-pack.html">gitformat-pack(5)</a>). When false, the reverse index
9278         will be generated from scratch and stored in memory. Defaults to
9279         true.
9280 </p>
9281 </dd>
9282 <dt class="hdlist1">
9283 pack.writeReverseIndex
9284 </dt>
9285 <dd>
9286 <p>
9287         When true, git will write a corresponding .rev file (see:
9288         <a href="gitformat-pack.html">gitformat-pack(5)</a>)
9289         for each new packfile that it writes in all places except for
9290         <a href="git-fast-import.html">git-fast-import(1)</a> and in the bulk checkin mechanism.
9291         Defaults to true.
9292 </p>
9293 </dd>
9294 <dt class="hdlist1">
9295 pager.&lt;cmd&gt;
9296 </dt>
9297 <dd>
9298 <p>
9299         If the value is boolean, turns on or off pagination of the
9300         output of a particular Git subcommand when writing to a tty.
9301         Otherwise, turns on pagination for the subcommand using the
9302         pager specified by the value of <code>pager.&lt;cmd&gt;</code>.  If <code>--paginate</code>
9303         or <code>--no-pager</code> is specified on the command line, it takes
9304         precedence over this option.  To disable pagination for all
9305         commands, set <code>core.pager</code> or <code>GIT_PAGER</code> to <code>cat</code>.
9306 </p>
9307 </dd>
9308 <dt class="hdlist1">
9309 pretty.&lt;name&gt;
9310 </dt>
9311 <dd>
9312 <p>
9313         Alias for a --pretty= format string, as specified in
9314         <a href="git-log.html">git-log(1)</a>. Any aliases defined here can be used just
9315         as the built-in pretty formats could. For example,
9316         running <code>git config pretty.changelog "format:* %H %s"</code>
9317         would cause the invocation <code>git log --pretty=changelog</code>
9318         to be equivalent to running <code>git log "--pretty=format:* %H %s"</code>.
9319         Note that an alias with the same name as a built-in format
9320         will be silently ignored.
9321 </p>
9322 </dd>
9323 <dt class="hdlist1">
9324 protocol.allow
9325 </dt>
9326 <dd>
9327 <p>
9328         If set, provide a user defined default policy for all protocols which
9329         don&#8217;t explicitly have a policy (<code>protocol.&lt;name&gt;.allow</code>).  By default,
9330         if unset, known-safe protocols (http, https, git, ssh) have a
9331         default policy of <code>always</code>, known-dangerous protocols (ext) have a
9332         default policy of <code>never</code>, and all other protocols (including file)
9333         have a default policy of <code>user</code>.  Supported policies:
9334 </p>
9335 <div class="openblock">
9336 <div class="content">
9337 <div class="ulist"><ul>
9338 <li>
9339 <p>
9340 <code>always</code> - protocol is always able to be used.
9341 </p>
9342 </li>
9343 <li>
9344 <p>
9345 <code>never</code> - protocol is never able to be used.
9346 </p>
9347 </li>
9348 <li>
9349 <p>
9350 <code>user</code> - protocol is only able to be used when <code>GIT_PROTOCOL_FROM_USER</code> is
9351   either unset or has a value of 1.  This policy should be used when you want a
9352   protocol to be directly usable by the user but don&#8217;t want it used by commands which
9353   execute clone/fetch/push commands without user input, e.g. recursive
9354   submodule initialization.
9355 </p>
9356 </li>
9357 </ul></div>
9358 </div></div>
9359 </dd>
9360 <dt class="hdlist1">
9361 protocol.&lt;name&gt;.allow
9362 </dt>
9363 <dd>
9364 <p>
9365         Set a policy to be used by protocol <code>&lt;name&gt;</code> with clone/fetch/push
9366         commands. See <code>protocol.allow</code> above for the available policies.
9367 </p>
9368 <div class="paragraph"><p>The protocol names currently used by git are:</p></div>
9369 <div class="openblock">
9370 <div class="content">
9371 <div class="ulist"><ul>
9372 <li>
9373 <p>
9374 <code>file</code>: any local file-based path (including <code>file://</code> URLs,
9375     or local paths)
9376 </p>
9377 </li>
9378 <li>
9379 <p>
9380 <code>git</code>: the anonymous git protocol over a direct TCP
9381     connection (or proxy, if configured)
9382 </p>
9383 </li>
9384 <li>
9385 <p>
9386 <code>ssh</code>: git over ssh (including <code>host:path</code> syntax,
9387     <code>ssh://</code>, etc).
9388 </p>
9389 </li>
9390 <li>
9391 <p>
9392 <code>http</code>: git over http, both "smart http" and "dumb http".
9393     Note that this does <em>not</em> include <code>https</code>; if you want to configure
9394     both, you must do so individually.
9395 </p>
9396 </li>
9397 <li>
9398 <p>
9399 any external helpers are named by their protocol (e.g., use
9400     <code>hg</code> to allow the <code>git-remote-hg</code> helper)
9401 </p>
9402 </li>
9403 </ul></div>
9404 </div></div>
9405 </dd>
9406 <dt class="hdlist1">
9407 protocol.version
9408 </dt>
9409 <dd>
9410 <p>
9411         If set, clients will attempt to communicate with a server
9412         using the specified protocol version.  If the server does
9413         not support it, communication falls back to version 0.
9414         If unset, the default is <code>2</code>.
9415         Supported versions:
9416 </p>
9417 <div class="openblock">
9418 <div class="content">
9419 <div class="ulist"><ul>
9420 <li>
9421 <p>
9422 <code>0</code> - the original wire protocol.
9423 </p>
9424 </li>
9425 <li>
9426 <p>
9427 <code>1</code> - the original wire protocol with the addition of a version string
9428   in the initial response from the server.
9429 </p>
9430 </li>
9431 <li>
9432 <p>
9433 <code>2</code> - Wire protocol version 2, see <a href="gitprotocol-v2.html">gitprotocol-v2(5)</a>.
9434 </p>
9435 </li>
9436 </ul></div>
9437 </div></div>
9438 </dd>
9439 <dt class="hdlist1">
9440 pull.ff
9441 </dt>
9442 <dd>
9443 <p>
9444         By default, Git does not create an extra merge commit when merging
9445         a commit that is a descendant of the current commit. Instead, the
9446         tip of the current branch is fast-forwarded. When set to <code>false</code>,
9447         this variable tells Git to create an extra merge commit in such
9448         a case (equivalent to giving the <code>--no-ff</code> option from the command
9449         line). When set to <code>only</code>, only such fast-forward merges are
9450         allowed (equivalent to giving the <code>--ff-only</code> option from the
9451         command line). This setting overrides <code>merge.ff</code> when pulling.
9452 </p>
9453 </dd>
9454 <dt class="hdlist1">
9455 pull.rebase
9456 </dt>
9457 <dd>
9458 <p>
9459         When true, rebase branches on top of the fetched branch, instead
9460         of merging the default branch from the default remote when "git
9461         pull" is run. See "branch.&lt;name&gt;.rebase" for setting this on a
9462         per-branch basis.
9463 </p>
9464 <div class="paragraph"><p>When <code>merges</code> (or just <em>m</em>), pass the <code>--rebase-merges</code> option to <em>git rebase</em>
9465 so that the local merge commits are included in the rebase (see
9466 <a href="git-rebase.html">git-rebase(1)</a> for details).</p></div>
9467 <div class="paragraph"><p>When the value is <code>interactive</code> (or just <em>i</em>), the rebase is run in interactive
9468 mode.</p></div>
9469 <div class="paragraph"><p><strong>NOTE</strong>: this is a possibly dangerous operation; do <strong>not</strong> use
9470 it unless you understand the implications (see <a href="git-rebase.html">git-rebase(1)</a>
9471 for details).</p></div>
9472 </dd>
9473 <dt class="hdlist1">
9474 pull.octopus
9475 </dt>
9476 <dd>
9477 <p>
9478         The default merge strategy to use when pulling multiple branches
9479         at once.
9480 </p>
9481 </dd>
9482 <dt class="hdlist1">
9483 pull.twohead
9484 </dt>
9485 <dd>
9486 <p>
9487         The default merge strategy to use when pulling a single branch.
9488 </p>
9489 </dd>
9490 <dt class="hdlist1">
9491 push.autoSetupRemote
9492 </dt>
9493 <dd>
9494 <p>
9495         If set to "true" assume <code>--set-upstream</code> on default push when no
9496         upstream tracking exists for the current branch; this option
9497         takes effect with push.default options <em>simple</em>, <em>upstream</em>,
9498         and <em>current</em>. It is useful if by default you want new branches
9499         to be pushed to the default remote (like the behavior of
9500         <em>push.default=current</em>) and you also want the upstream tracking
9501         to be set. Workflows most likely to benefit from this option are
9502         <em>simple</em> central workflows where all branches are expected to
9503         have the same name on the remote.
9504 </p>
9505 </dd>
9506 <dt class="hdlist1">
9507 push.default
9508 </dt>
9509 <dd>
9510 <p>
9511         Defines the action <code>git push</code> should take if no refspec is
9512         given (whether from the command-line, config, or elsewhere).
9513         Different values are well-suited for
9514         specific workflows; for instance, in a purely central workflow
9515         (i.e. the fetch source is equal to the push destination),
9516         <code>upstream</code> is probably what you want.  Possible values are:
9517 </p>
9518 <div class="openblock">
9519 <div class="content">
9520 <div class="ulist"><ul>
9521 <li>
9522 <p>
9523 <code>nothing</code> - do not push anything (error out) unless a refspec is
9524   given. This is primarily meant for people who want to
9525   avoid mistakes by always being explicit.
9526 </p>
9527 </li>
9528 <li>
9529 <p>
9530 <code>current</code> - push the current branch to update a branch with the same
9531   name on the receiving end.  Works in both central and non-central
9532   workflows.
9533 </p>
9534 </li>
9535 <li>
9536 <p>
9537 <code>upstream</code> - push the current branch back to the branch whose
9538   changes are usually integrated into the current branch (which is
9539   called <code>@{upstream}</code>).  This mode only makes sense if you are
9540   pushing to the same repository you would normally pull from
9541   (i.e. central workflow).
9542 </p>
9543 </li>
9544 <li>
9545 <p>
9546 <code>tracking</code> - This is a deprecated synonym for <code>upstream</code>.
9547 </p>
9548 </li>
9549 <li>
9550 <p>
9551 <code>simple</code> - push the current branch with the same name on the remote.
9552 </p>
9553 <div class="paragraph"><p>If you are working on a centralized workflow (pushing to the same repository you
9554 pull from, which is typically <code>origin</code>), then you need to configure an upstream
9555 branch with the same name.</p></div>
9556 <div class="paragraph"><p>This mode is the default since Git 2.0, and is the safest option suited for
9557 beginners.</p></div>
9558 </li>
9559 <li>
9560 <p>
9561 <code>matching</code> - push all branches having the same name on both ends.
9562   This makes the repository you are pushing to remember the set of
9563   branches that will be pushed out (e.g. if you always push <em>maint</em>
9564   and <em>master</em> there and no other branches, the repository you push
9565   to will have these two branches, and your local <em>maint</em> and
9566   <em>master</em> will be pushed there).
9567 </p>
9568 <div class="paragraph"><p>To use this mode effectively, you have to make sure <em>all</em> the
9569 branches you would push out are ready to be pushed out before
9570 running <em>git push</em>, as the whole point of this mode is to allow you
9571 to push all of the branches in one go.  If you usually finish work
9572 on only one branch and push out the result, while other branches are
9573 unfinished, this mode is not for you.  Also this mode is not
9574 suitable for pushing into a shared central repository, as other
9575 people may add new branches there, or update the tip of existing
9576 branches outside your control.</p></div>
9577 <div class="paragraph"><p>This used to be the default, but not since Git 2.0 (<code>simple</code> is the
9578 new default).</p></div>
9579 </li>
9580 </ul></div>
9581 </div></div>
9582 </dd>
9583 <dt class="hdlist1">
9584 push.followTags
9585 </dt>
9586 <dd>
9587 <p>
9588         If set to true, enable <code>--follow-tags</code> option by default.  You
9589         may override this configuration at time of push by specifying
9590         <code>--no-follow-tags</code>.
9591 </p>
9592 </dd>
9593 <dt class="hdlist1">
9594 push.gpgSign
9595 </dt>
9596 <dd>
9597 <p>
9598         May be set to a boolean value, or the string <em>if-asked</em>. A true
9599         value causes all pushes to be GPG signed, as if <code>--signed</code> is
9600         passed to <a href="git-push.html">git-push(1)</a>. The string <em>if-asked</em> causes
9601         pushes to be signed if the server supports it, as if
9602         <code>--signed=if-asked</code> is passed to <em>git push</em>. A false value may
9603         override a value from a lower-priority config file. An explicit
9604         command-line flag always overrides this config option.
9605 </p>
9606 </dd>
9607 <dt class="hdlist1">
9608 push.pushOption
9609 </dt>
9610 <dd>
9611 <p>
9612         When no <code>--push-option=&lt;option&gt;</code> argument is given from the
9613         command line, <code>git push</code> behaves as if each &lt;value&gt; of
9614         this variable is given as <code>--push-option=&lt;value&gt;</code>.
9615 </p>
9616 <div class="paragraph"><p>This is a multi-valued variable, and an empty value can be used in a
9617 higher priority configuration file (e.g. <code>.git/config</code> in a
9618 repository) to clear the values inherited from a lower priority
9619 configuration files (e.g. <code>$HOME/.gitconfig</code>).</p></div>
9620 <div class="listingblock">
9621 <div class="content">
9622 <pre><code>Example:
9623
9624 /etc/gitconfig
9625   push.pushoption = a
9626   push.pushoption = b
9627
9628 ~/.gitconfig
9629   push.pushoption = c
9630
9631 repo/.git/config
9632   push.pushoption =
9633   push.pushoption = b
9634
9635 This will result in only b (a and c are cleared).</code></pre>
9636 </div></div>
9637 </dd>
9638 <dt class="hdlist1">
9639 push.recurseSubmodules
9640 </dt>
9641 <dd>
9642 <p>
9643         May be "check", "on-demand", "only", or "no", with the same behavior
9644         as that of "push --recurse-submodules".
9645         If not set, <em>no</em> is used by default, unless <em>submodule.recurse</em> is
9646         set (in which case a <em>true</em> value means <em>on-demand</em>).
9647 </p>
9648 </dd>
9649 <dt class="hdlist1">
9650 push.useForceIfIncludes
9651 </dt>
9652 <dd>
9653 <p>
9654         If set to "true", it is equivalent to specifying
9655         <code>--force-if-includes</code> as an option to <a href="git-push.html">git-push(1)</a>
9656         in the command line. Adding <code>--no-force-if-includes</code> at the
9657         time of push overrides this configuration setting.
9658 </p>
9659 </dd>
9660 <dt class="hdlist1">
9661 push.negotiate
9662 </dt>
9663 <dd>
9664 <p>
9665         If set to "true", attempt to reduce the size of the packfile
9666         sent by rounds of negotiation in which the client and the
9667         server attempt to find commits in common. If "false", Git will
9668         rely solely on the server&#8217;s ref advertisement to find commits
9669         in common.
9670 </p>
9671 </dd>
9672 <dt class="hdlist1">
9673 push.useBitmaps
9674 </dt>
9675 <dd>
9676 <p>
9677         If set to "false", disable use of bitmaps for "git push" even if
9678         <code>pack.useBitmaps</code> is "true", without preventing other git operations
9679         from using bitmaps. Default is true.
9680 </p>
9681 </dd>
9682 <dt class="hdlist1">
9683 rebase.backend
9684 </dt>
9685 <dd>
9686 <p>
9687         Default backend to use for rebasing.  Possible choices are
9688         <em>apply</em> or <em>merge</em>.  In the future, if the merge backend gains
9689         all remaining capabilities of the apply backend, this setting
9690         may become unused.
9691 </p>
9692 </dd>
9693 <dt class="hdlist1">
9694 rebase.stat
9695 </dt>
9696 <dd>
9697 <p>
9698         Whether to show a diffstat of what changed upstream since the last
9699         rebase. False by default.
9700 </p>
9701 </dd>
9702 <dt class="hdlist1">
9703 rebase.autoSquash
9704 </dt>
9705 <dd>
9706 <p>
9707         If set to true, enable the <code>--autosquash</code> option of
9708         <a href="git-rebase.html">git-rebase(1)</a> by default for interactive mode.
9709         This can be overridden with the <code>--no-autosquash</code> option.
9710 </p>
9711 </dd>
9712 <dt class="hdlist1">
9713 rebase.autoStash
9714 </dt>
9715 <dd>
9716 <p>
9717         When set to true, automatically create a temporary stash entry
9718         before the operation begins, and apply it after the operation
9719         ends.  This means that you can run rebase on a dirty worktree.
9720         However, use with care: the final stash application after a
9721         successful rebase might result in non-trivial conflicts.
9722         This option can be overridden by the <code>--no-autostash</code> and
9723         <code>--autostash</code> options of <a href="git-rebase.html">git-rebase(1)</a>.
9724         Defaults to false.
9725 </p>
9726 </dd>
9727 <dt class="hdlist1">
9728 rebase.updateRefs
9729 </dt>
9730 <dd>
9731 <p>
9732         If set to true enable <code>--update-refs</code> option by default.
9733 </p>
9734 </dd>
9735 <dt class="hdlist1">
9736 rebase.missingCommitsCheck
9737 </dt>
9738 <dd>
9739 <p>
9740         If set to "warn", git rebase -i will print a warning if some
9741         commits are removed (e.g. a line was deleted), however the
9742         rebase will still proceed. If set to "error", it will print
9743         the previous warning and stop the rebase, <em>git rebase
9744         --edit-todo</em> can then be used to correct the error. If set to
9745         "ignore", no checking is done.
9746         To drop a commit without warning or error, use the <code>drop</code>
9747         command in the todo list.
9748         Defaults to "ignore".
9749 </p>
9750 </dd>
9751 <dt class="hdlist1">
9752 rebase.instructionFormat
9753 </dt>
9754 <dd>
9755 <p>
9756         A format string, as specified in <a href="git-log.html">git-log(1)</a>, to be used for the
9757         todo list during an interactive rebase.  The format will
9758         automatically have the commit hash prepended to the format.
9759 </p>
9760 </dd>
9761 <dt class="hdlist1">
9762 rebase.abbreviateCommands
9763 </dt>
9764 <dd>
9765 <p>
9766         If set to true, <code>git rebase</code> will use abbreviated command names in the
9767         todo list resulting in something like this:
9768 </p>
9769 <div class="listingblock">
9770 <div class="content">
9771 <pre><code>        p deadbee The oneline of the commit
9772         p fa1afe1 The oneline of the next commit
9773         ...</code></pre>
9774 </div></div>
9775 <div class="paragraph"><p>instead of:</p></div>
9776 <div class="listingblock">
9777 <div class="content">
9778 <pre><code>        pick deadbee The oneline of the commit
9779         pick fa1afe1 The oneline of the next commit
9780         ...</code></pre>
9781 </div></div>
9782 <div class="paragraph"><p>Defaults to false.</p></div>
9783 </dd>
9784 <dt class="hdlist1">
9785 rebase.rescheduleFailedExec
9786 </dt>
9787 <dd>
9788 <p>
9789         Automatically reschedule <code>exec</code> commands that failed. This only makes
9790         sense in interactive mode (or when an <code>--exec</code> option was provided).
9791         This is the same as specifying the <code>--reschedule-failed-exec</code> option.
9792 </p>
9793 </dd>
9794 <dt class="hdlist1">
9795 rebase.forkPoint
9796 </dt>
9797 <dd>
9798 <p>
9799         If set to false set <code>--no-fork-point</code> option by default.
9800 </p>
9801 </dd>
9802 <dt class="hdlist1">
9803 rebase.rebaseMerges
9804 </dt>
9805 <dd>
9806 <p>
9807         Whether and how to set the <code>--rebase-merges</code> option by default. Can
9808         be <code>rebase-cousins</code>, <code>no-rebase-cousins</code>, or a boolean. Setting to
9809         true or to <code>no-rebase-cousins</code> is equivalent to
9810         <code>--rebase-merges=no-rebase-cousins</code>, setting to <code>rebase-cousins</code> is
9811         equivalent to <code>--rebase-merges=rebase-cousins</code>, and setting to false is
9812         equivalent to <code>--no-rebase-merges</code>. Passing <code>--rebase-merges</code> on the
9813         command line, with or without an argument, overrides any
9814         <code>rebase.rebaseMerges</code> configuration.
9815 </p>
9816 </dd>
9817 <dt class="hdlist1">
9818 rebase.maxLabelLength
9819 </dt>
9820 <dd>
9821 <p>
9822         When generating label names from commit subjects, truncate the names to
9823         this length. By default, the names are truncated to a little less than
9824         <code>NAME_MAX</code> (to allow e.g. <code>.lock</code> files to be written for the
9825         corresponding loose refs).
9826 </p>
9827 </dd>
9828 <dt class="hdlist1">
9829 receive.advertiseAtomic
9830 </dt>
9831 <dd>
9832 <p>
9833         By default, git-receive-pack will advertise the atomic push
9834         capability to its clients. If you don&#8217;t want to advertise this
9835         capability, set this variable to false.
9836 </p>
9837 </dd>
9838 <dt class="hdlist1">
9839 receive.advertisePushOptions
9840 </dt>
9841 <dd>
9842 <p>
9843         When set to true, git-receive-pack will advertise the push options
9844         capability to its clients. False by default.
9845 </p>
9846 </dd>
9847 <dt class="hdlist1">
9848 receive.autogc
9849 </dt>
9850 <dd>
9851 <p>
9852         By default, git-receive-pack will run "git-gc --auto" after
9853         receiving data from git-push and updating refs.  You can stop
9854         it by setting this variable to false.
9855 </p>
9856 </dd>
9857 <dt class="hdlist1">
9858 receive.certNonceSeed
9859 </dt>
9860 <dd>
9861 <p>
9862         By setting this variable to a string, <code>git receive-pack</code>
9863         will accept a <code>git push --signed</code> and verify it by using
9864         a "nonce" protected by HMAC using this string as a secret
9865         key.
9866 </p>
9867 </dd>
9868 <dt class="hdlist1">
9869 receive.certNonceSlop
9870 </dt>
9871 <dd>
9872 <p>
9873         When a <code>git push --signed</code> sends a push certificate with a
9874         "nonce" that was issued by a receive-pack serving the same
9875         repository within this many seconds, export the "nonce"
9876         found in the certificate to <code>GIT_PUSH_CERT_NONCE</code> to the
9877         hooks (instead of what the receive-pack asked the sending
9878         side to include).  This may allow writing checks in
9879         <code>pre-receive</code> and <code>post-receive</code> a bit easier.  Instead of
9880         checking <code>GIT_PUSH_CERT_NONCE_SLOP</code> environment variable
9881         that records by how many seconds the nonce is stale to
9882         decide if they want to accept the certificate, they only
9883         can check <code>GIT_PUSH_CERT_NONCE_STATUS</code> is <code>OK</code>.
9884 </p>
9885 </dd>
9886 <dt class="hdlist1">
9887 receive.fsckObjects
9888 </dt>
9889 <dd>
9890 <p>
9891         If it is set to true, git-receive-pack will check all received
9892         objects. See <code>transfer.fsckObjects</code> for what&#8217;s checked.
9893         Defaults to false. If not set, the value of
9894         <code>transfer.fsckObjects</code> is used instead.
9895 </p>
9896 </dd>
9897 <dt class="hdlist1">
9898 receive.fsck.&lt;msg-id&gt;
9899 </dt>
9900 <dd>
9901 <p>
9902         Acts like <code>fsck.&lt;msg-id&gt;</code>, but is used by
9903         <a href="git-receive-pack.html">git-receive-pack(1)</a> instead of
9904         <a href="git-fsck.html">git-fsck(1)</a>. See the <code>fsck.&lt;msg-id&gt;</code> documentation for
9905         details.
9906 </p>
9907 </dd>
9908 <dt class="hdlist1">
9909 receive.fsck.skipList
9910 </dt>
9911 <dd>
9912 <p>
9913         Acts like <code>fsck.skipList</code>, but is used by
9914         <a href="git-receive-pack.html">git-receive-pack(1)</a> instead of
9915         <a href="git-fsck.html">git-fsck(1)</a>. See the <code>fsck.skipList</code> documentation for
9916         details.
9917 </p>
9918 </dd>
9919 <dt class="hdlist1">
9920 receive.keepAlive
9921 </dt>
9922 <dd>
9923 <p>
9924         After receiving the pack from the client, <code>receive-pack</code> may
9925         produce no output (if <code>--quiet</code> was specified) while processing
9926         the pack, causing some networks to drop the TCP connection.
9927         With this option set, if <code>receive-pack</code> does not transmit
9928         any data in this phase for <code>receive.keepAlive</code> seconds, it will
9929         send a short keepalive packet.  The default is 5 seconds; set
9930         to 0 to disable keepalives entirely.
9931 </p>
9932 </dd>
9933 <dt class="hdlist1">
9934 receive.unpackLimit
9935 </dt>
9936 <dd>
9937 <p>
9938         If the number of objects received in a push is below this
9939         limit then the objects will be unpacked into loose object
9940         files. However if the number of received objects equals or
9941         exceeds this limit then the received pack will be stored as
9942         a pack, after adding any missing delta bases.  Storing the
9943         pack from a push can make the push operation complete faster,
9944         especially on slow filesystems.  If not set, the value of
9945         <code>transfer.unpackLimit</code> is used instead.
9946 </p>
9947 </dd>
9948 <dt class="hdlist1">
9949 receive.maxInputSize
9950 </dt>
9951 <dd>
9952 <p>
9953         If the size of the incoming pack stream is larger than this
9954         limit, then git-receive-pack will error out, instead of
9955         accepting the pack file. If not set or set to 0, then the size
9956         is unlimited.
9957 </p>
9958 </dd>
9959 <dt class="hdlist1">
9960 receive.denyDeletes
9961 </dt>
9962 <dd>
9963 <p>
9964         If set to true, git-receive-pack will deny a ref update that deletes
9965         the ref. Use this to prevent such a ref deletion via a push.
9966 </p>
9967 </dd>
9968 <dt class="hdlist1">
9969 receive.denyDeleteCurrent
9970 </dt>
9971 <dd>
9972 <p>
9973         If set to true, git-receive-pack will deny a ref update that
9974         deletes the currently checked out branch of a non-bare repository.
9975 </p>
9976 </dd>
9977 <dt class="hdlist1">
9978 receive.denyCurrentBranch
9979 </dt>
9980 <dd>
9981 <p>
9982         If set to true or "refuse", git-receive-pack will deny a ref update
9983         to the currently checked out branch of a non-bare repository.
9984         Such a push is potentially dangerous because it brings the HEAD
9985         out of sync with the index and working tree. If set to "warn",
9986         print a warning of such a push to stderr, but allow the push to
9987         proceed. If set to false or "ignore", allow such pushes with no
9988         message. Defaults to "refuse".
9989 </p>
9990 <div class="paragraph"><p>Another option is "updateInstead" which will update the working
9991 tree if pushing into the current branch.  This option is
9992 intended for synchronizing working directories when one side is not easily
9993 accessible via interactive ssh (e.g. a live web site, hence the requirement
9994 that the working directory be clean). This mode also comes in handy when
9995 developing inside a VM to test and fix code on different Operating Systems.</p></div>
9996 <div class="paragraph"><p>By default, "updateInstead" will refuse the push if the working tree or
9997 the index have any difference from the HEAD, but the <code>push-to-checkout</code>
9998 hook can be used to customize this.  See <a href="githooks.html">githooks(5)</a>.</p></div>
9999 </dd>
10000 <dt class="hdlist1">
10001 receive.denyNonFastForwards
10002 </dt>
10003 <dd>
10004 <p>
10005         If set to true, git-receive-pack will deny a ref update which is
10006         not a fast-forward. Use this to prevent such an update via a push,
10007         even if that push is forced. This configuration variable is
10008         set when initializing a shared repository.
10009 </p>
10010 </dd>
10011 <dt class="hdlist1">
10012 receive.hideRefs
10013 </dt>
10014 <dd>
10015 <p>
10016         This variable is the same as <code>transfer.hideRefs</code>, but applies
10017         only to <code>receive-pack</code> (and so affects pushes, but not fetches).
10018         An attempt to update or delete a hidden ref by <code>git push</code> is
10019         rejected.
10020 </p>
10021 </dd>
10022 <dt class="hdlist1">
10023 receive.procReceiveRefs
10024 </dt>
10025 <dd>
10026 <p>
10027         This is a multi-valued variable that defines reference prefixes
10028         to match the commands in <code>receive-pack</code>.  Commands matching the
10029         prefixes will be executed by an external hook "proc-receive",
10030         instead of the internal <code>execute_commands</code> function.  If this
10031         variable is not defined, the "proc-receive" hook will never be
10032         used, and all commands will be executed by the internal
10033         <code>execute_commands</code> function.
10034 </p>
10035 <div class="paragraph"><p>For example, if this variable is set to "refs/for", pushing to reference
10036 such as "refs/for/master" will not create or update a reference named
10037 "refs/for/master", but may create or update a pull request directly by
10038 running the hook "proc-receive".</p></div>
10039 <div class="paragraph"><p>Optional modifiers can be provided in the beginning of the value to filter
10040 commands for specific actions: create (a), modify (m), delete (d).
10041 A <code>!</code> can be included in the modifiers to negate the reference prefix entry.
10042 E.g.:</p></div>
10043 <div class="literalblock">
10044 <div class="content">
10045 <pre><code>git config --system --add receive.procReceiveRefs ad:refs/heads
10046 git config --system --add receive.procReceiveRefs !:refs/heads</code></pre>
10047 </div></div>
10048 </dd>
10049 <dt class="hdlist1">
10050 receive.updateServerInfo
10051 </dt>
10052 <dd>
10053 <p>
10054         If set to true, git-receive-pack will run git-update-server-info
10055         after receiving data from git-push and updating refs.
10056 </p>
10057 </dd>
10058 <dt class="hdlist1">
10059 receive.shallowUpdate
10060 </dt>
10061 <dd>
10062 <p>
10063         If set to true, .git/shallow can be updated when new refs
10064         require new shallow roots. Otherwise those refs are rejected.
10065 </p>
10066 </dd>
10067 <dt class="hdlist1">
10068 remote.pushDefault
10069 </dt>
10070 <dd>
10071 <p>
10072         The remote to push to by default.  Overrides
10073         <code>branch.&lt;name&gt;.remote</code> for all branches, and is overridden by
10074         <code>branch.&lt;name&gt;.pushRemote</code> for specific branches.
10075 </p>
10076 </dd>
10077 <dt class="hdlist1">
10078 remote.&lt;name&gt;.url
10079 </dt>
10080 <dd>
10081 <p>
10082         The URL of a remote repository.  See <a href="git-fetch.html">git-fetch(1)</a> or
10083         <a href="git-push.html">git-push(1)</a>.
10084 </p>
10085 </dd>
10086 <dt class="hdlist1">
10087 remote.&lt;name&gt;.pushurl
10088 </dt>
10089 <dd>
10090 <p>
10091         The push URL of a remote repository.  See <a href="git-push.html">git-push(1)</a>.
10092 </p>
10093 </dd>
10094 <dt class="hdlist1">
10095 remote.&lt;name&gt;.proxy
10096 </dt>
10097 <dd>
10098 <p>
10099         For remotes that require curl (http, https and ftp), the URL to
10100         the proxy to use for that remote.  Set to the empty string to
10101         disable proxying for that remote.
10102 </p>
10103 </dd>
10104 <dt class="hdlist1">
10105 remote.&lt;name&gt;.proxyAuthMethod
10106 </dt>
10107 <dd>
10108 <p>
10109         For remotes that require curl (http, https and ftp), the method to use for
10110         authenticating against the proxy in use (probably set in
10111         <code>remote.&lt;name&gt;.proxy</code>). See <code>http.proxyAuthMethod</code>.
10112 </p>
10113 </dd>
10114 <dt class="hdlist1">
10115 remote.&lt;name&gt;.fetch
10116 </dt>
10117 <dd>
10118 <p>
10119         The default set of "refspec" for <a href="git-fetch.html">git-fetch(1)</a>. See
10120         <a href="git-fetch.html">git-fetch(1)</a>.
10121 </p>
10122 </dd>
10123 <dt class="hdlist1">
10124 remote.&lt;name&gt;.push
10125 </dt>
10126 <dd>
10127 <p>
10128         The default set of "refspec" for <a href="git-push.html">git-push(1)</a>. See
10129         <a href="git-push.html">git-push(1)</a>.
10130 </p>
10131 </dd>
10132 <dt class="hdlist1">
10133 remote.&lt;name&gt;.mirror
10134 </dt>
10135 <dd>
10136 <p>
10137         If true, pushing to this remote will automatically behave
10138         as if the <code>--mirror</code> option was given on the command line.
10139 </p>
10140 </dd>
10141 <dt class="hdlist1">
10142 remote.&lt;name&gt;.skipDefaultUpdate
10143 </dt>
10144 <dd>
10145 <p>
10146         If true, this remote will be skipped by default when updating
10147         using <a href="git-fetch.html">git-fetch(1)</a> or the <code>update</code> subcommand of
10148         <a href="git-remote.html">git-remote(1)</a>.
10149 </p>
10150 </dd>
10151 <dt class="hdlist1">
10152 remote.&lt;name&gt;.skipFetchAll
10153 </dt>
10154 <dd>
10155 <p>
10156         If true, this remote will be skipped by default when updating
10157         using <a href="git-fetch.html">git-fetch(1)</a> or the <code>update</code> subcommand of
10158         <a href="git-remote.html">git-remote(1)</a>.
10159 </p>
10160 </dd>
10161 <dt class="hdlist1">
10162 remote.&lt;name&gt;.receivepack
10163 </dt>
10164 <dd>
10165 <p>
10166         The default program to execute on the remote side when pushing.  See
10167         option --receive-pack of <a href="git-push.html">git-push(1)</a>.
10168 </p>
10169 </dd>
10170 <dt class="hdlist1">
10171 remote.&lt;name&gt;.uploadpack
10172 </dt>
10173 <dd>
10174 <p>
10175         The default program to execute on the remote side when fetching.  See
10176         option --upload-pack of <a href="git-fetch-pack.html">git-fetch-pack(1)</a>.
10177 </p>
10178 </dd>
10179 <dt class="hdlist1">
10180 remote.&lt;name&gt;.tagOpt
10181 </dt>
10182 <dd>
10183 <p>
10184         Setting this value to --no-tags disables automatic tag following when
10185         fetching from remote &lt;name&gt;. Setting it to --tags will fetch every
10186         tag from remote &lt;name&gt;, even if they are not reachable from remote
10187         branch heads. Passing these flags directly to <a href="git-fetch.html">git-fetch(1)</a> can
10188         override this setting. See options --tags and --no-tags of
10189         <a href="git-fetch.html">git-fetch(1)</a>.
10190 </p>
10191 </dd>
10192 <dt class="hdlist1">
10193 remote.&lt;name&gt;.vcs
10194 </dt>
10195 <dd>
10196 <p>
10197         Setting this to a value &lt;vcs&gt; will cause Git to interact with
10198         the remote with the git-remote-&lt;vcs&gt; helper.
10199 </p>
10200 </dd>
10201 <dt class="hdlist1">
10202 remote.&lt;name&gt;.prune
10203 </dt>
10204 <dd>
10205 <p>
10206         When set to true, fetching from this remote by default will also
10207         remove any remote-tracking references that no longer exist on the
10208         remote (as if the <code>--prune</code> option was given on the command line).
10209         Overrides <code>fetch.prune</code> settings, if any.
10210 </p>
10211 </dd>
10212 <dt class="hdlist1">
10213 remote.&lt;name&gt;.pruneTags
10214 </dt>
10215 <dd>
10216 <p>
10217         When set to true, fetching from this remote by default will also
10218         remove any local tags that no longer exist on the remote if pruning
10219         is activated in general via <code>remote.&lt;name&gt;.prune</code>, <code>fetch.prune</code> or
10220         <code>--prune</code>. Overrides <code>fetch.pruneTags</code> settings, if any.
10221 </p>
10222 <div class="paragraph"><p>See also <code>remote.&lt;name&gt;.prune</code> and the PRUNING section of
10223 <a href="git-fetch.html">git-fetch(1)</a>.</p></div>
10224 </dd>
10225 <dt class="hdlist1">
10226 remote.&lt;name&gt;.promisor
10227 </dt>
10228 <dd>
10229 <p>
10230         When set to true, this remote will be used to fetch promisor
10231         objects.
10232 </p>
10233 </dd>
10234 <dt class="hdlist1">
10235 remote.&lt;name&gt;.partialclonefilter
10236 </dt>
10237 <dd>
10238 <p>
10239         The filter that will be applied when fetching from this promisor remote.
10240         Changing or clearing this value will only affect fetches for new commits.
10241         To fetch associated objects for commits already present in the local object
10242         database, use the <code>--refetch</code> option of <a href="git-fetch.html">git-fetch(1)</a>.
10243 </p>
10244 </dd>
10245 <dt class="hdlist1">
10246 remotes.&lt;group&gt;
10247 </dt>
10248 <dd>
10249 <p>
10250         The list of remotes which are fetched by "git remote update
10251         &lt;group&gt;".  See <a href="git-remote.html">git-remote(1)</a>.
10252 </p>
10253 </dd>
10254 <dt class="hdlist1">
10255 repack.useDeltaBaseOffset
10256 </dt>
10257 <dd>
10258 <p>
10259         By default, <a href="git-repack.html">git-repack(1)</a> creates packs that use
10260         delta-base offset. If you need to share your repository with
10261         Git older than version 1.4.4, either directly or via a dumb
10262         protocol such as http, then you need to set this option to
10263         "false" and repack. Access from old Git versions over the
10264         native protocol are unaffected by this option.
10265 </p>
10266 </dd>
10267 <dt class="hdlist1">
10268 repack.packKeptObjects
10269 </dt>
10270 <dd>
10271 <p>
10272         If set to true, makes <code>git repack</code> act as if
10273         <code>--pack-kept-objects</code> was passed. See <a href="git-repack.html">git-repack(1)</a> for
10274         details. Defaults to <code>false</code> normally, but <code>true</code> if a bitmap
10275         index is being written (either via <code>--write-bitmap-index</code> or
10276         <code>repack.writeBitmaps</code>).
10277 </p>
10278 </dd>
10279 <dt class="hdlist1">
10280 repack.useDeltaIslands
10281 </dt>
10282 <dd>
10283 <p>
10284         If set to true, makes <code>git repack</code> act as if <code>--delta-islands</code>
10285         was passed. Defaults to <code>false</code>.
10286 </p>
10287 </dd>
10288 <dt class="hdlist1">
10289 repack.writeBitmaps
10290 </dt>
10291 <dd>
10292 <p>
10293         When true, git will write a bitmap index when packing all
10294         objects to disk (e.g., when <code>git repack -a</code> is run).  This
10295         index can speed up the "counting objects" phase of subsequent
10296         packs created for clones and fetches, at the cost of some disk
10297         space and extra time spent on the initial repack.  This has
10298         no effect if multiple packfiles are created.
10299         Defaults to true on bare repos, false otherwise.
10300 </p>
10301 </dd>
10302 <dt class="hdlist1">
10303 repack.updateServerInfo
10304 </dt>
10305 <dd>
10306 <p>
10307         If set to false, <a href="git-repack.html">git-repack(1)</a> will not run
10308         <a href="git-update-server-info.html">git-update-server-info(1)</a>. Defaults to true. Can be overridden
10309         when true by the <code>-n</code> option of <a href="git-repack.html">git-repack(1)</a>.
10310 </p>
10311 </dd>
10312 <dt class="hdlist1">
10313 repack.cruftWindow
10314 </dt>
10315 <dt class="hdlist1">
10316 repack.cruftWindowMemory
10317 </dt>
10318 <dt class="hdlist1">
10319 repack.cruftDepth
10320 </dt>
10321 <dt class="hdlist1">
10322 repack.cruftThreads
10323 </dt>
10324 <dd>
10325 <p>
10326         Parameters used by <a href="git-pack-objects.html">git-pack-objects(1)</a> when generating
10327         a cruft pack and the respective parameters are not given over
10328         the command line. See similarly named <code>pack.*</code> configuration
10329         variables for defaults and meaning.
10330 </p>
10331 </dd>
10332 <dt class="hdlist1">
10333 rerere.autoUpdate
10334 </dt>
10335 <dd>
10336 <p>
10337         When set to true, <code>git-rerere</code> updates the index with the
10338         resulting contents after it cleanly resolves conflicts using
10339         previously recorded resolutions.  Defaults to false.
10340 </p>
10341 </dd>
10342 <dt class="hdlist1">
10343 rerere.enabled
10344 </dt>
10345 <dd>
10346 <p>
10347         Activate recording of resolved conflicts, so that identical
10348         conflict hunks can be resolved automatically, should they be
10349         encountered again.  By default, <a href="git-rerere.html">git-rerere(1)</a> is
10350         enabled if there is an <code>rr-cache</code> directory under the
10351         <code>$GIT_DIR</code>, e.g. if "rerere" was previously used in the
10352         repository.
10353 </p>
10354 </dd>
10355 <dt class="hdlist1">
10356 revert.reference
10357 </dt>
10358 <dd>
10359 <p>
10360         Setting this variable to true makes <code>git revert</code> behave
10361         as if the <code>--reference</code> option is given.
10362 </p>
10363 </dd>
10364 <dt class="hdlist1">
10365 safe.bareRepository
10366 </dt>
10367 <dd>
10368 <p>
10369         Specifies which bare repositories Git will work with. The currently
10370         supported values are:
10371 </p>
10372 <div class="ulist"><ul>
10373 <li>
10374 <p>
10375 <code>all</code>: Git works with all bare repositories. This is the default.
10376 </p>
10377 </li>
10378 <li>
10379 <p>
10380 <code>explicit</code>: Git only works with bare repositories specified via
10381   the top-level <code>--git-dir</code> command-line option, or the <code>GIT_DIR</code>
10382   environment variable (see <a href="git.html">git(1)</a>).
10383 </p>
10384 <div class="paragraph"><p>If you do not use bare repositories in your workflow, then it may be
10385 beneficial to set <code>safe.bareRepository</code> to <code>explicit</code> in your global
10386 config. This will protect you from attacks that involve cloning a
10387 repository that contains a bare repository and running a Git command
10388 within that directory.</p></div>
10389 <div class="paragraph"><p>This config setting is only respected in protected configuration (see
10390 <a href="#SCOPES">[SCOPES]</a>). This prevents untrusted repositories from tampering with
10391 this value.</p></div>
10392 </li>
10393 </ul></div>
10394 </dd>
10395 <dt class="hdlist1">
10396 safe.directory
10397 </dt>
10398 <dd>
10399 <p>
10400         These config entries specify Git-tracked directories that are
10401         considered safe even if they are owned by someone other than the
10402         current user. By default, Git will refuse to even parse a Git
10403         config of a repository owned by someone else, let alone run its
10404         hooks, and this config setting allows users to specify exceptions,
10405         e.g. for intentionally shared repositories (see the <code>--shared</code>
10406         option in <a href="git-init.html">git-init(1)</a>).
10407 </p>
10408 <div class="paragraph"><p>This is a multi-valued setting, i.e. you can add more than one directory
10409 via <code>git config --add</code>. To reset the list of safe directories (e.g. to
10410 override any such directories specified in the system config), add a
10411 <code>safe.directory</code> entry with an empty value.</p></div>
10412 <div class="paragraph"><p>This config setting is only respected in protected configuration (see
10413 <a href="#SCOPES">[SCOPES]</a>). This prevents untrusted repositories from tampering with this
10414 value.</p></div>
10415 <div class="paragraph"><p>The value of this setting is interpolated, i.e. <code>~/&lt;path&gt;</code> expands to a
10416 path relative to the home directory and <code>%(prefix)/&lt;path&gt;</code> expands to a
10417 path relative to Git&#8217;s (runtime) prefix.</p></div>
10418 <div class="paragraph"><p>To completely opt-out of this security check, set <code>safe.directory</code> to the
10419 string <code>*</code>. This will allow all repositories to be treated as if their
10420 directory was listed in the <code>safe.directory</code> list. If <code>safe.directory=*</code>
10421 is set in system config and you want to re-enable this protection, then
10422 initialize your list with an empty value before listing the repositories
10423 that you deem safe.</p></div>
10424 <div class="paragraph"><p>As explained, Git only allows you to access repositories owned by
10425 yourself, i.e. the user who is running Git, by default.  When Git
10426 is running as <em>root</em> in a non Windows platform that provides sudo,
10427 however, git checks the SUDO_UID environment variable that sudo creates
10428 and will allow access to the uid recorded as its value in addition to
10429 the id from <em>root</em>.
10430 This is to make it easy to perform a common sequence during installation
10431 "make &amp;&amp; sudo make install".  A git process running under <em>sudo</em> runs as
10432 <em>root</em> but the <em>sudo</em> command exports the environment variable to record
10433 which id the original user has.
10434 If that is not what you would prefer and want git to only trust
10435 repositories that are owned by root instead, then you can remove
10436 the <code>SUDO_UID</code> variable from root&#8217;s environment before invoking git.</p></div>
10437 </dd>
10438 <dt class="hdlist1">
10439 sendemail.identity
10440 </dt>
10441 <dd>
10442 <p>
10443         A configuration identity. When given, causes values in the
10444         <em>sendemail.&lt;identity&gt;</em> subsection to take precedence over
10445         values in the <em>sendemail</em> section. The default identity is
10446         the value of <code>sendemail.identity</code>.
10447 </p>
10448 </dd>
10449 <dt class="hdlist1">
10450 sendemail.smtpEncryption
10451 </dt>
10452 <dd>
10453 <p>
10454         See <a href="git-send-email.html">git-send-email(1)</a> for description.  Note that this
10455         setting is not subject to the <em>identity</em> mechanism.
10456 </p>
10457 </dd>
10458 <dt class="hdlist1">
10459 sendemail.smtpsslcertpath
10460 </dt>
10461 <dd>
10462 <p>
10463         Path to ca-certificates (either a directory or a single file).
10464         Set it to an empty string to disable certificate verification.
10465 </p>
10466 </dd>
10467 <dt class="hdlist1">
10468 sendemail.&lt;identity&gt;.*
10469 </dt>
10470 <dd>
10471 <p>
10472         Identity-specific versions of the <em>sendemail.*</em> parameters
10473         found below, taking precedence over those when this
10474         identity is selected, through either the command-line or
10475         <code>sendemail.identity</code>.
10476 </p>
10477 </dd>
10478 <dt class="hdlist1">
10479 sendemail.multiEdit
10480 </dt>
10481 <dd>
10482 <p>
10483         If true (default), a single editor instance will be spawned to edit
10484         files you have to edit (patches when <code>--annotate</code> is used, and the
10485         summary when <code>--compose</code> is used). If false, files will be edited one
10486         after the other, spawning a new editor each time.
10487 </p>
10488 </dd>
10489 <dt class="hdlist1">
10490 sendemail.confirm
10491 </dt>
10492 <dd>
10493 <p>
10494         Sets the default for whether to confirm before sending. Must be
10495         one of <em>always</em>, <em>never</em>, <em>cc</em>, <em>compose</em>, or <em>auto</em>. See <code>--confirm</code>
10496         in the <a href="git-send-email.html">git-send-email(1)</a> documentation for the meaning of these
10497         values.
10498 </p>
10499 </dd>
10500 <dt class="hdlist1">
10501 sendemail.aliasesFile
10502 </dt>
10503 <dd>
10504 <p>
10505         To avoid typing long email addresses, point this to one or more
10506         email aliases files.  You must also supply <code>sendemail.aliasFileType</code>.
10507 </p>
10508 </dd>
10509 <dt class="hdlist1">
10510 sendemail.aliasFileType
10511 </dt>
10512 <dd>
10513 <p>
10514         Format of the file(s) specified in sendemail.aliasesFile. Must be
10515         one of <em>mutt</em>, <em>mailrc</em>, <em>pine</em>, <em>elm</em>, <em>gnus</em>, or <em>sendmail</em>.
10516 </p>
10517 <div class="paragraph"><p>What an alias file in each format looks like can be found in
10518 the documentation of the email program of the same name. The
10519 differences and limitations from the standard formats are
10520 described below:</p></div>
10521 <div class="openblock">
10522 <div class="content">
10523 <div class="dlist"><dl>
10524 <dt class="hdlist1">
10525 sendmail
10526 </dt>
10527 <dd>
10528 <div class="ulist"><ul>
10529 <li>
10530 <p>
10531 Quoted aliases and quoted addresses are not supported: lines that
10532         contain a <code>"</code> symbol are ignored.
10533 </p>
10534 </li>
10535 <li>
10536 <p>
10537 Redirection to a file (<code>/path/name</code>) or pipe (<code>|command</code>) is not
10538         supported.
10539 </p>
10540 </li>
10541 <li>
10542 <p>
10543 File inclusion (<code>:include: /path/name</code>) is not supported.
10544 </p>
10545 </li>
10546 <li>
10547 <p>
10548 Warnings are printed on the standard error output for any
10549         explicitly unsupported constructs, and any other lines that are not
10550         recognized by the parser.
10551 </p>
10552 </li>
10553 </ul></div>
10554 </dd>
10555 </dl></div>
10556 </div></div>
10557 </dd>
10558 <dt class="hdlist1">
10559 sendemail.annotate
10560 </dt>
10561 <dt class="hdlist1">
10562 sendemail.bcc
10563 </dt>
10564 <dt class="hdlist1">
10565 sendemail.cc
10566 </dt>
10567 <dt class="hdlist1">
10568 sendemail.ccCmd
10569 </dt>
10570 <dt class="hdlist1">
10571 sendemail.chainReplyTo
10572 </dt>
10573 <dt class="hdlist1">
10574 sendemail.envelopeSender
10575 </dt>
10576 <dt class="hdlist1">
10577 sendemail.from
10578 </dt>
10579 <dt class="hdlist1">
10580 sendemail.headerCmd
10581 </dt>
10582 <dt class="hdlist1">
10583 sendemail.signedoffbycc
10584 </dt>
10585 <dt class="hdlist1">
10586 sendemail.smtpPass
10587 </dt>
10588 <dt class="hdlist1">
10589 sendemail.suppresscc
10590 </dt>
10591 <dt class="hdlist1">
10592 sendemail.suppressFrom
10593 </dt>
10594 <dt class="hdlist1">
10595 sendemail.to
10596 </dt>
10597 <dt class="hdlist1">
10598 sendemail.tocmd
10599 </dt>
10600 <dt class="hdlist1">
10601 sendemail.smtpDomain
10602 </dt>
10603 <dt class="hdlist1">
10604 sendemail.smtpServer
10605 </dt>
10606 <dt class="hdlist1">
10607 sendemail.smtpServerPort
10608 </dt>
10609 <dt class="hdlist1">
10610 sendemail.smtpServerOption
10611 </dt>
10612 <dt class="hdlist1">
10613 sendemail.smtpUser
10614 </dt>
10615 <dt class="hdlist1">
10616 sendemail.thread
10617 </dt>
10618 <dt class="hdlist1">
10619 sendemail.transferEncoding
10620 </dt>
10621 <dt class="hdlist1">
10622 sendemail.validate
10623 </dt>
10624 <dt class="hdlist1">
10625 sendemail.xmailer
10626 </dt>
10627 <dd>
10628 <p>
10629         These configuration variables all provide a default for
10630         <a href="git-send-email.html">git-send-email(1)</a> command-line options. See its
10631         documentation for details.
10632 </p>
10633 </dd>
10634 <dt class="hdlist1">
10635 sendemail.signedoffcc (deprecated)
10636 </dt>
10637 <dd>
10638 <p>
10639         Deprecated alias for <code>sendemail.signedoffbycc</code>.
10640 </p>
10641 </dd>
10642 <dt class="hdlist1">
10643 sendemail.smtpBatchSize
10644 </dt>
10645 <dd>
10646 <p>
10647         Number of messages to be sent per connection, after that a relogin
10648         will happen.  If the value is 0 or undefined, send all messages in
10649         one connection.
10650         See also the <code>--batch-size</code> option of <a href="git-send-email.html">git-send-email(1)</a>.
10651 </p>
10652 </dd>
10653 <dt class="hdlist1">
10654 sendemail.smtpReloginDelay
10655 </dt>
10656 <dd>
10657 <p>
10658         Seconds to wait before reconnecting to the smtp server.
10659         See also the <code>--relogin-delay</code> option of <a href="git-send-email.html">git-send-email(1)</a>.
10660 </p>
10661 </dd>
10662 <dt class="hdlist1">
10663 sendemail.forbidSendmailVariables
10664 </dt>
10665 <dd>
10666 <p>
10667         To avoid common misconfiguration mistakes, <a href="git-send-email.html">git-send-email(1)</a>
10668         will abort with a warning if any configuration options for "sendmail"
10669         exist. Set this variable to bypass the check.
10670 </p>
10671 </dd>
10672 <dt class="hdlist1">
10673 sequence.editor
10674 </dt>
10675 <dd>
10676 <p>
10677         Text editor used by <code>git rebase -i</code> for editing the rebase instruction file.
10678         The value is meant to be interpreted by the shell when it is used.
10679         It can be overridden by the <code>GIT_SEQUENCE_EDITOR</code> environment variable.
10680         When not configured, the default commit message editor is used instead.
10681 </p>
10682 </dd>
10683 <dt class="hdlist1">
10684 showBranch.default
10685 </dt>
10686 <dd>
10687 <p>
10688         The default set of branches for <a href="git-show-branch.html">git-show-branch(1)</a>.
10689         See <a href="git-show-branch.html">git-show-branch(1)</a>.
10690 </p>
10691 </dd>
10692 <dt class="hdlist1">
10693 sparse.expectFilesOutsideOfPatterns
10694 </dt>
10695 <dd>
10696 <p>
10697         Typically with sparse checkouts, files not matching any
10698         sparsity patterns are marked with a SKIP_WORKTREE bit in the
10699         index and are missing from the working tree.  Accordingly, Git
10700         will ordinarily check whether files with the SKIP_WORKTREE bit
10701         are in fact present in the working tree contrary to
10702         expectations.  If Git finds any, it marks those paths as
10703         present by clearing the relevant SKIP_WORKTREE bits.  This
10704         option can be used to tell Git that such
10705         present-despite-skipped files are expected and to stop
10706         checking for them.
10707 </p>
10708 <div class="paragraph"><p>The default is <code>false</code>, which allows Git to automatically recover
10709 from the list of files in the index and working tree falling out of
10710 sync.</p></div>
10711 <div class="paragraph"><p>Set this to <code>true</code> if you are in a setup where some external factor
10712 relieves Git of the responsibility for maintaining the consistency
10713 between the presence of working tree files and sparsity patterns.  For
10714 example, if you have a Git-aware virtual file system that has a robust
10715 mechanism for keeping the working tree and the sparsity patterns up to
10716 date based on access patterns.</p></div>
10717 <div class="paragraph"><p>Regardless of this setting, Git does not check for
10718 present-despite-skipped files unless sparse checkout is enabled, so
10719 this config option has no effect unless <code>core.sparseCheckout</code> is
10720 <code>true</code>.</p></div>
10721 </dd>
10722 <dt class="hdlist1">
10723 splitIndex.maxPercentChange
10724 </dt>
10725 <dd>
10726 <p>
10727         When the split index feature is used, this specifies the
10728         percent of entries the split index can contain compared to the
10729         total number of entries in both the split index and the shared
10730         index before a new shared index is written.
10731         The value should be between 0 and 100. If the value is 0, then
10732         a new shared index is always written; if it is 100, a new
10733         shared index is never written.
10734         By default, the value is 20, so a new shared index is written
10735         if the number of entries in the split index would be greater
10736         than 20 percent of the total number of entries.
10737         See <a href="git-update-index.html">git-update-index(1)</a>.
10738 </p>
10739 </dd>
10740 <dt class="hdlist1">
10741 splitIndex.sharedIndexExpire
10742 </dt>
10743 <dd>
10744 <p>
10745         When the split index feature is used, shared index files that
10746         were not modified since the time this variable specifies will
10747         be removed when a new shared index file is created. The value
10748         "now" expires all entries immediately, and "never" suppresses
10749         expiration altogether.
10750         The default value is "2.weeks.ago".
10751         Note that a shared index file is considered modified (for the
10752         purpose of expiration) each time a new split-index file is
10753         either created based on it or read from it.
10754         See <a href="git-update-index.html">git-update-index(1)</a>.
10755 </p>
10756 </dd>
10757 <dt class="hdlist1">
10758 ssh.variant
10759 </dt>
10760 <dd>
10761 <p>
10762         By default, Git determines the command line arguments to use
10763         based on the basename of the configured SSH command (configured
10764         using the environment variable <code>GIT_SSH</code> or <code>GIT_SSH_COMMAND</code> or
10765         the config setting <code>core.sshCommand</code>). If the basename is
10766         unrecognized, Git will attempt to detect support of OpenSSH
10767         options by first invoking the configured SSH command with the
10768         <code>-G</code> (print configuration) option and will subsequently use
10769         OpenSSH options (if that is successful) or no options besides
10770         the host and remote command (if it fails).
10771 </p>
10772 <div class="paragraph"><p>The config variable <code>ssh.variant</code> can be set to override this detection.
10773 Valid values are <code>ssh</code> (to use OpenSSH options), <code>plink</code>, <code>putty</code>,
10774 <code>tortoiseplink</code>, <code>simple</code> (no options except the host and remote command).
10775 The default auto-detection can be explicitly requested using the value
10776 <code>auto</code>.  Any other value is treated as <code>ssh</code>.  This setting can also be
10777 overridden via the environment variable <code>GIT_SSH_VARIANT</code>.</p></div>
10778 <div class="paragraph"><p>The current command-line parameters used for each variant are as
10779 follows:</p></div>
10780 <div class="openblock">
10781 <div class="content">
10782 <div class="ulist"><ul>
10783 <li>
10784 <p>
10785 <code>ssh</code> - [-p port] [-4] [-6] [-o option] [username@]host command
10786 </p>
10787 </li>
10788 <li>
10789 <p>
10790 <code>simple</code> - [username@]host command
10791 </p>
10792 </li>
10793 <li>
10794 <p>
10795 <code>plink</code> or <code>putty</code> - [-P port] [-4] [-6] [username@]host command
10796 </p>
10797 </li>
10798 <li>
10799 <p>
10800 <code>tortoiseplink</code> - [-P port] [-4] [-6] -batch [username@]host command
10801 </p>
10802 </li>
10803 </ul></div>
10804 </div></div>
10805 <div class="paragraph"><p>Except for the <code>simple</code> variant, command-line parameters are likely to
10806 change as git gains new features.</p></div>
10807 </dd>
10808 <dt class="hdlist1">
10809 status.relativePaths
10810 </dt>
10811 <dd>
10812 <p>
10813         By default, <a href="git-status.html">git-status(1)</a> shows paths relative to the
10814         current directory. Setting this variable to <code>false</code> shows paths
10815         relative to the repository root (this was the default for Git
10816         prior to v1.5.4).
10817 </p>
10818 </dd>
10819 <dt class="hdlist1">
10820 status.short
10821 </dt>
10822 <dd>
10823 <p>
10824         Set to true to enable --short by default in <a href="git-status.html">git-status(1)</a>.
10825         The option --no-short takes precedence over this variable.
10826 </p>
10827 </dd>
10828 <dt class="hdlist1">
10829 status.branch
10830 </dt>
10831 <dd>
10832 <p>
10833         Set to true to enable --branch by default in <a href="git-status.html">git-status(1)</a>.
10834         The option --no-branch takes precedence over this variable.
10835 </p>
10836 </dd>
10837 <dt class="hdlist1">
10838 status.aheadBehind
10839 </dt>
10840 <dd>
10841 <p>
10842         Set to true to enable <code>--ahead-behind</code> and false to enable
10843         <code>--no-ahead-behind</code> by default in <a href="git-status.html">git-status(1)</a> for
10844         non-porcelain status formats.  Defaults to true.
10845 </p>
10846 </dd>
10847 <dt class="hdlist1">
10848 status.displayCommentPrefix
10849 </dt>
10850 <dd>
10851 <p>
10852         If set to true, <a href="git-status.html">git-status(1)</a> will insert a comment
10853         prefix before each output line (starting with
10854         <code>core.commentChar</code>, i.e. <code>#</code> by default). This was the
10855         behavior of <a href="git-status.html">git-status(1)</a> in Git 1.8.4 and previous.
10856         Defaults to false.
10857 </p>
10858 </dd>
10859 <dt class="hdlist1">
10860 status.renameLimit
10861 </dt>
10862 <dd>
10863 <p>
10864         The number of files to consider when performing rename detection
10865         in <a href="git-status.html">git-status(1)</a> and <a href="git-commit.html">git-commit(1)</a>. Defaults to
10866         the value of diff.renameLimit.
10867 </p>
10868 </dd>
10869 <dt class="hdlist1">
10870 status.renames
10871 </dt>
10872 <dd>
10873 <p>
10874         Whether and how Git detects renames in <a href="git-status.html">git-status(1)</a> and
10875         <a href="git-commit.html">git-commit(1)</a> .  If set to "false", rename detection is
10876         disabled. If set to "true", basic rename detection is enabled.
10877         If set to "copies" or "copy", Git will detect copies, as well.
10878         Defaults to the value of diff.renames.
10879 </p>
10880 </dd>
10881 <dt class="hdlist1">
10882 status.showStash
10883 </dt>
10884 <dd>
10885 <p>
10886         If set to true, <a href="git-status.html">git-status(1)</a> will display the number of
10887         entries currently stashed away.
10888         Defaults to false.
10889 </p>
10890 </dd>
10891 <dt class="hdlist1">
10892 status.showUntrackedFiles
10893 </dt>
10894 <dd>
10895 <p>
10896         By default, <a href="git-status.html">git-status(1)</a> and <a href="git-commit.html">git-commit(1)</a> show
10897         files which are not currently tracked by Git. Directories which
10898         contain only untracked files, are shown with the directory name
10899         only. Showing untracked files means that Git needs to lstat() all
10900         the files in the whole repository, which might be slow on some
10901         systems. So, this variable controls how the commands display
10902         the untracked files. Possible values are:
10903 </p>
10904 <div class="openblock">
10905 <div class="content">
10906 <div class="ulist"><ul>
10907 <li>
10908 <p>
10909 <code>no</code> - Show no untracked files.
10910 </p>
10911 </li>
10912 <li>
10913 <p>
10914 <code>normal</code> - Show untracked files and directories.
10915 </p>
10916 </li>
10917 <li>
10918 <p>
10919 <code>all</code> - Show also individual files in untracked directories.
10920 </p>
10921 </li>
10922 </ul></div>
10923 </div></div>
10924 <div class="paragraph"><p>If this variable is not specified, it defaults to <em>normal</em>.
10925 This variable can be overridden with the -u|--untracked-files option
10926 of <a href="git-status.html">git-status(1)</a> and <a href="git-commit.html">git-commit(1)</a>.</p></div>
10927 </dd>
10928 <dt class="hdlist1">
10929 status.submoduleSummary
10930 </dt>
10931 <dd>
10932 <p>
10933         Defaults to false.
10934         If this is set to a non-zero number or true (identical to -1 or an
10935         unlimited number), the submodule summary will be enabled and a
10936         summary of commits for modified submodules will be shown (see
10937         --summary-limit option of <a href="git-submodule.html">git-submodule(1)</a>). Please note
10938         that the summary output command will be suppressed for all
10939         submodules when <code>diff.ignoreSubmodules</code> is set to <em>all</em> or only
10940         for those submodules where <code>submodule.&lt;name&gt;.ignore=all</code>. The only
10941         exception to that rule is that status and commit will show staged
10942         submodule changes. To
10943         also view the summary for ignored submodules you can either use
10944         the --ignore-submodules=dirty command-line option or the <em>git
10945         submodule summary</em> command, which shows a similar output but does
10946         not honor these settings.
10947 </p>
10948 </dd>
10949 <dt class="hdlist1">
10950 stash.showIncludeUntracked
10951 </dt>
10952 <dd>
10953 <p>
10954         If this is set to true, the <code>git stash show</code> command will show
10955         the untracked files of a stash entry.  Defaults to false. See
10956         the description of the <em>show</em> command in <a href="git-stash.html">git-stash(1)</a>.
10957 </p>
10958 </dd>
10959 <dt class="hdlist1">
10960 stash.showPatch
10961 </dt>
10962 <dd>
10963 <p>
10964         If this is set to true, the <code>git stash show</code> command without an
10965         option will show the stash entry in patch form.  Defaults to false.
10966         See the description of the <em>show</em> command in <a href="git-stash.html">git-stash(1)</a>.
10967 </p>
10968 </dd>
10969 <dt class="hdlist1">
10970 stash.showStat
10971 </dt>
10972 <dd>
10973 <p>
10974         If this is set to true, the <code>git stash show</code> command without an
10975         option will show a diffstat of the stash entry.  Defaults to true.
10976         See the description of the <em>show</em> command in <a href="git-stash.html">git-stash(1)</a>.
10977 </p>
10978 </dd>
10979 <dt class="hdlist1">
10980 submodule.&lt;name&gt;.url
10981 </dt>
10982 <dd>
10983 <p>
10984         The URL for a submodule. This variable is copied from the .gitmodules
10985         file to the git config via <em>git submodule init</em>. The user can change
10986         the configured URL before obtaining the submodule via <em>git submodule
10987         update</em>. If neither submodule.&lt;name&gt;.active nor submodule.active are
10988         set, the presence of this variable is used as a fallback to indicate
10989         whether the submodule is of interest to git commands.
10990         See <a href="git-submodule.html">git-submodule(1)</a> and <a href="gitmodules.html">gitmodules(5)</a> for details.
10991 </p>
10992 </dd>
10993 <dt class="hdlist1">
10994 submodule.&lt;name&gt;.update
10995 </dt>
10996 <dd>
10997 <p>
10998         The method by which a submodule is updated by <em>git submodule update</em>,
10999         which is the only affected command, others such as
11000         <em>git checkout --recurse-submodules</em> are unaffected. It exists for
11001         historical reasons, when <em>git submodule</em> was the only command to
11002         interact with submodules; settings like <code>submodule.active</code>
11003         and <code>pull.rebase</code> are more specific. It is populated by
11004         <code>git submodule init</code> from the <a href="gitmodules.html">gitmodules(5)</a> file.
11005         See description of <em>update</em> command in <a href="git-submodule.html">git-submodule(1)</a>.
11006 </p>
11007 </dd>
11008 <dt class="hdlist1">
11009 submodule.&lt;name&gt;.branch
11010 </dt>
11011 <dd>
11012 <p>
11013         The remote branch name for a submodule, used by <code>git submodule
11014         update --remote</code>.  Set this option to override the value found in
11015         the <code>.gitmodules</code> file.  See <a href="git-submodule.html">git-submodule(1)</a> and
11016         <a href="gitmodules.html">gitmodules(5)</a> for details.
11017 </p>
11018 </dd>
11019 <dt class="hdlist1">
11020 submodule.&lt;name&gt;.fetchRecurseSubmodules
11021 </dt>
11022 <dd>
11023 <p>
11024         This option can be used to control recursive fetching of this
11025         submodule. It can be overridden by using the --[no-]recurse-submodules
11026         command-line option to "git fetch" and "git pull".
11027         This setting will override that from in the <a href="gitmodules.html">gitmodules(5)</a>
11028         file.
11029 </p>
11030 </dd>
11031 <dt class="hdlist1">
11032 submodule.&lt;name&gt;.ignore
11033 </dt>
11034 <dd>
11035 <p>
11036         Defines under what circumstances "git status" and the diff family show
11037         a submodule as modified. When set to "all", it will never be considered
11038         modified (but it will nonetheless show up in the output of status and
11039         commit when it has been staged), "dirty" will ignore all changes
11040         to the submodule&#8217;s work tree and
11041         takes only differences between the HEAD of the submodule and the commit
11042         recorded in the superproject into account. "untracked" will additionally
11043         let submodules with modified tracked files in their work tree show up.
11044         Using "none" (the default when this option is not set) also shows
11045         submodules that have untracked files in their work tree as changed.
11046         This setting overrides any setting made in .gitmodules for this submodule,
11047         both settings can be overridden on the command line by using the
11048         "--ignore-submodules" option. The <em>git submodule</em> commands are not
11049         affected by this setting.
11050 </p>
11051 </dd>
11052 <dt class="hdlist1">
11053 submodule.&lt;name&gt;.active
11054 </dt>
11055 <dd>
11056 <p>
11057         Boolean value indicating if the submodule is of interest to git
11058         commands.  This config option takes precedence over the
11059         submodule.active config option. See <a href="gitsubmodules.html">gitsubmodules(7)</a> for
11060         details.
11061 </p>
11062 </dd>
11063 <dt class="hdlist1">
11064 submodule.active
11065 </dt>
11066 <dd>
11067 <p>
11068         A repeated field which contains a pathspec used to match against a
11069         submodule&#8217;s path to determine if the submodule is of interest to git
11070         commands. See <a href="gitsubmodules.html">gitsubmodules(7)</a> for details.
11071 </p>
11072 </dd>
11073 <dt class="hdlist1">
11074 submodule.recurse
11075 </dt>
11076 <dd>
11077 <p>
11078         A boolean indicating if commands should enable the <code>--recurse-submodules</code>
11079         option by default. Defaults to false.
11080 </p>
11081 <div class="paragraph"><p>When set to true, it can be deactivated via the
11082 <code>--no-recurse-submodules</code> option. Note that some Git commands
11083 lacking this option may call some of the above commands affected by
11084 <code>submodule.recurse</code>; for instance <code>git remote update</code> will call
11085 <code>git fetch</code> but does not have a <code>--no-recurse-submodules</code> option.
11086 For these commands a workaround is to temporarily change the
11087 configuration value by using <code>git -c submodule.recurse=0</code>.</p></div>
11088 <div class="paragraph"><p>The following list shows the commands that accept
11089 <code>--recurse-submodules</code> and whether they are supported by this
11090 setting.</p></div>
11091 <div class="ulist"><ul>
11092 <li>
11093 <p>
11094 <code>checkout</code>, <code>fetch</code>, <code>grep</code>, <code>pull</code>, <code>push</code>, <code>read-tree</code>,
11095 <code>reset</code>, <code>restore</code> and <code>switch</code> are always supported.
11096 </p>
11097 </li>
11098 <li>
11099 <p>
11100 <code>clone</code> and <code>ls-files</code> are not supported.
11101 </p>
11102 </li>
11103 <li>
11104 <p>
11105 <code>branch</code> is supported only if <code>submodule.propagateBranches</code> is
11106 enabled
11107 </p>
11108 </li>
11109 </ul></div>
11110 </dd>
11111 <dt class="hdlist1">
11112 submodule.propagateBranches
11113 </dt>
11114 <dd>
11115 <p>
11116         [EXPERIMENTAL] A boolean that enables branching support when
11117         using <code>--recurse-submodules</code> or <code>submodule.recurse=true</code>.
11118         Enabling this will allow certain commands to accept
11119         <code>--recurse-submodules</code> and certain commands that already accept
11120         <code>--recurse-submodules</code> will now consider branches.
11121         Defaults to false.
11122 </p>
11123 </dd>
11124 <dt class="hdlist1">
11125 submodule.fetchJobs
11126 </dt>
11127 <dd>
11128 <p>
11129         Specifies how many submodules are fetched/cloned at the same time.
11130         A positive integer allows up to that number of submodules fetched
11131         in parallel. A value of 0 will give some reasonable default.
11132         If unset, it defaults to 1.
11133 </p>
11134 </dd>
11135 <dt class="hdlist1">
11136 submodule.alternateLocation
11137 </dt>
11138 <dd>
11139 <p>
11140         Specifies how the submodules obtain alternates when submodules are
11141         cloned. Possible values are <code>no</code>, <code>superproject</code>.
11142         By default <code>no</code> is assumed, which doesn&#8217;t add references. When the
11143         value is set to <code>superproject</code> the submodule to be cloned computes
11144         its alternates location relative to the superprojects alternate.
11145 </p>
11146 </dd>
11147 <dt class="hdlist1">
11148 submodule.alternateErrorStrategy
11149 </dt>
11150 <dd>
11151 <p>
11152         Specifies how to treat errors with the alternates for a submodule
11153         as computed via <code>submodule.alternateLocation</code>. Possible values are
11154         <code>ignore</code>, <code>info</code>, <code>die</code>. Default is <code>die</code>. Note that if set to <code>ignore</code>
11155         or <code>info</code>, and if there is an error with the computed alternate, the
11156         clone proceeds as if no alternate was specified.
11157 </p>
11158 </dd>
11159 <dt class="hdlist1">
11160 tag.forceSignAnnotated
11161 </dt>
11162 <dd>
11163 <p>
11164         A boolean to specify whether annotated tags created should be GPG signed.
11165         If <code>--annotate</code> is specified on the command line, it takes
11166         precedence over this option.
11167 </p>
11168 </dd>
11169 <dt class="hdlist1">
11170 tag.sort
11171 </dt>
11172 <dd>
11173 <p>
11174         This variable controls the sort ordering of tags when displayed by
11175         <a href="git-tag.html">git-tag(1)</a>. Without the "--sort=&lt;value&gt;" option provided, the
11176         value of this variable will be used as the default.
11177 </p>
11178 </dd>
11179 <dt class="hdlist1">
11180 tag.gpgSign
11181 </dt>
11182 <dd>
11183 <p>
11184         A boolean to specify whether all tags should be GPG signed.
11185         Use of this option when running in an automated script can
11186         result in a large number of tags being signed. It is therefore
11187         convenient to use an agent to avoid typing your gpg passphrase
11188         several times. Note that this option doesn&#8217;t affect tag signing
11189         behavior enabled by "-u &lt;keyid&gt;" or "--local-user=&lt;keyid&gt;" options.
11190 </p>
11191 </dd>
11192 <dt class="hdlist1">
11193 tar.umask
11194 </dt>
11195 <dd>
11196 <p>
11197         This variable can be used to restrict the permission bits of
11198         tar archive entries.  The default is 0002, which turns off the
11199         world write bit.  The special value "user" indicates that the
11200         archiving user&#8217;s umask will be used instead.  See umask(2) and
11201         <a href="git-archive.html">git-archive(1)</a>.
11202 </p>
11203 </dd>
11204 </dl></div>
11205 <div class="paragraph"><p>Trace2 config settings are only read from the system and global
11206 config files; repository local and worktree config files and <code>-c</code>
11207 command line arguments are not respected.</p></div>
11208 <div class="dlist"><dl>
11209 <dt class="hdlist1">
11210 trace2.normalTarget
11211 </dt>
11212 <dd>
11213 <p>
11214         This variable controls the normal target destination.
11215         It may be overridden by the <code>GIT_TRACE2</code> environment variable.
11216         The following table shows possible values.
11217 </p>
11218 </dd>
11219 <dt class="hdlist1">
11220 trace2.perfTarget
11221 </dt>
11222 <dd>
11223 <p>
11224         This variable controls the performance target destination.
11225         It may be overridden by the <code>GIT_TRACE2_PERF</code> environment variable.
11226         The following table shows possible values.
11227 </p>
11228 </dd>
11229 <dt class="hdlist1">
11230 trace2.eventTarget
11231 </dt>
11232 <dd>
11233 <p>
11234         This variable controls the event target destination.
11235         It may be overridden by the <code>GIT_TRACE2_EVENT</code> environment variable.
11236         The following table shows possible values.
11237 </p>
11238 <div class="openblock">
11239 <div class="content">
11240 <div class="ulist"><ul>
11241 <li>
11242 <p>
11243 <code>0</code> or <code>false</code> - Disables the target.
11244 </p>
11245 </li>
11246 <li>
11247 <p>
11248 <code>1</code> or <code>true</code> - Writes to <code>STDERR</code>.
11249 </p>
11250 </li>
11251 <li>
11252 <p>
11253 <code>[2-9]</code> - Writes to the already opened file descriptor.
11254 </p>
11255 </li>
11256 <li>
11257 <p>
11258 <code>&lt;absolute-pathname&gt;</code> - Writes to the file in append mode. If the target
11259 already exists and is a directory, the traces will be written to files (one
11260 per process) underneath the given directory.
11261 </p>
11262 </li>
11263 <li>
11264 <p>
11265 <code>af_unix:[&lt;socket_type&gt;:]&lt;absolute-pathname&gt;</code> - Write to a
11266 Unix DomainSocket (on platforms that support them).  Socket
11267 type can be either <code>stream</code> or <code>dgram</code>; if omitted Git will
11268 try both.
11269 </p>
11270 </li>
11271 </ul></div>
11272 </div></div>
11273 </dd>
11274 <dt class="hdlist1">
11275 trace2.normalBrief
11276 </dt>
11277 <dd>
11278 <p>
11279         Boolean.  When true <code>time</code>, <code>filename</code>, and <code>line</code> fields are
11280         omitted from normal output.  May be overridden by the
11281         <code>GIT_TRACE2_BRIEF</code> environment variable.  Defaults to false.
11282 </p>
11283 </dd>
11284 <dt class="hdlist1">
11285 trace2.perfBrief
11286 </dt>
11287 <dd>
11288 <p>
11289         Boolean.  When true <code>time</code>, <code>filename</code>, and <code>line</code> fields are
11290         omitted from PERF output.  May be overridden by the
11291         <code>GIT_TRACE2_PERF_BRIEF</code> environment variable.  Defaults to false.
11292 </p>
11293 </dd>
11294 <dt class="hdlist1">
11295 trace2.eventBrief
11296 </dt>
11297 <dd>
11298 <p>
11299         Boolean.  When true <code>time</code>, <code>filename</code>, and <code>line</code> fields are
11300         omitted from event output.  May be overridden by the
11301         <code>GIT_TRACE2_EVENT_BRIEF</code> environment variable.  Defaults to false.
11302 </p>
11303 </dd>
11304 <dt class="hdlist1">
11305 trace2.eventNesting
11306 </dt>
11307 <dd>
11308 <p>
11309         Integer.  Specifies desired depth of nested regions in the
11310         event output.  Regions deeper than this value will be
11311         omitted.  May be overridden by the <code>GIT_TRACE2_EVENT_NESTING</code>
11312         environment variable.  Defaults to 2.
11313 </p>
11314 </dd>
11315 <dt class="hdlist1">
11316 trace2.configParams
11317 </dt>
11318 <dd>
11319 <p>
11320         A comma-separated list of patterns of "important" config
11321         settings that should be recorded in the trace2 output.
11322         For example, <code>core.*,remote.*.url</code> would cause the trace2
11323         output to contain events listing each configured remote.
11324         May be overridden by the <code>GIT_TRACE2_CONFIG_PARAMS</code> environment
11325         variable.  Unset by default.
11326 </p>
11327 </dd>
11328 <dt class="hdlist1">
11329 trace2.envVars
11330 </dt>
11331 <dd>
11332 <p>
11333         A comma-separated list of "important" environment variables that should
11334         be recorded in the trace2 output.  For example,
11335         <code>GIT_HTTP_USER_AGENT,GIT_CONFIG</code> would cause the trace2 output to
11336         contain events listing the overrides for HTTP user agent and the
11337         location of the Git configuration file (assuming any are set).  May be
11338         overridden by the <code>GIT_TRACE2_ENV_VARS</code> environment variable.  Unset by
11339         default.
11340 </p>
11341 </dd>
11342 <dt class="hdlist1">
11343 trace2.destinationDebug
11344 </dt>
11345 <dd>
11346 <p>
11347         Boolean.  When true Git will print error messages when a
11348         trace target destination cannot be opened for writing.
11349         By default, these errors are suppressed and tracing is
11350         silently disabled.  May be overridden by the
11351         <code>GIT_TRACE2_DST_DEBUG</code> environment variable.
11352 </p>
11353 </dd>
11354 <dt class="hdlist1">
11355 trace2.maxFiles
11356 </dt>
11357 <dd>
11358 <p>
11359         Integer.  When writing trace files to a target directory, do not
11360         write additional traces if doing so would exceed this many files. Instead,
11361         write a sentinel file that will block further tracing to this
11362         directory. Defaults to 0, which disables this check.
11363 </p>
11364 </dd>
11365 <dt class="hdlist1">
11366 transfer.credentialsInUrl
11367 </dt>
11368 <dd>
11369 <p>
11370         A configured URL can contain plaintext credentials in the form
11371         <code>&lt;protocol&gt;://&lt;user&gt;:&lt;password&gt;@&lt;domain&gt;/&lt;path&gt;</code>. You may want
11372         to warn or forbid the use of such configuration (in favor of
11373         using <a href="git-credential.html">git-credential(1)</a>). This will be used on
11374         <a href="git-clone.html">git-clone(1)</a>, <a href="git-fetch.html">git-fetch(1)</a>, <a href="git-push.html">git-push(1)</a>,
11375         and any other direct use of the configured URL.
11376 </p>
11377 <div class="paragraph"><p>Note that this is currently limited to detecting credentials in
11378 <code>remote.&lt;name&gt;.url</code> configuration; it won&#8217;t detect credentials in
11379 <code>remote.&lt;name&gt;.pushurl</code> configuration.</p></div>
11380 <div class="paragraph"><p>You might want to enable this to prevent inadvertent credentials
11381 exposure, e.g. because:</p></div>
11382 <div class="ulist"><ul>
11383 <li>
11384 <p>
11385 The OS or system where you&#8217;re running git may not provide a way or
11386   otherwise allow you to configure the permissions of the
11387   configuration file where the username and/or password are stored.
11388 </p>
11389 </li>
11390 <li>
11391 <p>
11392 Even if it does, having such data stored "at rest" might expose you
11393   in other ways, e.g. a backup process might copy the data to another
11394   system.
11395 </p>
11396 </li>
11397 <li>
11398 <p>
11399 The git programs will pass the full URL to one another as arguments
11400   on the command-line, meaning the credentials will be exposed to other
11401   unprivileged users on systems that allow them to see the full
11402   process list of other users. On linux the "hidepid" setting
11403   documented in procfs(5) allows for configuring this behavior.
11404 </p>
11405 <div class="paragraph"><p>If such concerns don&#8217;t apply to you then you probably don&#8217;t need to be
11406 concerned about credentials exposure due to storing sensitive
11407 data in git&#8217;s configuration files. If you do want to use this, set
11408 <code>transfer.credentialsInUrl</code> to one of these values:</p></div>
11409 </li>
11410 <li>
11411 <p>
11412 <code>allow</code> (default): Git will proceed with its activity without warning.
11413 </p>
11414 </li>
11415 <li>
11416 <p>
11417 <code>warn</code>: Git will write a warning message to <code>stderr</code> when parsing a URL
11418   with a plaintext credential.
11419 </p>
11420 </li>
11421 <li>
11422 <p>
11423 <code>die</code>: Git will write a failure message to <code>stderr</code> when parsing a URL
11424   with a plaintext credential.
11425 </p>
11426 </li>
11427 </ul></div>
11428 </dd>
11429 <dt class="hdlist1">
11430 transfer.fsckObjects
11431 </dt>
11432 <dd>
11433 <p>
11434         When <code>fetch.fsckObjects</code> or <code>receive.fsckObjects</code> are
11435         not set, the value of this variable is used instead.
11436         Defaults to false.
11437 </p>
11438 <div class="paragraph"><p>When set, the fetch or receive will abort in the case of a malformed
11439 object or a link to a nonexistent object. In addition, various other
11440 issues are checked for, including legacy issues (see <code>fsck.&lt;msg-id&gt;</code>),
11441 and potential security issues like the existence of a <code>.GIT</code> directory
11442 or a malicious <code>.gitmodules</code> file (see the release notes for v2.2.1
11443 and v2.17.1 for details). Other sanity and security checks may be
11444 added in future releases.</p></div>
11445 <div class="paragraph"><p>On the receiving side, failing fsckObjects will make those objects
11446 unreachable, see "QUARANTINE ENVIRONMENT" in
11447 <a href="git-receive-pack.html">git-receive-pack(1)</a>. On the fetch side, malformed objects will
11448 instead be left unreferenced in the repository.</p></div>
11449 <div class="paragraph"><p>Due to the non-quarantine nature of the <code>fetch.fsckObjects</code>
11450 implementation it cannot be relied upon to leave the object store
11451 clean like <code>receive.fsckObjects</code> can.</p></div>
11452 <div class="paragraph"><p>As objects are unpacked they&#8217;re written to the object store, so there
11453 can be cases where malicious objects get introduced even though the
11454 "fetch" failed, only to have a subsequent "fetch" succeed because only
11455 new incoming objects are checked, not those that have already been
11456 written to the object store. That difference in behavior should not be
11457 relied upon. In the future, such objects may be quarantined for
11458 "fetch" as well.</p></div>
11459 <div class="paragraph"><p>For now, the paranoid need to find some way to emulate the quarantine
11460 environment if they&#8217;d like the same protection as "push". E.g. in the
11461 case of an internal mirror do the mirroring in two steps, one to fetch
11462 the untrusted objects, and then do a second "push" (which will use the
11463 quarantine) to another internal repo, and have internal clients
11464 consume this pushed-to repository, or embargo internal fetches and
11465 only allow them once a full "fsck" has run (and no new fetches have
11466 happened in the meantime).</p></div>
11467 </dd>
11468 <dt class="hdlist1">
11469 transfer.hideRefs
11470 </dt>
11471 <dd>
11472 <p>
11473         String(s) <code>receive-pack</code> and <code>upload-pack</code> use to decide which
11474         refs to omit from their initial advertisements.  Use more than
11475         one definition to specify multiple prefix strings. A ref that is
11476         under the hierarchies listed in the value of this variable is
11477         excluded, and is hidden when responding to <code>git push</code> or <code>git
11478         fetch</code>.  See <code>receive.hideRefs</code> and <code>uploadpack.hideRefs</code> for
11479         program-specific versions of this config.
11480 </p>
11481 <div class="paragraph"><p>You may also include a <code>!</code> in front of the ref name to negate the entry,
11482 explicitly exposing it, even if an earlier entry marked it as hidden.
11483 If you have multiple hideRefs values, later entries override earlier ones
11484 (and entries in more-specific config files override less-specific ones).</p></div>
11485 <div class="paragraph"><p>If a namespace is in use, the namespace prefix is stripped from each
11486 reference before it is matched against <code>transfer.hiderefs</code> patterns. In
11487 order to match refs before stripping, add a <code>^</code> in front of the ref name. If
11488 you combine <code>!</code> and <code>^</code>, <code>!</code> must be specified first.</p></div>
11489 <div class="paragraph"><p>For example, if <code>refs/heads/master</code> is specified in <code>transfer.hideRefs</code> and
11490 the current namespace is <code>foo</code>, then <code>refs/namespaces/foo/refs/heads/master</code>
11491 is omitted from the advertisements. If <code>uploadpack.allowRefInWant</code> is set,
11492 <code>upload-pack</code> will treat <code>want-ref refs/heads/master</code> in a protocol v2
11493 <code>fetch</code> command as if <code>refs/namespaces/foo/refs/heads/master</code> did not exist.
11494 <code>receive-pack</code>, on the other hand, will still advertise the object id the
11495 ref is pointing to without mentioning its name (a so-called ".have" line).</p></div>
11496 <div class="paragraph"><p>Even if you hide refs, a client may still be able to steal the target
11497 objects via the techniques described in the "SECURITY" section of the
11498 <a href="gitnamespaces.html">gitnamespaces(7)</a> man page; it&#8217;s best to keep private data in a
11499 separate repository.</p></div>
11500 </dd>
11501 <dt class="hdlist1">
11502 transfer.unpackLimit
11503 </dt>
11504 <dd>
11505 <p>
11506         When <code>fetch.unpackLimit</code> or <code>receive.unpackLimit</code> are
11507         not set, the value of this variable is used instead.
11508         The default value is 100.
11509 </p>
11510 </dd>
11511 <dt class="hdlist1">
11512 transfer.advertiseSID
11513 </dt>
11514 <dd>
11515 <p>
11516         Boolean. When true, client and server processes will advertise their
11517         unique session IDs to their remote counterpart. Defaults to false.
11518 </p>
11519 </dd>
11520 <dt class="hdlist1">
11521 transfer.bundleURI
11522 </dt>
11523 <dd>
11524 <p>
11525         When <code>true</code>, local <code>git clone</code> commands will request bundle
11526         information from the remote server (if advertised) and download
11527         bundles before continuing the clone through the Git protocol.
11528         Defaults to <code>false</code>.
11529 </p>
11530 </dd>
11531 <dt class="hdlist1">
11532 uploadarchive.allowUnreachable
11533 </dt>
11534 <dd>
11535 <p>
11536         If true, allow clients to use <code>git archive --remote</code> to request
11537         any tree, whether reachable from the ref tips or not. See the
11538         discussion in the "SECURITY" section of
11539         <a href="git-upload-archive.html">git-upload-archive(1)</a> for more details. Defaults to
11540         <code>false</code>.
11541 </p>
11542 </dd>
11543 <dt class="hdlist1">
11544 uploadpack.hideRefs
11545 </dt>
11546 <dd>
11547 <p>
11548         This variable is the same as <code>transfer.hideRefs</code>, but applies
11549         only to <code>upload-pack</code> (and so affects only fetches, not pushes).
11550         An attempt to fetch a hidden ref by <code>git fetch</code> will fail.  See
11551         also <code>uploadpack.allowTipSHA1InWant</code>.
11552 </p>
11553 </dd>
11554 <dt class="hdlist1">
11555 uploadpack.allowTipSHA1InWant
11556 </dt>
11557 <dd>
11558 <p>
11559         When <code>uploadpack.hideRefs</code> is in effect, allow <code>upload-pack</code>
11560         to accept a fetch request that asks for an object at the tip
11561         of a hidden ref (by default, such a request is rejected).
11562         See also <code>uploadpack.hideRefs</code>.  Even if this is false, a client
11563         may be able to steal objects via the techniques described in the
11564         "SECURITY" section of the <a href="gitnamespaces.html">gitnamespaces(7)</a> man page; it&#8217;s
11565         best to keep private data in a separate repository.
11566 </p>
11567 </dd>
11568 <dt class="hdlist1">
11569 uploadpack.allowReachableSHA1InWant
11570 </dt>
11571 <dd>
11572 <p>
11573         Allow <code>upload-pack</code> to accept a fetch request that asks for an
11574         object that is reachable from any ref tip. However, note that
11575         calculating object reachability is computationally expensive.
11576         Defaults to <code>false</code>.  Even if this is false, a client may be able
11577         to steal objects via the techniques described in the "SECURITY"
11578         section of the <a href="gitnamespaces.html">gitnamespaces(7)</a> man page; it&#8217;s best to
11579         keep private data in a separate repository.
11580 </p>
11581 </dd>
11582 <dt class="hdlist1">
11583 uploadpack.allowAnySHA1InWant
11584 </dt>
11585 <dd>
11586 <p>
11587         Allow <code>upload-pack</code> to accept a fetch request that asks for any
11588         object at all.
11589         Defaults to <code>false</code>.
11590 </p>
11591 </dd>
11592 <dt class="hdlist1">
11593 uploadpack.keepAlive
11594 </dt>
11595 <dd>
11596 <p>
11597         When <code>upload-pack</code> has started <code>pack-objects</code>, there may be a
11598         quiet period while <code>pack-objects</code> prepares the pack. Normally
11599         it would output progress information, but if <code>--quiet</code> was used
11600         for the fetch, <code>pack-objects</code> will output nothing at all until
11601         the pack data begins. Some clients and networks may consider
11602         the server to be hung and give up. Setting this option instructs
11603         <code>upload-pack</code> to send an empty keepalive packet every
11604         <code>uploadpack.keepAlive</code> seconds. Setting this option to 0
11605         disables keepalive packets entirely. The default is 5 seconds.
11606 </p>
11607 </dd>
11608 <dt class="hdlist1">
11609 uploadpack.packObjectsHook
11610 </dt>
11611 <dd>
11612 <p>
11613         If this option is set, when <code>upload-pack</code> would run
11614         <code>git pack-objects</code> to create a packfile for a client, it will
11615         run this shell command instead.  The <code>pack-objects</code> command and
11616         arguments it <em>would</em> have run (including the <code>git pack-objects</code>
11617         at the beginning) are appended to the shell command. The stdin
11618         and stdout of the hook are treated as if <code>pack-objects</code> itself
11619         was run. I.e., <code>upload-pack</code> will feed input intended for
11620         <code>pack-objects</code> to the hook, and expects a completed packfile on
11621         stdout.
11622 </p>
11623 <div class="paragraph"><p>Note that this configuration variable is only respected when it is specified
11624 in protected configuration (see <a href="#SCOPES">[SCOPES]</a>). This is a safety measure
11625 against fetching from untrusted repositories.</p></div>
11626 </dd>
11627 <dt class="hdlist1">
11628 uploadpack.allowFilter
11629 </dt>
11630 <dd>
11631 <p>
11632         If this option is set, <code>upload-pack</code> will support partial
11633         clone and partial fetch object filtering.
11634 </p>
11635 </dd>
11636 <dt class="hdlist1">
11637 uploadpackfilter.allow
11638 </dt>
11639 <dd>
11640 <p>
11641         Provides a default value for unspecified object filters (see: the
11642         below configuration variable). If set to <code>true</code>, this will also
11643         enable all filters which get added in the future.
11644         Defaults to <code>true</code>.
11645 </p>
11646 </dd>
11647 <dt class="hdlist1">
11648 uploadpackfilter.&lt;filter&gt;.allow
11649 </dt>
11650 <dd>
11651 <p>
11652         Explicitly allow or ban the object filter corresponding to
11653         <code>&lt;filter&gt;</code>, where <code>&lt;filter&gt;</code> may be one of: <code>blob:none</code>,
11654         <code>blob:limit</code>, <code>object:type</code>, <code>tree</code>, <code>sparse:oid</code>, or <code>combine</code>.
11655         If using combined filters, both <code>combine</code> and all of the nested
11656         filter kinds must be allowed. Defaults to <code>uploadpackfilter.allow</code>.
11657 </p>
11658 </dd>
11659 <dt class="hdlist1">
11660 uploadpackfilter.tree.maxDepth
11661 </dt>
11662 <dd>
11663 <p>
11664         Only allow <code>--filter=tree:&lt;n&gt;</code> when <code>&lt;n&gt;</code> is no more than the value of
11665         <code>uploadpackfilter.tree.maxDepth</code>. If set, this also implies
11666         <code>uploadpackfilter.tree.allow=true</code>, unless this configuration
11667         variable had already been set. Has no effect if unset.
11668 </p>
11669 </dd>
11670 <dt class="hdlist1">
11671 uploadpack.allowRefInWant
11672 </dt>
11673 <dd>
11674 <p>
11675         If this option is set, <code>upload-pack</code> will support the <code>ref-in-want</code>
11676         feature of the protocol version 2 <code>fetch</code> command.  This feature
11677         is intended for the benefit of load-balanced servers which may
11678         not have the same view of what OIDs their refs point to due to
11679         replication delay.
11680 </p>
11681 </dd>
11682 <dt class="hdlist1">
11683 url.&lt;base&gt;.insteadOf
11684 </dt>
11685 <dd>
11686 <p>
11687         Any URL that starts with this value will be rewritten to
11688         start, instead, with &lt;base&gt;. In cases where some site serves a
11689         large number of repositories, and serves them with multiple
11690         access methods, and some users need to use different access
11691         methods, this feature allows people to specify any of the
11692         equivalent URLs and have Git automatically rewrite the URL to
11693         the best alternative for the particular user, even for a
11694         never-before-seen repository on the site.  When more than one
11695         insteadOf strings match a given URL, the longest match is used.
11696 </p>
11697 <div class="paragraph"><p>Note that any protocol restrictions will be applied to the rewritten
11698 URL. If the rewrite changes the URL to use a custom protocol or remote
11699 helper, you may need to adjust the <code>protocol.*.allow</code> config to permit
11700 the request.  In particular, protocols you expect to use for submodules
11701 must be set to <code>always</code> rather than the default of <code>user</code>. See the
11702 description of <code>protocol.allow</code> above.</p></div>
11703 </dd>
11704 <dt class="hdlist1">
11705 url.&lt;base&gt;.pushInsteadOf
11706 </dt>
11707 <dd>
11708 <p>
11709         Any URL that starts with this value will not be pushed to;
11710         instead, it will be rewritten to start with &lt;base&gt;, and the
11711         resulting URL will be pushed to. In cases where some site serves
11712         a large number of repositories, and serves them with multiple
11713         access methods, some of which do not allow push, this feature
11714         allows people to specify a pull-only URL and have Git
11715         automatically use an appropriate URL to push, even for a
11716         never-before-seen repository on the site.  When more than one
11717         pushInsteadOf strings match a given URL, the longest match is
11718         used.  If a remote has an explicit pushurl, Git will ignore this
11719         setting for that remote.
11720 </p>
11721 </dd>
11722 <dt class="hdlist1">
11723 user.name
11724 </dt>
11725 <dt class="hdlist1">
11726 user.email
11727 </dt>
11728 <dt class="hdlist1">
11729 author.name
11730 </dt>
11731 <dt class="hdlist1">
11732 author.email
11733 </dt>
11734 <dt class="hdlist1">
11735 committer.name
11736 </dt>
11737 <dt class="hdlist1">
11738 committer.email
11739 </dt>
11740 <dd>
11741 <p>
11742         The <code>user.name</code> and <code>user.email</code> variables determine what ends
11743         up in the <code>author</code> and <code>committer</code> fields of commit
11744         objects.
11745         If you need the <code>author</code> or <code>committer</code> to be different, the
11746         <code>author.name</code>, <code>author.email</code>, <code>committer.name</code>, or
11747         <code>committer.email</code> variables can be set.
11748         All of these can be overridden by the <code>GIT_AUTHOR_NAME</code>,
11749         <code>GIT_AUTHOR_EMAIL</code>, <code>GIT_COMMITTER_NAME</code>,
11750         <code>GIT_COMMITTER_EMAIL</code>, and <code>EMAIL</code> environment variables.
11751 </p>
11752 <div class="paragraph"><p>Note that the <code>name</code> forms of these variables conventionally refer to
11753 some form of a personal name.  See <a href="git-commit.html">git-commit(1)</a> and the
11754 environment variables section of <a href="git.html">git(1)</a> for more information on
11755 these settings and the <code>credential.username</code> option if you&#8217;re looking
11756 for authentication credentials instead.</p></div>
11757 </dd>
11758 <dt class="hdlist1">
11759 user.useConfigOnly
11760 </dt>
11761 <dd>
11762 <p>
11763         Instruct Git to avoid trying to guess defaults for <code>user.email</code>
11764         and <code>user.name</code>, and instead retrieve the values only from the
11765         configuration. For example, if you have multiple email addresses
11766         and would like to use a different one for each repository, then
11767         with this configuration option set to <code>true</code> in the global config
11768         along with a name, Git will prompt you to set up an email before
11769         making new commits in a newly cloned repository.
11770         Defaults to <code>false</code>.
11771 </p>
11772 </dd>
11773 <dt class="hdlist1">
11774 user.signingKey
11775 </dt>
11776 <dd>
11777 <p>
11778         If <a href="git-tag.html">git-tag(1)</a> or <a href="git-commit.html">git-commit(1)</a> is not selecting the
11779         key you want it to automatically when creating a signed tag or
11780         commit, you can override the default selection with this variable.
11781         This option is passed unchanged to gpg&#8217;s --local-user parameter,
11782         so you may specify a key using any method that gpg supports.
11783         If gpg.format is set to <code>ssh</code> this can contain the path to either
11784         your private ssh key or the public key when ssh-agent is used.
11785         Alternatively it can contain a public key prefixed with <code>key::</code>
11786         directly (e.g.: "key::ssh-rsa XXXXXX identifier"). The private key
11787         needs to be available via ssh-agent. If not set Git will call
11788         gpg.ssh.defaultKeyCommand (e.g.: "ssh-add -L") and try to use the
11789         first key available. For backward compatibility, a raw key which
11790         begins with "ssh-", such as "ssh-rsa XXXXXX identifier", is treated
11791         as "key::ssh-rsa XXXXXX identifier", but this form is deprecated;
11792         use the <code>key::</code> form instead.
11793 </p>
11794 </dd>
11795 <dt class="hdlist1">
11796 versionsort.prereleaseSuffix (deprecated)
11797 </dt>
11798 <dd>
11799 <p>
11800         Deprecated alias for <code>versionsort.suffix</code>.  Ignored if
11801         <code>versionsort.suffix</code> is set.
11802 </p>
11803 </dd>
11804 <dt class="hdlist1">
11805 versionsort.suffix
11806 </dt>
11807 <dd>
11808 <p>
11809         Even when version sort is used in <a href="git-tag.html">git-tag(1)</a>, tagnames
11810         with the same base version but different suffixes are still sorted
11811         lexicographically, resulting e.g. in prerelease tags appearing
11812         after the main release (e.g. "1.0-rc1" after "1.0").  This
11813         variable can be specified to determine the sorting order of tags
11814         with different suffixes.
11815 </p>
11816 <div class="paragraph"><p>By specifying a single suffix in this variable, any tagname containing
11817 that suffix will appear before the corresponding main release.  E.g. if
11818 the variable is set to "-rc", then all "1.0-rcX" tags will appear before
11819 "1.0".  If specified multiple times, once per suffix, then the order of
11820 suffixes in the configuration will determine the sorting order of tagnames
11821 with those suffixes.  E.g. if "-pre" appears before "-rc" in the
11822 configuration, then all "1.0-preX" tags will be listed before any
11823 "1.0-rcX" tags.  The placement of the main release tag relative to tags
11824 with various suffixes can be determined by specifying the empty suffix
11825 among those other suffixes.  E.g. if the suffixes "-rc", "", "-ck", and
11826 "-bfs" appear in the configuration in this order, then all "v4.8-rcX" tags
11827 are listed first, followed by "v4.8", then "v4.8-ckX" and finally
11828 "v4.8-bfsX".</p></div>
11829 <div class="paragraph"><p>If more than one suffix matches the same tagname, then that tagname will
11830 be sorted according to the suffix which starts at the earliest position in
11831 the tagname.  If more than one different matching suffix starts at
11832 that earliest position, then that tagname will be sorted according to the
11833 longest of those suffixes.
11834 The sorting order between different suffixes is undefined if they are
11835 in multiple config files.</p></div>
11836 </dd>
11837 <dt class="hdlist1">
11838 web.browser
11839 </dt>
11840 <dd>
11841 <p>
11842         Specify a web browser that may be used by some commands.
11843         Currently only <a href="git-instaweb.html">git-instaweb(1)</a> and <a href="git-help.html">git-help(1)</a>
11844         may use it.
11845 </p>
11846 </dd>
11847 <dt class="hdlist1">
11848 worktree.guessRemote
11849 </dt>
11850 <dd>
11851 <p>
11852         If no branch is specified and neither <code>-b</code> nor <code>-B</code> nor
11853         <code>--detach</code> is used, then <code>git worktree add</code> defaults to
11854         creating a new branch from HEAD.  If <code>worktree.guessRemote</code> is
11855         set to true, <code>worktree add</code> tries to find a remote-tracking
11856         branch whose name uniquely matches the new branch name.  If
11857         such a branch exists, it is checked out and set as "upstream"
11858         for the new branch.  If no such match can be found, it falls
11859         back to creating a new branch from the current HEAD.
11860 </p>
11861 </dd>
11862 </dl></div>
11863 </div>
11864 </div>
11865 </div>
11866 <div class="sect1">
11867 <h2 id="_bugs">BUGS</h2>
11868 <div class="sectionbody">
11869 <div class="paragraph"><p>When using the deprecated <code>[section.subsection]</code> syntax, changing a value
11870 will result in adding a multi-line key instead of a change, if the subsection
11871 is given with at least one uppercase character. For example when the config
11872 looks like</p></div>
11873 <div class="listingblock">
11874 <div class="content">
11875 <pre><code>  [section.subsection]
11876     key = value1</code></pre>
11877 </div></div>
11878 <div class="paragraph"><p>and running <code>git config section.Subsection.key value2</code> will result in</p></div>
11879 <div class="listingblock">
11880 <div class="content">
11881 <pre><code>  [section.subsection]
11882     key = value1
11883     key = value2</code></pre>
11884 </div></div>
11885 </div>
11886 </div>
11887 <div class="sect1">
11888 <h2 id="_git">GIT</h2>
11889 <div class="sectionbody">
11890 <div class="paragraph"><p>Part of the <a href="git.html">git(1)</a> suite</p></div>
11891 </div>
11892 </div>
11893 </div>
11894 <div id="footnotes"><hr /></div>
11895 <div id="footer">
11896 <div id="footer-text">
11897 Last updated
11898  2023-09-22 17:04:28 PDT
11899 </div>
11900 </div>
11901 </body>
11902 </html>